40 + Easy No-Cook Recipes (Delicious Raw Food Ideas) - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/special-diet/raw-food/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Tue, 23 Dec 2025 16:43:26 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.3 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/cropped-cropped-Foolproof-Living-Favicon-image-resized-32x32.png 40 + Easy No-Cook Recipes (Delicious Raw Food Ideas) - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/special-diet/raw-food/ 32 32 Smoked Salmon Platter https://foolproofliving.com/smoked-salmon-platter/ https://foolproofliving.com/smoked-salmon-platter/#respond Wed, 17 Dec 2025 18:10:03 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=85332 Ingredients You’ll Need for a Smoked Salmon Board Most of the ingredients for this platter are easy to find, and…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

Whenever I am entertaining friends, I like having a few reliable dishes that don’t require planning ahead or a long list of ingredients. My only rule is that they should offer a nice mix of textures and tastes, like something creamy, something tangy, something fresh, and a little crunch in there too.

Oh, and the food photographer in me wants it to be as colorful as possible.

This simple smoked salmon board checks all those boxes. It is less about exact measurements and more about how you place each ingredient so the whole board feels balanced. Over the years of working with food, I have learned that a few small choices can make something simple look thoughtful on the table. 

My hope is that this guide gives you enough structure to feel confident, while still letting you make it your own.

Ingredients You’ll Need for a Smoked Salmon Board

Most of the ingredients for this platter are easy to find, and you may already have a few of them in your fridge. The goal here isn’t to follow a strict list but to bring together a mix of textures and colors that complement the main ingredient, smoked salmon. 

I’ll walk you through what I used, along with a few substitution ideas, so you can build a board that fits your taste, budget, and whatever is available at your grocery store:

Ingredients in small portions from the top view.

Smoked Salmon

My top choice for this platter is cold-smoked wild salmon, but farm-raised smoked salmon would also work.

While you are in the smoked salmon aisle, you might also see other packaged salmon labeled as lox, gravlax, or even hot-smoked salmon. I’ve also seen flavored options, where smoked salmon is coated with flavorings like mustard, dill, or other fresh herbs.

How are smoked salmon, lox, and gravlax different from each other?

Smoked salmon is cured and then smoked, giving it a gentle smoky taste, whereas lox is cured with salt and not smoked, with a mild, briny taste. Gravlax is similar to lox but cured with dill, sugar, and salt, offering a more herbal taste.

You can use all of those as you are setting up your smoked salmon board. Each kind will offer a slightly different taste and texture, but all of them would work.

How much smoked salmon per person? I usually plan for about 3 ounces (85g) per person. You can always serve less or more, depending on your guests.

What to look for at the store: Use a brand you trust and pay attention to a few qualities:

  • The salmon should have a light natural shine, but it shouldn’t look overly oily. Too much oil often means it wasn’t cured properly.
  • Check the ingredient list. The highest quality smoked salmon will often list only salmon, salt, and smoke. Avoid brands with added colorings, oils, or long lists of hard-to-pronounce preservatives.

Fresh Produce & Vegetables

For the vegetables, I like to keep things simple and easy to find. The goal is to add color, freshness, and a bit of crunch to balance the salmon.

For this smoked salmon tray, I used sliced Persian cucumbers, cherry tomatoes cut in half, and thinly sliced radishes.

While I personally suggest these everyday vegetables, please keep in mind that there is no set rule here. Feel free to use whatever looks good at the store or what you already have in your fridge.

I also like to use fresh herbs to complement the vegetables and add a pop of fresh color to my smoked seafood platter.

Fresh dill is usually the classic pairing with salmon, but chives or parsley work just as well. Just a small handful scattered around the board is more than enough.

Cheese & Eggs

I like adding a soft, creamy element to my smoked salmon board, like soft cheese and eggs, because their textures and flavors pair well with the salmon’s smoky flavors.

Cheese: When it comes to cheese, I prefer soft varieties like cream cheese, feta, and labneh as they are easier to spread on bread or crackers. 

As you can see in the photos, I served my smoked salmon platter with whipped cream cheese, as it is widely available and easy to just scoop into a small bowl. If you want a more flavorful soft cheese, you can pick up a tub of Boursin. 

If you are serving this as an appetizer during the holidays, creme fraiche or mascarpone can be a luxurious addition to your board.

Alternatively, if you want to take things up a notch, you can whip up a batch of my Whipped Feta or even my copycat version of CAVA’s Feta Dip.

Eggs: Hard-boiled eggs are traditional, but soft-boiled eggs work just as well if you like a creamier center. I like to cut them in half, but you can also slice them depending on how you plan to arrange them on your board.

Pickled & Briny Add-Ons

I always include at least one pickled or briny element on my smoked salmon board. The acidity helps cut through the richness of smoked salmon and cream cheese, offering yet another layer of texture and flavor.

  • Capers, pickled onions, olives, or marinated artichokes: Any of these will work. Capers are the classic choice, but pickled red onions add a pretty color, and marinated artichokes bring a Mediterranean touch that pairs surprisingly well with salmon. You can pick one or mix a couple together, depending on what you have on hand.
  • Red onion: Thinly sliced red onion is a common pairing with salmon, but if you don’t love raw onion, you can place scallions in a small bowl or leave them out completely.

Breads & Crackers

I like offering a mix of breads and crackers so guests can build their bites however they like. Feel free to choose two or three options that you enjoy. Really, anything sturdy enough to spread with whipped cream cheese and hold the salmon and toppings will work.

You don’t need a large variety, but having a few different textures makes the board feel more elevated.

  • Bagels and bread: Mini bagels are always a hit, especially when you include plain, everything, or sesame. Thinly sliced and lightly toasted French baguette or rye bread are great options as well.
  • Crackers: I usually include a few types. Bagel chips (I love the ones from Stacy’s), assorted crackers, or even pita chips work well. If you or your guests need gluten-free options, my Homemade Seed Crackers are a perfect choice, or get your favorite gluten-free cracker from the store.

Drinks & Wine Pairings (Optional)

I think we can all agree that you can’t serve a smoked fish platter like this without serving some drinks. It is optional, but below are a few of my favorites:

  • Dry white wine: A chilled Sauvignon Blanc or Pinot Grigio works beautifully. Both cut through the richness of the salmon without overpowering it.
  • Sparkling wine: Prosecco or Champagne are great options for a celebratory Mother’s Day brunch or a Christmas holiday gathering.
  • Non-alcoholic: Sparkling water with a slice of lemon or lime is my go-to, but any citrusy or herbal sparkling drink works well here.

How to Assemble a Smoked Salmon Platter

Think of these steps as a little guidance rather than strict rules. There is no right or wrong way here; these steps are mainly to help you keep everything looking balanced.

Here’s how I usually put the platter together so it feels thoughtfully arranged:

Steps showing how to arrange cream cheese, capers, and smoked salmon on a platter.

Step 1 – Start with the bowls: Begin by placing the whipped cream cheese in a medium bowl and the capers in a small one, then set them on your platter. I like to place the smaller bowl just to the right and slightly under the cream cheese, so it doesn’t feel crowded. 

Starting with the bowls will give you anchor points, which makes it easier to fill in the rest of the platter without everything sliding around. It also adds height, making the board feel more styled and intentional.

Step 2 – Add the salmon: Arrange the salmon in loose folds or ribbons on each side of the bowls, slightly off-center. I like to set them so that each piece is visible (rather than on top of each other), so your guests can easily serve themselves.

Keep in mind that we are not aiming for perfection here. Try to leave a little space around the edges to make room for the vegetables and keep the platter from looking too packed. 

A collage of images showing how to make a smoked salmon platter appetizer.

Step 3 – Layer in the vegetables: Tuck the cucumber slices, cherry tomatoes, radishes, olives, and red onions around the salmon. Think about color as you go. If you place two vegetables of the same color side by side, swap one with something with a different color or texture.

This simple trick keeps the platter from looking flat and makes it feel brighter without needing more ingredients. 

Step 4 – Add the eggs: Scatter the halved eggs on both ends of the platter. Drizzle them with olive oil and sprinkle with Everything but the Bagel seasoning (or simple salt and black pepper) so that they are properly seasoned.

Smoked salmon appetizer platter arranged with vegetables and cheese from the top view.

Step 5 – Finish with lemon and herbs and serve: Tuck in a few lemon wedges and sprigs of fresh dill to complete the whole platter. Lastly, serve the platter with toasted baguette slices or your favorite crackers on the side so everyone can build their own bites.

Expert Tips for Success

Color and texture balance: Spread out the colorful ingredients for visual appeal. I also like mixing different textures. So doing something crisp, something creamy, something briny, so every bite feels interesting.

Use small bowls: There is no set rule here, but I like to place creamy and liquid-y items like cheese and sauces (if using) in small bowls on the plate. However, as you are choosing your bowls, keep the size of your platter in mind. You do not want them to take over the whole platter.

Don’t forget utensils for serving: Be sure to place a butter knife next to the cream cheese for spreading and a small serving tong (or a small fork) by the smoked salmon so people can help themselves.

Serve with small plates: This makes it easier for guests to build their own bites and keeps the platter looking tidy for longer.

Have extra vegetables ready: If you’re hosting a larger group, keep a small stash of sliced cucumbers, tomatoes, or radishes in the fridge. You can quickly replenish the platter without stopping to prep more food.

Keep food safety in mind: Because smoked salmon is a perishable protein, I try not to leave it out at room temperature for more than 2 hours. If you’re serving this outdoors or in warm weather, shorten that time a bit. I prefer to replenish with fresh slices rather than leaving the entire package out at once.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Smoked salmon platter from the top view.
Print

Smoked Salmon Platter Recipe

This smoked salmon platter is an easy-to-assemble appetizer great for any party, whether it is a brunch or holiday gathering. Made with store-bought smoked salmon, crisp everyday vegetables, creamy whipped cream cheese, and briny olives and capers, it’s a showstopping centerpiece you can put together in 20 minutes. Serve with crackers or toasted bread so guests can build their own bites.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 521kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 oz whipped cream cheese
  • ¼ cup capers drained
  • 12 oz smoked salmon wild-caught, preferably
  • 2 Persian cucumbers sliced
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes cut in half
  • 3 radishes sliced thinly
  • ½ cup olives black, green, or a combination of both
  • ½ red onion sliced thinly – pickled onions
  • 4 hard-boiled eggs cut in half lengthwise
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon Everything but the Bagel seasoning optional (or just salt and pepper)
  • 4 slices lemon
  • ½ cup fresh dill optional
  • 8-10 slices French baguette toasted and/or crackers to serve

Instructions

  • Put the whipped cream cheese in a medium-sized bowl and capers in a small bowl. Arrange them on a large oval platter (or a board). I like to place the smaller bowl of capers to the right of the cream cheese bowl, slightly lower towards the top of the platter.
  • Place the salmon slightly off-center, fanned or folded into loose ribbons. Leave a little space around the edges to tuck other items in later.
  • Arrange the sliced cucumbers, cherry tomatoes, radishes, olives, and red onions around the salmon.
  • Scatter the halved hard-boiled eggs on both ends of the platter. Drizzle them with olive oil and sprinkle with Everything but the Bagel seasoning.
  • Garnish with lemon slices and fresh dill.
  • Serve with a toasted baguette or crackers on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: I usually serve 3 oz (85g) of smoked salmon per person, so this recipe serves 4 adults. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • How long does a salmon platter stay fresh? Once assembled, it is best to consume it within two hours for food safety. It is best to take out just enough and replenish as needed. I like to keep extra salmon and veggies ready in the fridge and add to my board throughout the evening.

Nutrition

Calories: 521kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 31g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 235mg | Sodium: 1790mg | Potassium: 543mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 1463IU | Vitamin C: 20mg | Calcium: 169mg | Iron: 5mg

Make-Ahead Instructions and Storing Leftovers

How to make ahead: If you want to make this smoked salmon platter ahead of time, you can prepare most of it a few hours in advance, which is especially helpful if you’re hosting. Simply:

  • Prep all the components: Slice the vegetables, boil the eggs, and gather the pickled items in advance. Arrange everything on the platter, then cover it tightly with plastic wrap and refrigerate.
  • Add the salmon right before serving: I like to open the smoked salmon at the very last minute before serving so it stays fresh.

How to store leftovers: If you have leftovers, store each component in separate airtight containers. 

Smoked salmon is perishable, so aim to eat it within 24 hours. The vegetables, herbs, and pickled items usually last a bit longer, but I prefer consuming everything within a day or two.

How to use leftover salmon: Leftover salmon (and vegetables) is great to add into eggs, into a simple green salad, or tucked into a wrap for an easy lunch the next day so nothing is wasted.

FAQs

How much smoked salmon should I buy for a party platter?

If you are serving it as an appetizer, I recommend buying 2-3 oz (57-85g) of smoked salmon per person; if it is your main meal, it is best to go for 4-5 oz (114-142g) per person.

Can I make a smoked salmon platter the night before?

You can prep most of the ingredients ahead of time, but I prefer to open the salmon right before serving so it stays fresh. You can slice the vegetables, boil the eggs, and set aside any pickled items the day before. When you’re ready to serve, all you have to do is assemble the board.

What wine or drinks pair well with smoked salmon?

Crisp, light drinks complement the richness of salmon best. Dry white wines like Sauvignon Blanc or Pinot Grigio are classic, but if you are serving them for a special occasion, something festive like Prosecco, Cava, or Champagne also works well. For a non-alcoholic option, I like serving it with a flavored sparkling water.

More Easy Appetizer Recipes

Chances are, you are here because you need an easy yet delicious appetizer. The good news is that we have plenty of those on this website. Below are a few more easy appetizer recipes I think you might also like:

  • If you want another beautiful board that comes together with simple ingredients, my Meat and Cheese Platter walks you through everything from choosing the best meats and cheeses to arranging them to make the board feel balanced and inviting. 
  • For something quick and crowd-pleasing, my Olive Oil Bread Dip takes just a few minutes to make and is the perfect restaurant-style appetizer to set out with warm bread. 
  • And if you’re looking for a fun, make-ahead option, my Baked Goat Cheese Balls are crisp on the outside and creamy inside. I usually make a batch, keep them in the freezer, and bake them right before my guests arrive.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/smoked-salmon-platter/feed/ 0
Thanksgiving Fruit Salad https://foolproofliving.com/thanksgiving-fruit-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/thanksgiving-fruit-salad/#respond Mon, 24 Nov 2025 20:47:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=84688 Ingredients You’ll Need You’ll need two sets of ingredients for this festive fruit salad recipe: Mostly fall fruits for the…]]>
Aysegul from the front view.

When I think about Thanksgiving, my mind immediately goes to the turkey, all the cozy vegetable sides, and of course, the pies. What we do not often think about is having something on the lighter side.

I first made this fall fruit salad a few years ago for a big family gathering where we had both kids and older relatives at the table. 

The pies still stole the show, but a few people quietly thanked me for having an option that felt a little lighter without taking away from the holiday spirit. I especially love it because:

  • It uses a mix of everyday fall fruit like apples, pears, oranges, and pomegranates that you probably have on hand.
  • The maple-citrus dressing comes together quickly and helps keep the apples and pears from browning.

Yes, there is a bit of chopping, but once everything is in the bowl, it adds something fresh to all the richer dishes on the table.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll need two sets of ingredients for this festive fruit salad recipe: Mostly fall fruits for the salad and just a few basic ingredients for the dressing.

You can find the full ingredient list in the recipe card, and below are some notes from my recipe testing. 

Fruit Salad Ingredients

Fruits used in the recipe in small bowls from the top view.

Apples: You can easily make this fall fruit salad with one variety of apples, but if you have it, combining two types, like Gala or Honeycrisp with Fuji, gives a way better balance of sweetness and texture. If you prefer a little tartness, you can also mix in one Granny Smith apple. There are no strict rules here, just pick apples that are firm and not overly ripe.

Pears: The same principle goes for pears as well. Bartlet and Anjou are my favorites, but any type would work. When shopping, choose pears that are ripe but still firm so they hold their shape in the salad. 

Grapes: I’m using seedless green grapes for their sweet-tart flavor, but red grapes would work as well. Go with whichever you like best, but I recommend choosing seedless grapes for the best texture in the salad. I like to cut them in half, but if they are too large, you can quarter them as well.

Oranges: Any type of oranges, Navel, Cara Cara, or even Blood Oranges would work beautifully in this autumn fruit salad recipe. You can cut them into small cubes or section them if you have a few extra minutes.

If you need a shortcut, you can also use canned mandarin oranges, but keep in mind that most brands have added sugars, so your Thanksgiving fruit salad will be sweeter. Regardless, if you go down that route, be sure to drain them well.

Kiwi: Look for kiwi that is a little soft when you press it, soft enough to be sweet, but not mushy.

Pomegranate seeds: I love adding pomegranate to this salad because it feels so festive and adds a bright, tart flavor. You can certainly de-seed it yourself, but nowadays, stores sell fresh arils ready to use, which is definitely a good time saver.

If you do not have pomegranate seeds or prefer an alternative, dried cranberries are a good substitute. The dried fruit would give a welcome chewiness and a bit more sweetness to the overall recipe.

Pecans: This is my secret ingredient. The salad tasted good the first time I tried it without pecans, but once I added them, it completely transformed the dish, taking it to a whole other level. They add the best crunch. Walnuts could work too, but pecans are my favorite here.

If you prefer a nut-free option, you can omit it or use pumpkin seeds instead.

Dressing Ingredients

The dressing for this salad is light and simple, and the best part is that it comes together in less than a minute. You will need:

The dressing ingredients from the top view.

Maple syrup: You can use either maple syrup or honey in this dressing. I also recommend adjusting the amount based on how sweet your fruit is. If your fruit is very sweet, you may want a little less, and vice versa.

Orange juice: I use freshly squeezed orange juice because it not only flavors the salad but also helps keep the apples and pears from browning with its acidity. You could also use store-bought orange juice, just make sure to choose one without added sugars since both the fruit and maple syrup are already plenty sweet.

Ground cinnamon: I’m using it here because it complements the fall fruits very well, but you can also use apple pie spice or pumpkin pie spice if you prefer a slightly different fall flavor.

How to Make Fruit Salad For Thanksgiving

When I first tested this recipe, I chopped all the fruit, set it in a bowl, and then mixed the dressing. The apples and pears started browning right away, which wasn’t ideal.

What worked so much better was starting with the dressing in a large bowl, then adding the fruit as I cut it. The acid in the orange juice helps slow browning and keeps everything looking fresh. So, grab a big bowl and follow along.

A collage of images showing the steps of make the dressing and adding the apples and pears in there.

Step 1 – Make the dressing: Add the maple syrup, orange zest, orange juice, vanilla extract, and cinnamon to a large salad bowl, whisking until well combined.

Step 2 – Prep and add the fruit: Once the dressing is ready, start chopping the fruit. I like to start with apples and pears first so I can ensure they interact with the acid in the bowl, which slows browning. From there, you can continue with kiwi, pomegranate seeds, oranges, and grapes.

Gently toss all your fruit to coat it with the dressing.

Thanksgiving fruit salad recipe in a bowl before and after it is mixed.

Step 3 – Add the pecans and garnish: Right before serving, add the pecans to keep them crisp. If you want to add a little color and freshness, add a handful of torn fresh mint leaves. Give everything one last gentle toss, and it’s ready to serve.

Make-Ahead, Storage & Serving Tips

While this Thanksgiving fruit salad is always best the day it’s made, you can also prepare it in advance if you coat the fruit well with the citrus dressing. Here’s how to make it ahead, store it, and serve it so it still tastes fresh:

Make ahead: You can prepare this fruit salad 2-3 days in advance, which is especially helpful for busy holiday cooking. Just be sure your apples and pears are well coated in the citrus dressing, as the orange juice helps prevent them from browning. I also keep the pecans separate until right before serving so they don’t get soggy.

Storage: You can store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator. It will taste its best within the first 2-3 days. If the fruit looks a little soft after it’s been in the fridge, a squeeze of fresh orange juice or lemon juice, or a small drizzle of maple syrup or honey, brightens it back up.

Freezing: I do not recommend freezing fruit salad. The fruit becomes mushy once thawed and loses its fresh texture.

Expert Tips for Perfect Fruit Salad for Your Thanksgiving Table

Slightly ripened fruit works best: When shopping for this recipe, take a few minutes to pick fruit that’s ripe but not overly soft. You want that sweet-juicy moment when you bite in, without the fruit turning mushy once everything is mixed.

Coat apples and pears in citrus right away: Apples and pears oxidize quickly, so I always mix the orange dressing in the bottom of the bowl first, then add the apples and pears. The citrus coats the fruit the moment it goes in, keeping it fresh.

Cut the fruit into equal sizes: Aim for roughly ½-inch bite-sized pieces so the salad feels balanced and you get a little bit of everything in each bite.

Add pecans right before serving: Pecans soften if they sit in the dressing too long, so add them in at the end. If you have a few extra minutes and want to take this fall fruit salad recipe up a notch, toast your pecans in a dry pan for a few minutes to bring out more of their earthy flavors.

Use a mix of seasonal colors and textures: It’s optional, but I really encourage you to play with different varieties of fruit. For example, instead of sticking to one type of orange, try using both a Navel and a Cara Cara. You can do the same with apples and pears. It gives the salad a nicer mix of textures and a little more interest in every bite.

Chill before serving: Refrigerating the salad for 10-15 minutes before serving is optional, but it makes this fruit salad even more refreshing.

Serve in small jars: When I make this for Thanksgiving or Friendsgiving, I like to spoon it into little jars, almost like jam jars. It makes it easier because it is already portioned out. Plus, your guests won’t have to worry about it getting lost on a crowded plate.

Fruit salad for Thanksgiving in a bowl from the top view.

What to Serve It With

This autumn fruit salad is versatile and pairs well with so many things, whether you’re serving it to kids, having it for breakfast, or adding it to a holiday spread. Here are a few ideas:

  • If you’re serving this to kids, you can add my Fruit Dip Recipe on the side. It makes the salad feel more like a treat and is always a favorite with little ones.
  • You can also spoon some fruit salad over a bowl of  Vanilla Yogurt for a quick breakfast or snack. 
  • And if you want to take things up a notch for the holidays, serve the fruit salad with a dollop of my light and airy Maple Whipped Cream. It adds just the right touch of sweetness, making the whole dish feel extra special.

FAQs

How do you keep fruit salad from turning brown?

The best way to prevent apples and pears from browning is to coat them with an acidic ingredient, such as orange juice, which helps slow down the oxidation.

Can I make a fruit salad the night before?

Yes, this fruit salad holds up well when made the night before. Just be sure the apples and pears are fully coated in the orange juice mixture (to prevent them from browning), then give the salad a gentle toss before serving.

What fruits should I avoid in fruit salad?

Most people don’t like adding bananas to fruit salads because they turn mushy as they sit. In my opinion, it is a personal preference, and there are no strict rules. Instead, the important thing is to pick fruit that is neither overly ripe nor soft, and vice versa.

Can I use canned fruit in Thanksgiving fruit salad?

Yes, you technically can. However, keep in mind that most canned fruit is packed in a sugary liquid or juice, which will make your fruit salad sweeter. If you decide to go down that route, be sure to adjust the amount of maple syrup you use in the dressing so it is not overly sweet.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Fruit Salads You Might Like

If you enjoyed this Thanksgiving fruit salad, here are a few more fresh and delicious fruit salads I think you’ll love:

  • If you want something light to enjoy in the mornings, my Breakfast Fruit Salad is a simple recipe you can also make ahead. It’s easy to make and perfect for quick breakfasts or weekend brunch.
  • For something more festive, my Christmas Fruit Salad includes a mix of seasonal fruit tossed in a similar maple-citrus dressing. It’s a great way to add a pop of festive color to your Christmas celebrations.
Thanksgiving fruit salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Thanksgiving Fruit Salad Recipe

A crowd pleaser, this Thanksgiving Fruit Salad is a lighter addition to your dessert lineup made with fall fruits like apples, pears, oranges, and pomegranate arils. No cooking required and comes together quickly.
Course Vegan side dish
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 208kcal

Ingredients

For the dressing:

  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup or honey
  • 1 teaspoon orange zest
  • ½ cup orange juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • teaspoon ground cinnamon or apple spice

For the fruit:

  • 2 medium apples cut into cubes ~ 3 cups
  • 2 medium pears cut into cubes ~ 3 cups
  • 1 cup seedless green grapes cut in half
  • 1 cup pomegranate arils
  • 2 oranges cut into small pieces ~ 2 cups
  • 1 kiwi cut into cubes ~ ½ cup
  • 1 cup pecans or walnuts

Optional Garnish:

  • A handful of fresh mint leaves torn

Instructions

  • To make the dressing, mix together maple syrup, orange zest, orange juice, vanilla extract, and cinnamon in a large bowl until combined.
  • Add in the cubed apples and pears to the bowl and give it a quick toss to ensure they are coated with the dressing (aka the acid in the orange juice) to prevent browning.
  • Then add in the grapes, pomegranate arils, oranges, and kiwi to the bowl. Toss to combine.
  • When ready to serve, add the pecans and toss. If using, garnish with fresh mint leaves and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 8-9 cups of fruit salad, ideal for 8 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: You can make this recipe a day (or two) in advance. Just follow the recipe as written (except adding the pecans and mint garnish), place in an airtight container, and store it in the fridge. When ready to serve, transfer it to a serving platter and garnish with pecans and fresh mint leaves, if using.

Nutrition

Calories: 208kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 3mg | Potassium: 361mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin A: 171IU | Vitamin C: 41mg | Calcium: 44mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/thanksgiving-fruit-salad/feed/ 0
Compound Butter for Turkey https://foolproofliving.com/compound-butter-for-turkey/ https://foolproofliving.com/compound-butter-for-turkey/#comments Fri, 14 Nov 2025 13:45:55 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78361 Ingredients You’ll Need With Substitution Ideas The key ingredients in this compound butter recipe have the perfect balance of fresh…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from front view.

Growing up in Türkiye, we did not celebrate Thanksgiving, so I learned how to cook a turkey as an adult after moving to the U.S. more than 20 years ago. Over the years, watching more experienced cooks and learning from a few dry turkeys myself, I discovered one very important truth:

There is a tiny window between juicy perfection and dry disappointment.

So I started focusing on the techniques that truly keep turkey moist. One option is using a Turkey Injection to add seasoning and moisture inside the meat, but I also wanted an option that was easier and required no special tools.

That is where this compound butter, which I specifically created for turkey, comes in.

In the simplest terms, it is softened butter mixed with herbs, garlic, and spices that slowly melts under the skin as the turkey roasts, keeping the meat juicy and helping the skin turn beautifully golden and crisp.

To me, this make-ahead friendly recipe is a simple shortcut with big rewards. And in this post, I will walk you through everything you need to know, from the herbs and spices to use to the easiest way to spread it under the skin so you can confidently cook a tender, flavorful, perfectly browned turkey that everyone will love.

Ingredients You’ll Need With Substitution Ideas

The key ingredients in this compound butter recipe have the perfect balance of fresh herbs, citrus, and garlic, resulting in a perfectly seasoned turkey. You can find the exact measurements and the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few important notes from my testing:

Ingredients for butter mixture for turkey.

Unsalted butter: I like to use unsalted butter to control the amount of salt. With that said, you can use salted butter and reduce the salt to ¾ teaspoon.

Fresh herbs (or dried herbs): Fresh herbs will give you the best flavor. I like adding fresh rosemary, fresh thyme, and fresh sage, but you can also incorporate soft herbs like fresh parsley or chives.

While I recommend using fresh herbs, dried ones can also be used as an alternative. Use the chart below when substituting:

For 1 Stick (4 oz) of ButterDried Herb/Seasoning Equivalent
1 tbsp fresh rosemary1 tsp dried rosemary
1 tbsp fresh rhyme1 tsp dried thyme
1 tsp fresh sage1/3 tsp dried sage
2 cloves fresh garlic1/2 tsp garlic powder

How to Make Compound Butter for Turkey (Step-by-Step)

Once your ingredients are ready, this recipe can be prepared in under 5 minutes. Here’s how to make it step by step:

A collage of images showing how to make butter seasoning for turkey.

Step 1 – Mix butter, herbs, and garlic: In a small bowl, combine softened butter, rosemary, thyme, sage, garlic, lemon zest, Kosher salt, and black pepper. Mash the herbs into the butter with the back of a fork or a rubber spatula until well combined, for about 1 minute. If you’re using salted butter, just reduce the Kosher salt slightly.

A collage of images showing how to roll compound butter for thanksgiving turkey.

Step 2 – Use immediately or shape into a log: At this point, your turkey compound butter recipe is ready to use. You can use it right away or roll it up for later use. 

If you are planning to use it later, place the butter on a sheet of parchment paper or plastic wrap. Then shape it into a log, wrap it tightly, and refrigerate for at least 3 hours.

Pro tip: I like to twist the ends of the parchment like a candy wrapper. It helps the butter keep its shape and makes it super easy to slice later.

Make-Ahead, Storage, and Freezing Tips

One of the reasons I love using this compound butter for Thanksgiving turkey is that it can be made ahead of time, and it stores well. Here’s how I do it:

Make Ahead and Storage: Prepare the butter as directed, then shape it into a log and wrap it tightly in parchment or plastic wrap. I like to do a double wrap (plastic wrap followed by an airtight container) to keep it fresh and prevent it from picking up any fridge odors. It will keep well in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

Freezing: Follow the same wrapping steps and store the butter in a freezer-safe bag or container for up to 3 months.

Thawing: When you’re ready to use it, take it out of the freezer and let it sit at room temperature for about 1 hour, or until it softens enough to slice and spread.

Sliced Thanksgiving turkey compound butter with a knife on the side.

How to Apply Compound Butter Under Turkey Skin (Step-by-Step)

Now that our compound butter is ready, it’s time to put it to use. If it’s your first time spreading compound butter under the turkey skin, don’t worry, as it’s easier than it looks.

A person showing how to place butter and herbs under skin for turkey.

Step 1 – Dry the skin: Let your turkey rest at room temperature for about an hour before you start. This is critical because cold skin is rigid and prone to tearing, but a rested bird’s skin will loosen up and be much more forgiving.

Set your turkey on a clean cutting board and pat the skin dry with paper towels on all sides. This will help the butter stick better and ensure that it crisps up beautifully in the oven. 

Step 2 – Loosen the skin: Locate the neck opening and gently slide your fingers between the skin and meat to loosen it. 

If you feel resistance, stop immediately. Instead of forcing separation, gently wiggle your fingers so that it is loose enough to push the butter under the skin.

Step 3 – Apply the butter: Take about two tablespoons of your turkey butter herb rub and spread it under the skin, focusing on the breast and thighs. Spread it as evenly as possible by massaging the entire bird, including both the under and outer skin. 

Don’t worry about it being perfect, as the butter will melt while the turkey roasts.

Step 4 – Roast the turkey: Place the prepared turkey in a roasting pan with aromatics such as onions, carrots, and celery.

Compound Butter vs. Dry Rub: Which is Best for Your Turkey?

I’ll be honest, when it comes to seasoning the whole bird, this turkey compound butter recipe is my go-to. However, it is not the only way. If you are wondering whether to use this herbed butter or opt for my Homemade Turkey Rub, the choice comes down to your goal:

  • Choose Compound Butter for:
    • Maximum Moisture and Juiciness: The fat melts beneath the skin, self-basting the white meat throughout the long cooking time, which is key to a tender breast.
    • Golden-Brown Skin: The butter is brushed over the skin, which helps brown the turkey beautifully and develop a rich, buttery flavor.
    • Make-Ahead Simplicity: You can prepare this compound butter days in advance, saving time on Thanksgiving day.
  • Choose a Turkey Dry Rub for:
    • Ultra-Crispy Skin: A dry rub acts as a dry brine, helping to draw moisture from the skin and give you an extra-crispy exterior.
    • Convenience & Speed: If you are short on time and need a quick way to add seasoning, the dry rub is much faster to apply than the compound butter.

FAQs

How much compound butter do I need for turkey?

Over the years of using this compound butter when making our Thanksgiving turkey, I learned that 8 tablespoons (1 stick or 4 ounces) is enough for a bird that is up to 12 pounds, which is about ¾ tablespoon per pound. The important thing here is even distribution under and over the skin without overdoing it.
For a larger bird, you can easily multiply the recipe. If your turkey is between 12 and 18 pounds, multiply the ingredients by 1.5 times.

When should I butter my turkey?

It’s best to butter the turkey right before roasting. Applying the butter just before it goes in the oven helps the skin get crispy while the meat stays juicy and tender throughout cooking.

How to make butter stick to turkey?

If the butter isn’t spreading easily, it’s usually because the turkey skin is damp or the butter is too cold. I like to take the turkey out of the fridge about 1 hour before roasting and pat the skin completely dry with paper towels before adding the butter.

Can I add compound butter to the turkey cavity?

I’ve found it’s best to spread the butter under and over the skin rather than inside the cavity. That way, it melts evenly and keeps the skin golden instead of soggy.

Expert Tips for the Best Compound Butter for Turkey

If this is your first time making compound butter, these notes from several rounds of testing will help you get it just right every time:

  • Use softened butter: Let the butter sit at room temperature for about an hour, until it’s soft and spreadable. If it’s too firm, it won’t blend smoothly with the herbs and seasoning.
  • Rinse and dry your herbs: If you’re using fresh herbs, wash and dry them thoroughly before mincing, as they can hold onto moisture, which makes the butter watery. I like to place the washed herbs between two pieces of paper towels to absorb excess moisture; alternatively, put them in a salad spinner to remove as much liquid as possible.
  • Mince herbs finely: Chop your herbs as finely as possible to ensure they distribute evenly throughout the butter. 
  • A word on using fresh garlic and botulism: When using fresh garlic to make compound butter, keep in mind that a foodborne illness called botulism can occur if garlic is stored at temperatures between 50 °F (10 °C) and 113 °F (45 °C).  Therefore, be sure to keep this seasoned butter in the refrigerator unless you plan to use it within the next hour or so.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Delicious Ways to Use Compound Butter (Turkey and Beyond)

Now that you have this perfect turkey butter prepared, it’s ready to transform your Thanksgiving centerpiece. In fact, this is what I use in my Butter Herb Roasted Turkey and Roasted Turkey Breast recipes.

That being said, just because I’m featuring this compound butter for turkey does not mean it cannot be used in other ways. It is truly the perfect finishing touch to many different meals. Here are a few suggestions:

  • Grilled or Roasted Meat Recipes: It’s hard to find a steakhouse that doesn’t serve a slice of compound butter over their hot, juicy steaks. Make a restaurant-quality meal at home by serving rounds of herb butter on top of Grilled Steak, Beef Tenderloin, or Roasted Chicken Breast.
  • Seafood: Don’t you love a warm, garlicky butter with seafood? Use this herb butter mix to elevate Grilled Salmon or Grilled Shrimp.
  • Roasted or Grilled Vegetables: You can truly elevate the flavor of roasted vegetables with this compound butter. Serve it as the topping for Grilled Corn or finish Roasted Butternut Squash with a few melting spoonfuls of this butter.
  • Bread: Butter and bread are a classic pair. Spread a few thin rounds over warm slices of my  Jalapeno Cheddar Cornbread, or use it as the butter base when making my Air Fryer Garlic Bread.
Thanksgiving butter with herbs sliced.
Print

Compound Butter for Turkey Recipe

Here's a fantastic compound butter for turkey that you can make in minutes. This is probably the easiest way to flavor your Thanksgiving turkey with succulent flavors from fresh (or dried) herbs, garlic, and lemon zest. Make ahead friendly, this recipe is my secret sauce for properly seasoned and moist turkey.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 8 tablespoons
Calories 104kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 oz unsalted butter 1 stick – at room temperature
  • 1 tablespoon fresh rosemary finely minced or 1 teaspoon dried rosemary
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme finely minced or 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon fresh sage finely minced or ⅓ teaspoon dried sage
  • 2 cloves fresh garlic finely minced or pressed
  • ½ teaspoon lemon zest
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Place the softened butter, rosemary, thyme, sage, garlic, lemon zest, kosher salt, and pepper in a bowl. Mix until well combined using a fork.
  • You can use it right away, or you can turn your compound butter into a log. If you are not using it right away, transfer the butter mixture onto a piece of parchment paper or stretch film and shape it into a log.*
  • Wrap it tightly so it holds its shape. Transfer it to the fridge and let it rest for at least 3 hours.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 8 tablespoons (4 ounces) of compound butter, which is ideal for a turkey that weighs 10-12 pounds. If your bird is larger, you can multiply the recipe and vice versa. The calorie information below is for one tablespoon.
  • *If it is too soft, you might have to chill it in the fridge for 30 minutes before rolling
  • Make Ahead and Storage: Prepare the butter mixture as directed. Follow the instructions to shape it into a log and wrap it tightly. Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for five days.
  • Freezing: Store it in a freezer-safe container or freezer bag for up to 3 months. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight, and be sure to take it out of the fridge at least an hour before use.

Nutrition

Calories: 104kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 30mg | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 15mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 0.02g | Vitamin A: 403IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 11mg | Iron: 0.2mg
Thanksgiving compound butter in a bowl from the top view.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/compound-butter-for-turkey/feed/ 2
Whipped Feta Dip https://foolproofliving.com/whipped-feta-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/whipped-feta-dip/#respond Mon, 29 Sep 2025 19:54:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83576 Ingredients You’ll Need You only need four main ingredients to make this whipped feta recipe, so choose the best ones…]]>
Aysegul

Whenever I have friends over, I like to go beyond the usual meat-and-cheese plate and put together a spread that feels a little more Mediterranean and creative without being complicated. 

Over the years, I’ve built a few go-to menus that always get oohs and aahs, and after this whipped feta cheese recipe took off on social media last year, I added this version to the mix. Now I get the same question every time: “Is the recipe on the blog?

It’s popular for a reason: it’s incredibly versatile. Serve it as a cheese dip, spread it under roasted vegetables, or thin it into a sauce; top with savory herbs and spices or go sweet with honey and nuts. 

Think of this creamy feta recipe as a simple base you can dress up a dozen ways. After months of testing, I’ve dialed in the texture so it delivers every time.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You only need four main ingredients to make this whipped feta recipe, so choose the best ones you can find, as their flavor really shines through. 

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are some notes from my testing:

Feta Cheese: For the creamiest whipped feta cheese, start with an 8-ounce block of feta packed in brine. You can use either cow’s milk or sheep’s milk feta, but the most important thing is choosing one you like for its flavor, creaminess, and saltiness.

I do not recommend pre-crumbled feta because it often contains caking agents that make the dip grainy. Since we will be blending everything in the food processor, there is no need to buy it pre-crumbled.

Greek Yogurt: Some whipped feta recipes call for cream cheese or sour cream, but I prefer using whole milk unsweetened Greek yogurt for a lighter, tangier base. 

Because it’s thicker and less watery than regular yogurt, it keeps the dip extra creamy while adding a subtle tang. For the best texture, avoid fat-free or 2% yogurt.

Olive Oil: Use your favorite extra virgin olive oil. It doesn’t have to be fancy or expensive, just something you like, since the flavor really shines through.

Lemon zest: Adding a little lemon zest brightens the dip, brings fresh aromatics, and adds a bit of tang.

Optional Add-Ins: I wanted to make this recipe with minimal ingredients, so it is quick and easy to put together. However, if you’d like, you can also add a clove of fresh or roasted garlic for a mild garlic flavor and a squeeze of lemon juice for a bit more tangy flavor.

How to Make Whipped Feta Cheese

Whipped feta comes together in just minutes, and the key is blending it just enough to achieve a smooth, creamy texture without overblending. Here’s how I do it step by step:

Step 1: Prep the feta: First, drain the brine, pat the block dry to prevent a watery dip, and break it into large chunks. This way, there is no excess moisture, and it can blend smoothly. 

Process photos showing how to make creamed feta cheese dip.

Step 2: Blend: Add the feta, Greek yogurt, and lemon zest to the food processor or blender. Turn on the processor and slowly pour in the olive oil through the feed tube. 

Pro Tip: Most whipped feta recipes use ¾ cup of Greek yogurt, but during my recipe testing, I found that using a lesser amount (½ cup of yogurt) yielded a more spreadable dip than a sauce-like, runny whipped feta.

Pouring the olive oil slowly helps the cheese and yogurt emulsify into a silky mixture. If you’re using a high-power blender, blend for a shorter time, as it will thin out more quickly.

A collage of images showing the making of the creamy Greek yogurt feta dip.

Step 3: Scrape halfway through blending: For a smooth and evenly blended whipped feta, stop the machine and scrape the sides with a spatula once or twice during the whipping process.

Doing this also helps with gauging the texture. I thought that 40-45 seconds of blending yielded the perfectly silky and smooth texture, but you can adjust the blending time according to your preference.

Step 4: Serve and garnish: Spoon into a bowl and finish with olive oil and your favorite toppings.

Ways to Customize Whipped Feta with Different Toppings

While this feta spread is perfectly delicious on its own, adding toppings is an easy way to dress it up and make it feel new every time you serve it. Choose a savory or sweet topping below and make it your own:

  • Savory Toppings: Sprinkle with fresh parsley, mint, or dill, plus a pinch of sumac, red pepper flakes, black pepper, or Aleppo pepper. You can keep it light, as I did in the photos, or spread it on a platter and layer on more herbs for a dramatic look.
  • Sweet Toppings: Drizzle a little honey and a handful of toasted pine nuts or crushed pistachios for a more dessert-like spread.
  • Spice Blends: If you prefer a lighter approach, sprinkle it with a pinch of my Mediterranean Seasoning or za’atar for an even more Mediterranean dip. Both bring a subtle herby flavor without overpowering the dip.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

Add this whipped feta cheese dip recipe to your collection of party appetizers asap! Why? Because it stores well and can be made ahead of time. Here’s how I do it:

Make-ahead: You can prepare it up to 2 days in advance. It gets slightly thicker as it sits. If you plan to serve it as a dip, you can serve it right away. However, though it is optional, if you want to use it as a spread for a perfectly creamy, silky texture, you can give it a quick whiz in the food processor right before serving. 

Storage: Transfer the dip to an airtight container. It keeps well in the refrigerator for 3 to 4 days. If the dip appears slightly separated after sitting in the fridge, let it rest at room temperature for a few minutes, then give it a quick stir before serving.

Freezing: I do not recommend freezing whipped feta as the texture changes and turns grainy once thawed, so it’s best enjoyed fresh.

Notes from My Kitchen: What I Learned Making This Recipe

After plenty of testing (and a few grainy batches), I’ve figured out what makes whipped feta turn out silky and creamy every time. Here are the tips I wish someone had told me from the start:

  • Use a block of feta cheese: A block of feta in brine is creamier and fresher, while pre-crumbled feta often contains caking agents that make the dip too grainy.
  • Taste your feta first: Some feta cheese sold at supermarkets can be very salty. Since this dip relies on just a few basic ingredients, it would be hard to mask that, so it is best to taste it before whipping it.
    • Too salty? Place the block in an airtight container with enough water covering it and let it sit in the fridge for a couple of hours or overnight. This helps reduce some of the excess salt.
  • Bring to room temperature: If possible, remove your feta from the fridge 5-10 minutes before blending. This is optional, but it will make your dip blend smoother. 
  • Food processor or blender: I prefer using a food processor because it allows for easier control over texture and thickness. In contrast, a blender (especially a high-speed blender) blends faster, which may result in a runny creamed feta cheese dip. Therefore, if you are using a blender, pulse and check often instead of running the machine continuously.

How To Serve Whipped Feta

Don’t get me wrong, this is a wonderful appetizer dip served with fresh veggies like radishes, cucumbers, and bell peppers. However, there are many other ways to use it in your daily cooking, especially if you are a fan of Mediterranean cuisine.

Images of recipe ideas that uses this whipped feta recipe.

Here are some of my go-to ideas:

  • Build a Mezze Platter: Serve your freshly made feta yogurt dip alongside other classics, such as Mediterranean Hummus, Tzatziki Sauce, Baba Ganoush, and fresh vegetables, warm Pita Bread, or pita chips.
  • Add it to any platter: This recipe is not just for a mezze platter. It is wonderful for any meat, cheese, or even seafood platter. I especially love it in my Smoked Salmon Platter.
  • Sandwich or Wrap Spread: Use it as a substitute for mayonnaise or other spreads in your favorite sandwiches and wraps. I love spreading it on lavash bread and then adding some Adana lamb kebab or Chicken Kofta before rolling it into a wrap.
  • As a Creamy Base: Spread a generous layer on a plate and top with roasted, grilled, or even air-fried vegetables. I love pairing it with my Harissa Carrots or Grilled Eggplant whenever I want an impressive side dish, or my Air Fryer Beetroot during the holiday season when I need a pop of color on the table.
  • With Grilled Meats and Kebabs: Serve it alongside Middle Eastern classics like Shish Tawook, Chicken Shawarma, or Lamb Kebabs for a cool, creamy contrast.
  • For Grain Bowls: Add a dollop over any of your Mediterranean bowls as a sauce. It works wonderfully with my CAVA Bowl and Chicken Shawarma Bowl.
  • Over toast with Eggs: Spread it on toast and top with fried or poached eggs, or serve it alongside Turkish Eggs for a savory breakfast or brunch.

FAQs

What’s the best feta for whipped feta?

Use a whole block of feta (not pre-crumbled feta) that you like the taste and creaminess of; it can be cow’s milk or sheep’s milk. I recommend choosing a brand that is not overly salty.

Can I make whipped feta without yogurt?

Yes, you technically can, but I find that the version made with yogurt is better. Still, you can use a splash of water or milk (about ¼ cup) to thin it out and blend until smooth.

How do I thicken whipped feta?

Start with a smaller amount of yogurt and add more as needed until you reach your desired consistency. If your dip turns out too thin and you want to thicken it, blend in a little more feta or chill it for 10-15 minutes to allow it to firm up as it cools.

Can I make this ahead of time?

Yes, you can make it up to 2 days ahead. Simply make a batch, store it in an airtight container, and give it a quick stir right before serving.

How long does whipped feta last?

It keeps well for 3-4 days in the refrigerator. Just give it a quick stir or pulse in the food processor before serving.

Can I freeze whipped feta?

I don’t recommend freezing this whipped feta spread as it turns grainy once thawed. It’s best enjoyed fresh.

Other Mediterranean Dips and Feta Recipes You Might Like

If you enjoyed this feta Greek yogurt dip, you might also like these other feta-packed and Mediterranean-inspired recipes I make regularly. They’re just as fresh and simple to make:

  • If you love that restaurant-style creaminess and sauces, try the cult favorite CAVA Feta recipe. It’s another wonderful dip (or topping) made with feta, roasted onions, jalapenos, and garlic.
  • If you want something cozy and baked, my Spinach and Feta Borek has a super crisp dough, melty feta, and is perfect for when you are having people over. 
  • And if you are in the mood for something refreshing, my Watermelon Cucumber Salad with cucumber, feta, and fresh mint is perfect for warm weather.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Person scooping whipped feta with pita bread.
Print

Whipped Feta Dip Recipe

This quick 5-minute whipped feta dip is made with just 4 simple ingredients. Creamy, tangy, and perfect for spreading or dipping.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 228kcal

Ingredients

  • 8 ounces feta cheese whole block (both cow's milk or sheep's milk feta would work)
  • ½ cup Greek yogurt unsweetened & whole milk/full fat
  • 1 teaspoon Zest of a lemon
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil plus more for drizzling on top

Optional toppings

  • Handful of fresh herbs such as parsley, dill, and mint
  • Pinch of Sumac or red pepper flakes

Instructions

  • Break the feta into large chunks and place it in the bowl of a food processor fitted with the metal blade.
    A collage of images showing the making of whipped feta cheese spread in a food processor.
  • Add in the Greek yogurt and lemon zest.
  • Turn the food processor on. While it is blending, slowly add olive oil through the tube.
  • Blend until smooth, no more than 40-45 seconds, stopping halfway through to scrape the sides as needed.
    A collage of images showing the whipped feta in a food processor and in a serving platter with veggies.
  • Transfer to a bowl and garnish with fresh herbs. Finish with a light drizzle of olive oil and a sprinkle of sumac or red pepper flakes.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ½ to 1 ¾ cups whipped feta, ideal for four servings. The nutritional values below are per serving and do not include calories from the optional vegetables and pita bread shown in the pictures.
  • Feta: Use a mildly salty block of feta for the best whipped feta recipe.
  • Storage: Transfer leftovers to an airtight container and store in the fridge for 3-4 days. Give it a stir before serving.
  • Troubleshooting Consistency and Texture: You have two variables to consider here: the amount of yogurt used and the blending time.
    • For a thicker dip, use ½ cup of yogurt, as written in the recipe.
    • For a looser, more sauce-like, spreadable texture, add ¼ cup more (a total of ¾ cup) yogurt.
    • Too grainy? Blend it a bit longer by stopping and scraping the sides a few times.

Nutrition

Calories: 228kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 52mg | Sodium: 656mg | Potassium: 72mg | Fiber: 0.04g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 241IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 308mg | Iron: 0.4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/whipped-feta-dip/feed/ 0
Kale Apple Slaw https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/ https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/#comments Tue, 16 Sep 2025 23:25:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=49034 Using apples in a savory salad isn’t new, but I think most apple salads miss a chance to pair them…]]>

Using apples in a savory salad isn’t new, but I think most apple salads miss a chance to pair them with something as sturdy and earthy as kale. A good dressing is key, especially when kale is involved, because let’s be honest, on its own, it’s not everyone’s favorite (my husband would agree). 

For me, the magic is in the balance of textures and tastes. Sweet, crisp apples meet earthy kale, all tied together with a dreamy maple Dijon dressing. Then comes the crunch from sunflower seeds, which makes every bite a little more exciting.

I call it a slaw because I was inspired by the Kale Apple Slaw at Tropical Smoothie Café, a cult-favorite dish that I loved so much that I had to recreate it in my own kitchen. It’s the kind of salad I make as part of my weekly meal prep because it holds up so well in the fridge. 

One bite and I think you’ll agree, let’s make it together.

Kale and Apple Slaw Ingredients 

You only need a handful of produce and a few basic pantry staples to make this fresh kale apple coleslaw. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my testing on ingredients and substitutions:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

For the Dressing

It is no secret that the dressing is the most important part of any kale salad, as sturdy kale leaves can use a ton of help when it comes to flavoring. I decided to use my Maple Dijon Vinaigrette as it offers the perfect balance of sweet and tangy flavors that complements the rest of the ingredients.

Below are a couple of notes from my recipe testing:

Maple syrup: I love the caramel-like sweetness it brings with the Dijon. For a lighter, citrusy twist, swap it with orange juice. Honey also works if you prefer a richer sweetness. I tested this slaw with all three, and while each works, they give the salad a slightly different character.

Apple cider vinegar: A key ingredient. It adds acidity to the dressing and also ties the apples into the overall flavor. If you don’t have it, red wine vinegar works too, but the taste is a little sharper.

For The Slaw

Apple: Crisp, firm apples hold up best. Fuji, Pink Lady, and Honeycrisp are my top picks, though tart Granny Smith is also great. Whatever you choose, slice or cube them just before serving to avoid browning.

Kale: I usually go with curly kale, but lacinato kale (aka Tuscan kale) works just as well. Each type has a different flavor and texture. If you’re not sure which to use, my Types of Kale guide can help you decide.

Seeds and nuts: I often use sunflower seeds, especially when I want to keep the recipe nut-free. When I do use nuts, I prefer raw almonds, pecans, or walnuts. Their mild taste lets the kale and apples stand out.

Cabbage: Red cabbage adds color and a subtle earthy note, but green cabbage works if that’s what you have. The thinner you slice it, the better it absorbs the dressing. I usually shred it with this insert I keep in my food processor, which I’ve found safer and quicker than a traditional mandoline. If you’re pressed for time, a bagged coleslaw mix is a fine shortcut.

Red Onion: Even though red onion has a stronger taste, I like using it here because it stands up well against hearty kale and crisp cabbage. If you prefer something milder, green onions are a good alternative.

How to Make Kale Apple Slaw

One of my favorite things about this kale apple salad, besides how fresh and crunchy it is, is how easily it fits into any meal. It lasts for days in the fridge and pairs with just about anything. Here’s how I put it together:

Step 1 – Make the salad dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together the maple syrup, dijon mustard, apple cider vinegar, olive oil, salt, and pepper. 

Then, add the sliced red onion to the dressing mixture and let it steep in the mixture while you prepare the rest of the ingredients. The vinegar takes away the sharp edge of raw onion, making it softer and slightly sweeter.

person showing how to make maple dijon vinaigrette

Step 2 – Prepare the salad: In a large mixing bowl, add the shredded kale, shredded carrots, and sliced red cabbage. Drizzle with the dressing and red onion, then use your hands to lightly massage the kale to break down the tougher parts of the leaves, making them more tender, less bitter, and better at soaking up the dressing. 

Pro Tip: Massaging kale might seem like an unusual practice, but I believe it is the secret to making kale tender, which is a common complaint among many people. Once massaged, it transforms into something much softer and easier to enjoy.

Person showing how to make kale apple slaw with step by step photos.

Step 3 – Serve: Top it off with the sliced apple and sunflower seeds. Toss the mixture one more time to evenly distribute the toppings, and serve immediately for the best crunch and freshest flavor.

Tropical smoothie kale apple slaw recipe in a bowl.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

This easy slaw recipe is meal-prep friendly, holding up beautifully in the fridge for days, so you can enjoy a crisp side dish all week long. Here are the best ways to ensure it stays fresh:

Make ahead: The Maple Dijon Vinaigrette can be prepared up to 2 days in advance and stored in a mason jar in the fridge. On the day you plan to serve, simply toss it with the kale, cabbage, and carrots, then add the apples just before serving. Assembly takes only about 5 minutes.

Storage: Once assembled, the slaw will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. For the best texture and color, slice the apples right before eating to prevent browning.

Kale and Apple Slaw in a bowl with two spoons on the side

What to Serve with Apple Kale Slaw

This kale and apple slaw is one of those salads that just works with almost anything. It’s crisp, colorful, and adds a fresh bite that makes any meal feel a little brighter. Here are a few of my favorite ways to enjoy it:

  • Pair it with grains: For a more filling meal, consider adding a cooked grain like quinoa, bulgur wheat, or wild rice. They will soak up the maple dijon dressing and turn it into a quick lunch you can grab from the fridge.
  • With turkey: If you need a light but satisfying dinner in under an hour, pair this slaw with my Turkey Tenderloin. The turkey is juicy, tender, and quick to cook, so you can have a balanced meal even on a weeknight. 
  • With chicken: My Baked Bone-In Chicken Breast is one of my favorite proteins to serve on top. The crispy skin and juicy meat add just enough richness.
  • With meatloaf: Serve the slaw with my Turkey Meatloaf to lighten up a classic comfort food dinner. The fresh crunch balances the comfort of the meatloaf without feeling heavy.

Expert Tips

While the recipe is pretty simple and straightforward, here are a few pro tips for making the best kale apple coleslaw:

  • Using red onion: Raw red onion can be sharp, even when thinly sliced. I like to soak it in water or massage it with salt to mellow the bite. In this recipe, I let it sit in the dressing instead, which softens the flavor while adding depth. If you enjoy raw onion as-is, you can skip this step.
  • Slice everything thinly: Large pieces of kale are tough to chew. Removing the stems and slicing the leaves into thin ribbons helps them absorb the dressing, making the salad easier to eat. 
  • Massage the kale: This is the step that turns tough kale into something tender and delicious. A quick massage not only softens the leaves but also helps the dressing cling to every bite. 
  • Blanch for a milder taste: If you find kale too bitter, you can blanch it. Just boil for a minute or two, then plunge into ice water. This quick step softens the leaves and tones down their bitterness.
  • Optional Add-Ins: You can easily make this salad your own with a few simple additions or swaps. Try dried cranberries or pomegranate seeds instead of apples for a sweet-tart twist, or add a handful of shaved parmesan to bring a savory, umami note that makes it even more delicious.

FAQs

What part of the kale do you cut off?

Remove the tough center stem (also called the rib) that runs down the middle of each leaf. It’s hard and chewy when raw, so strip the leafy greens away and chop them into bite-sized pieces for the best texture.

How can I make the kale less bitter?

The best way to reduce kale’s bitterness is to massage it with the dressing for 2-3 minutes to soften the leaves. This breaks down the tough fibers and makes the kale more tender and easier to chew. If you’re sensitive to bitterness, blanch the kale for 1-2 minutes before adding it to the salad.

How can I tell if I’m choosing good kale?

Look for kale with firm, crisp leaves that have a rich green color. Skip any that are starting to yellow, feel limp, or have wilted spots.

What’s the best apple to use in kale apple coleslaw?

Firm, crisp apples such as Honeycrisp, Fuji, Pink Lady, or Granny Smith work best.

Can I use a different dressing to make this kale and apple slaw recipe?

Yes. For a lighter, more citrusy flavor, try it with my Lemon Balsamic Dressing. For a creamy variation, use my Yogurt Salad Dressing.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Kale Recipes You Might Like:

If this recipe convinced you to give kale a chance, I am confident that you’ll be looking for more. So, here are a few other fresh kale salad recipes that I know you’ll enjoy:

  • If you’re in the mood for something cozy and seasonal, my Fall Harvest Salad is packed with all the fall flavors we love and is drizzled with a sweet dressing that ties it all together.
  • For a crunchy, make-ahead option, my Brussels Sprout Kale Salad includes shaved Brussels sprouts and kale with a bright vinaigrette.
  • And when you’re craving something simple and satisfying, my Kale and Avocado Salad comes together in minutes with a sweet-sour dressing you’ll want to drizzle on everything.
Kale Apple Carrot Slaw in a bowl with two spoons on the side
Print

Kale Apple Slaw Recipe

15 minute Kale Apple Slaw recipe that is perfect for a satisfying and filling meal. Also gluten free and vegan, you can make a batch as a part of your weekly meal prep and enjoy it throughout the week.
Course Salad
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 407kcal

Ingredients

For The Maple Dijon Vinaigrette

  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
  • 1 tablespoon dijon mustard
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ small red onion sliced thinly

For The Kale Apple Slaw

  • 6 cups curly kale (1 bunch destemmed and cut into ribbons)
  • 2 carrots shredded
  • 1 cup red cabbage sliced thinly
  • 1 apple sliced thinly
  • 1 cup sunflower seeds or any other nuts

Instructions

  • To make the salad dressing: Whisk together maple syrup, dijon mustard, garlic, apple cider vinegar, olive oil, salt and pepper in a small bowl or in a mason jar. Add in the sliced red onion and let it steep in it as you work on the rest of the ingredients.
    A collage of images showing the making of the dressing.
  • To make the Apple Kale Slaw: Place kale, shredded carrots and sliced red cabbage in a bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing. Using clean hands, give them a light massage making sure to distribute the dressing evenly throughout the salad. As you massage, the tough kale leaves will soften.
    Person showing how to massage kale for the slaw.
  • Top it off with sliced apple and sunflower seeds. Give it a toss and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 7 to 8 cups of salad and is ideal for four servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Steep the red onion: This is an optional step but letting your red onion slices soak in the dressing will give them a great texture and make them less bitter and overpowering.
  • Slice everything thinly: To make sure every bite of this recipe bursts with flavor, make sure you thinly slice all of your ingredients. Small pieces make it easier for your veggies to soak up the tangy dressing.
  • Massage the kale: Though it may seem like an odd step, massaging the kale is crucial to giving your leaves the perfect, tender texture. The massaging process infuses the kale with the acidic dressing, which helps break down the parts of fresh kale that are hard to digest.
  • Storage: Once prepared, kale and apple coleslaw will stay fresh in an airtight container for up to 3 days. Be sure to store it in an airtight container in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 407kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Sodium: 381mg | Potassium: 585mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 8535IU | Vitamin C: 48mg | Calcium: 148mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/feed/ 2
Turkish Shepherd Salad https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/#respond Mon, 25 Aug 2025 18:22:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83027 What is Shepherd Salad? If there were such a thing as the easiest salad in the world, Shepherd Salad would…]]>

What is Shepherd Salad?

If there were such a thing as the easiest salad in the world, Shepherd Salad would probably top the list. 

The name may sound a little unusual, but it comes from humble origins. In the countryside of Turkey, shepherds carried simple, inexpensive ingredients like tomatoes, cucumbers, onions, and peppers. Out in the fields, they would quickly chop everything and dress it with olive oil and lemon juice for a fresh, no-cook meal.

Shepherd salad in a bowl with spoons on the side.

Because these were the kinds of ingredients that were affordable and easy to find, Shepherd Salad has always been considered a simple, everyday dish rather than a luxury.

Today, Çoban Salatası remains a staple across Turkey and the Eastern Mediterranean. While it shares some similarities with Greek Salad, Shepherd Salad does not usually include cheese or olives, keeping it lighter and more refreshing. 

I left Turkey over 20 years ago, but to this day, I still make this salad almost daily when summer produce is at its peak. It’s one of those recipes that instantly brings me back home.

Simple Ingredients You’ll Need 

You’ll only need a handful of fresh vegetables and pantry staples to make this easy summer salad. You can find the full ingredient list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my experience and from how it is traditionally made in Turkey:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

Tomatoes: Use the ripest, juiciest tomatoes you can find. Heirloom, Roma, cherry, or even steak tomatoes all work well.

Cucumbers: The authentic Turkish shepherd salad recipe uses Persian cucumbers, which are crunchy and with fewer seeds compared to English cucumbers. However, both types can be used in this recipe. If your cucumbers are freshly picked, it is not necessary to peel them, but I recommend tasting them, as older cucumbers may have bitter skin.

Scallions: I opted for scallions (also known as green onions) for their mild flavor, but finely chopped red onion or white onion can be used if you prefer a sharper bite. If you’re using green onions, you can use both the white parts and the green parts.

Green peppers: Traditionally, this salad is made with a Turkish pepper called sivri biber, a long, slender pepper that can range from mild to hot. Since I can’t find it here in the US, I usually use Anaheim peppers or jalapeños. For a milder option, a green bell pepper works as well.

Lemon juice: For the best taste, use freshly squeezed lemon juice, but in a pinch, bottled juice would also work. You can also swap it with white wine vinegar, apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar for a slightly different tang.

Olive oil: I recommend using a mild-flavored extra virgin olive oil.

Sumac powder: Sumac is usually available in the Middle Eastern or Mediterranean section of most grocery stores, sold as sumac spice or sumac powder. I often buy mine online, and if you are new to sumac, I really like Eastanbul Sumac Spice.

Just be sure to check the best-by date, as sumac has a shorter shelf life than many other spices (usually around 6 months).

Fresh herbs: I use fresh flat-leaf parsley in this recipe, but you can easily switch it up with whatever herbs you have on hand. In Turkey, it is very common to add fresh mint, fresh dill, or even a mix of the two.

Optional Add-Ins (Modern Variations):

The traditional Shepherd’s Salad is made with just the basics, but you can easily make it your own with a few optional add-ins. Some of my favorites are:

Olives: A handful of olives is a delicious way to make this salad more substantial and filling. In Turkey, we often use briny, firm varieties like Gemlik olives, but Kalamata and black olives work as well. Any olives you enjoy, even simple green olives, will do the trick.

Feta cheese: For the best taste and creamy texture, choose a good-quality feta made from sheep’s or cow’s milk and stored in brine. 

Dried mint: In some parts of Turkey, a small pinch of dried mint is sprinkled over the salad for more of an earthy flavor. It is not used in every version, but it is a traditional touch that pairs well with the sumac.

Urfa Chile or Aleppo Pepper: For a little heat, you can also sprinkle in some Urfa Chile pepper, Aleppo pepper, or any red pepper flakes you have on hand. For the most authentic result, aim for a variety that isn’t too spicy so the fresh flavors of the salad can really shine.

How to Make Turkish Shepherd Salad (Step-by-Step Guide)

Making Shepherd’s Salad couldn’t be simpler. You don’t need any special equipment; just a sharp knife, a cutting board, and a bowl. Here’s how to prepare it:

A collage of images showing the assembling of shepherd's salad.

Step 1 – Chop the vegetables: One of the hallmarks of this salad is that everything is cut into small, even pieces. This way, every bite has a little bit of everything. Dice the tomatoes, cucumbers, scallions, and peppers, then transfer them to a large bowl.

Step 2 – Add the dressing: Drizzle the vegetables with lemon juice and olive oil. Sprinkle with sumac, salt, and black pepper.

A collage of images showing the mixing of Turkish tomato and cucumber salad.

Step 3 – Finish with herbs: Add the chopped parsley on top. Using salad tongs (or clean hands), gently toss until the vegetables are evenly coated. Tossing gently is key, as it helps keep the tomatoes from getting mushy.

Step 4 – Serve: Enjoy right away while the vegetables are crisp and fresh. Shepherd’s Salad is best served immediately, since the salt and lemon juice draw water out of the vegetables, and the salad can become watery if it sits too long.

Storing Leftovers & Making Ahead

Making Ahead: You can chop the vegetables a few hours in advance and store them covered in the refrigerator. For the best texture, wait to add the dressing until just before serving to keep the vegetables crisp and prevent too much liquid from collecting in the bowl.

Storing Leftovers: Place any leftovers in an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 2 days. Keep in mind that the vegetables will naturally release some liquid as they sit, which will make the salad softer the next day. If that happens, just give it a quick toss and, if needed, add a squeeze of fresh lemon juice to brighten it back up.

Freezing: Freezing is not recommended since the vegetables lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the freshest taste and crunch, enjoy this salad right away.

Expert Tips:

While Shepherd’s Salad is simple to make, a few small details can take it from good to truly authentic. Here are my best tips:

  • Use fresh ingredients: This salad depends on peak-season produce. Ripe, juicy tomatoes and crisp cucumbers make all the difference. If your vegetables aren’t in season, sprinkle them with a pinch of salt and let them sit for a few minutes to bring out their natural juices.
  • Finely chop the vegetables: The traditional way in Turkey is to cut everything into small, even pieces. This will give you a mix of everything in each bite, and it will also ensure the lemon and olive oil coat everything evenly.
  • Season just before serving: Salt and lemon juice draw liquid out of the vegetables, especially tomatoes. So to keep the salad crisp, add the dressing and seasonings right before you bring it to the table.
  • Mix gently: Toss the salad lightly with your hands or salad tongs so the tomatoes don’t break down and become mushy.
  • Keep it chilled: Shepherd’s Salad is especially refreshing when served slightly cold. If you prep the vegetables ahead, store them in the fridge and dress just before serving.

Delicious Ways to Serve Turkish Shepherd Salad:

The pairing options are endless for this Turkish tomato and cucumber salad. While you can enjoy it with nearly any meal, here are some of my favorite ways to serve it:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Turkish shepherd salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Turkish Shepherd Salad Recipe

An authentic Turkish Shepherd Salad (Çoban Salatası) made with juicy tomatoes, crisp cucumbers, peppers, onions, and parsley. Light, refreshing, and ready in just 15 minutes.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 119kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 medium-sized tomatoes diced into 1 ½ inch cubes
  • 3 Persian cucumbers peeled and sliced ¼ inch thick
  • 2 scallions both green and white parts, thinly sliced
  • 2 green peppers Aneheim peppers, jalapenos, or serrano peppers – seeds removed and sliced thinly
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon sumac
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Place tomatoes, cucumbers, scallions, and green peppers in a large bowl or a large platter.
    Side by side images showing the ingredients of Turkish shepherd's salad.
  • Drizzle it with lemon juice, olive oil, and season with salt, pepper, and sumac.
  • Sprinkle it with fresh parsley and toss to combine.
    Side by side photos showing the making of coban salad.
  • Serve it right away.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6 cups of salad (depending on the size of your vegetables), and it is ideal for 4 (large) servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Place leftovers in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge for up to 2 days. It is normal for the vegetables to release their juices as they sit. Just give it a stir before serving.
  • Optional add-ins: As I was writing this recipe, I wanted to stay true to the traditional recipe. However, some modern-day versions of this recipe add other ingredients like a handful of crumbled feta cheese, chopped black olives, and a sprinkle of red pepper flakes (or Urfa chile if you can get your hands on.) All of these would be great addition to the recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 119kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 588mg | Potassium: 247mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 748IU | Vitamin C: 61mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

FAQ’s

What’s the difference between Turkish Shepherd Salad and Greek Salad?

Both salads feature tomatoes and cucumbers as their base, but they are prepared and served differently. In Turkish Shepherd Salad, the vegetables are finely chopped so every bite has a mix of everything. It’s dressed simply with olive oil, lemon juice, and sometimes a sprinkle of sumac, and traditionally does not include cheese or olives (though you can add them if you like).

Greek Salad (Horiatiki), on the other hand, is made with larger chunks of vegetables and usually includes feta cheese, olives, and oregano, giving it a heartier and more briny flavor.

Can I add cheese to Turkish Shepherd Salad?

While it is not traditional, you can sprinkle it with a handful of crumbled feta cheese.

What does Çoban mean in Turkish?

Çoban, pronounced as Chough-bahn, means Shepherd.

Other Turkish Salads You Might Like:

Turkish cuisine is known for similar, easy-to-make salads like this one that you can make during the peak tomato season. A few of my favorites are:

  • Summer tomatoes mixed in with white beans and red onions, Piyaz (Turkish White Bean Salad) is yet another simple salad 
  • At every kebab restaurant in Turkey, you’ll find a side of ezme, and my version shows you how to make this authentic “Turkish salsa” at home with just a few simple ingredients.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/feed/ 0
Turkish Ezme https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/#respond Mon, 25 Aug 2025 18:22:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82987 What Is Turkish Ezme? Ezme is a finely chopped Turkish tomato salad or dip that you can make in 10…]]>

What Is Turkish Ezme?

Ezme is a finely chopped Turkish tomato salad or dip that you can make in 10 minutes. Today, I’m sharing my mom’s version, along with the tips I’ve learned from her, to make it authentically spicy or more gentle.

This year, I made it my mission to share some of my favorite kebab recipes, and you simply can’t talk about kebabs without mentioning their ultimate pairing: Turkish ezme

Turkish ezme on an oval plate from the top view.

Pronounced exactly as it looks, this bright tomato salad (or dip) is one of the most authentic dishes you’ll find alongside kebabs in Turkey.

Often described as a Turkish “salsa” by those trying it for the first time, for those of us who grew up with this simple dish, Turkish ezme is so much more. It’s refreshing, a little spicy, and the perfect companion not only to kebabs but to any grilled meats.

Originating from the regions best known for their kebabs, Gaziantep, Urfa, Adana, and Mardin, Turkish ezme is a staple that’s deeply woven into the kebab tradition. Each region puts its own spin on it; Gaziantep’s version (referred to as Antep Ezme) is usually spicier, while Urfa’s might lean more tomato-forward.

If you’ve ever been to a kebab restaurant, you’ll know what I mean. The moment you order, they don’t ask whether you’d like ezme on the side. They just bring it, often with a side of lavash or pita bread for scooping, along with other staples like cacik (pronounced ja-juk, aka the Turkish cousin of tzatziki) and hummus. It’s part of the ritual, and to me, it’s as essential as the kebab itself.

Traditional Turkish ezme is made with finely chopped onions, ripe tomatoes, and peppers mixed with red pepper paste, lemon juice, and a handful of spices. 

Depending on how it’s prepared, it can be spicy (called Acılı Ezme) or more mild if you remove the seeds of the peppers or cut back on the red pepper flakes.

Ingredients You’ll Need & Why They Matter

The ingredients in Turkish Ezme dip are simple, fresh, and rooted in the flavors of the Eastern Mediterranean. While it uses everyday ingredients, there are some nuances that I’d like to share to ensure your version is as close to the original.

Ingredients for the recipe with text on each ingredient.

Yellow Onion: Traditional Ezme is made with yellow or white onions. At first, a whole onion may seem like a lot, but once it’s finely chopped and mixed in, it melts into the salad and gives just the right balance. 

While not traditional, red onion would also work, but it would have a slightly sweeter flavor.

Garlic: The authentic version of this Turkish dipping sauce does not use garlic, but my mom always did, so I am following in her footsteps. That small tweak is what makes my family’s version unique. It can be omitted if you are a purist.

Kosher Salt: I use kosher salt not only to flavor the overall ezme but also to soften the chopped onion and garlic. It also helps mellow their sharp, raw flavors.

Tomatoes: Authentic Turkish ezme is traditionally made with tomatoes from the Southeastern region of Turkey. Because of the hot, dry climate, those tomatoes are less juicy than what we often find here in the US.

For the best results, use firm, not overly ripe, tomatoes such as Roma, heirloom, or even cherry tomatoes. Whatever you choose, it’s important to remove the seeds.

Ezme should be juicy enough to scoop up with bread but not watery. If taking the seeds out feels like too much work, you can chop the tomatoes finely and strain them briefly through a fine mesh sieve to get rid of the excess liquid.

In the winter months, when good tomatoes are harder to come by, some people turn to canned whole peeled tomatoes. While that can work in a pinch, I find the taste of fresh tomatoes makes the biggest difference in capturing the true spirit of ezme.

Green Peppers: The authentic recipe uses Turkish sivri biber. The name literally means “pointed pepper,” and that’s exactly what it looks like: long, thin, and tapering to a point. 

Since I cannot get my hands on sivri biber here in the US, I use Anaheim, jalapeno, or serranos as an alternative. I remove seeds to keep the spice levels mild, but if you prefer yours spicy (and want to make an acili ezme recipe, as we say in Turkish), feel free to keep some.

Red Pepper Paste (or Tomato Paste): Red pepper paste is yet another traditional ingredient used in most kebab and meze recipes. I buy mine online. Tukas’s red pepper paste is my favorite. However, tomato paste is a good substitute.

Lemon Juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice is the best, but if bottled juice is all you have on hand, that would work in a pinch.

Fresh Herbs: I kept the recipe simple and only used fresh parsley, but my mom always added a few tablespoons of chopped fresh mint and dill in addition to parsley. If you are growing your own herbs, this is a fantastic recipe to put them to good use.

Sumac: A sprinkle of sumac is the finishing touch for this Turkish salad. I buy sumac online, but you can find it in the Middle Eastern/Mediterranean section of your grocery store. If you can’t get your hands on it, you can omit it. Your salad will still taste great.

Urfa Chili Pepper (or Aleppo Pepper or Red Pepper Flakes): For a smoky finish, use the traditional Urfa chili (Urfa biber). If you prefer a bit more straightforward, less smoky, bright finish, use Aleppo chili (Pul biber). If you do not have either of those, a pinch of any red pepper flakes you have on hand would also work.

Optional Add Ins:

Classic Turkish ezme is usually made with the ingredients I listed above, but depending on the region and sometimes the creativity of the chef, you will find different variations. The add-ins below are not traditional in every version, but they are wonderful ways to build on the base and make it your own.
Pomegranate Molasses (optional): You’ll often see restaurants finish off this Turkish red sauce with a drizzle of pomegranate molasses, especially if they are serving it as a part of a meze platter. 

While it is an optional ingredient in this recipe, if you are into Mediterranean cooking, I highly recommend investing in a bottle. It provides a unique depth, a fruity tartness that can’t be replicated with just lemon juice.

When shopping for pomegranate molasses, look for a brand that lists only one ingredient: pomegranate concentrate. That way, you’ll get the purest taste without added sugar or preservatives. The one I always buy online is Eastanbul.

Olive Oil: A tablespoon (or two) of olive oil drizzled at the last minute makes it richer. I recommend an extra virgin olive oil that is mild in flavor, such as Garcia de la Cruz.

Walnuts: A close cousin of Turkish ezme is a dish called Gavurdağı Salatası. In some parts of Turkey, it’s common to add a handful of chopped walnuts, which makes the salad richer and adds a pleasant crunch. You can mix them in with the vegetables or simply sprinkle them on top as a garnish.

Pomegranate Seeds: For a beautiful pop of color, a juicy burst of sweet-tart flavor, and a delicate crunch that makes the dish feel even more special, you can add (2 tablespoons) pomegranate seeds.

How to Make Turkish Ezme?

Making this authentic recipe is surprisingly simple, and it all starts with fresh, high-quality ingredients. This Turkish dip gets its signature texture from chopping everything very finely by hand, which gives the salad its unique, crushed consistency. Here is how I make it in my kitchen:

Person chopping onions.

Step 1 – Mince and Soften the Aromatics: On a large cutting board, finely chop the onion and garlic. Sprinkle them with kosher salt and gently knead the mixture with your hands.
Adding the salt not only helps soften the raw onions but also mellow their sharpness. Transfer the mixture to a medium-size mixing bowl.

A collage of images showing of the cutting tomatoes and peppers.

Step 2 – Add the Fresh Vegetables: Using a sharp knife, carefully remove the seeds from the tomatoes and chop them finely. If you’d rather not fuss with seeding, chop them and give them a quick press through a fine mesh sieve to remove the extra liquid.

Next, remove the seeds from your peppers and chop them as finely as possible. When cutting peppers, I highly recommend wearing gloves if you have them. The oils can cause a burning sensation on your hands and sting really badly if you accidentally touch your eyes.

Transfer the tomatoes and the peppers to the bowl. Some cooks use a food processor for convenience, but I find it’s easy to over-process and end up with more of a puree of vegetables. I think hand chopping is worth the effort, especially if you are looking for the most authentic version of this Turkish red sauce.

Person mixing the ingredients for ezme in a bowl.

Step 3 – Mix in the Flavorings: Stir in the red pepper paste (or tomato paste), lemon juice, chopped parsley, sumac, and Urfa chili flakes (if using).

Step 4 – Thoroughly Combine: Using a large spoon, gently mix everything together until all the ingredients are well incorporated and evenly coated. Don’t rush this step, as ezme should feel like one unified mix, not separate vegetables.

Step 5 – Finish and Serve: You can serve it straight from the bowl, but if you want to do it the way we do it in Turkey, then transfer it to a small to medium-sized oval plate. Drizzle with pomegranate molasses or olive oil (if using) and serve right away, ideally with some warm pita or lavash on the side.

Make Ahead and Storage Tips

Make Ahead: This Turkish dip actually tastes even better after it has rested. I often make it a few hours in advance and let it chill in the fridge so the flavors can deepen and meld.

Keep in mind that the juices will settle as they sit, so you may have to drain them before serving.

Storage: Leftover ezme keeps well for 2-3 days when stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Just be sure to give it a good stir before serving, and again, drain the juices as needed.

Freezing: This dish is best when enjoyed fresh, so I do not recommend freezing it as it will lose its signature texture when thawed.

Expert Tips from My Turkish Kitchen

Use a fine mince when chopping by hand: The secret to ezme’s classic texture is how finely everything is chopped. You don’t want big chunks in there. Take your time when chopping; it is part of what makes this recipe so good.

Dealing with excess juice: Earlier, I mentioned removing the seeds from the tomatoes to get the authentic texture that ezme is known for. But if you don’t mind some extra juice, that’s perfectly fine too. It will still taste fresh and delicious.

Using a food processor: My mom would probably turn in her grave if she saw me recommending a food processor when making ezme. Traditionally, everything is chopped by hand, and I still believe that’s the best way to get the right texture. That said, I know it can be a real time-saver, especially if you’re making a big batch.

If you do decide to use one, here’s what I recommend:

  • Start with the harder vegetables (onions, garlic, peppers) and chop them finely before adding the softer tomatoes.
  • Once you add the tomatoes, use short pulses instead of running the machine continuously. This helps you avoid ending up with a puree and keeps that slightly crushed consistency that makes ezme special.

Make it your own: Once you’ve made the basic recipe I shared below, try creating your version by adding a bit more heat (there is a reason people ask for ‘acili ezme’, the spicy version of this dish) or incorporating some of the optional ingredients I mentioned above.

How to Serve Turkish Ezme (The Ultimate Kebab Side Dish)

Ezme is one of those dishes that goes with almost everything. While it’s a classic alongside kebabs, its fresh, tangy flavor also makes it a great match for other Mediterranean favorites, from grilled meats to mezze platters.

  • With Kebabs or Grilled Meats: Ezme is the ultimate side to dishes like Adana Kebab or Chicken Kebab. Its acidity and spice help balance the richness of the meat, which is exactly why it’s such a common pairing in Turkey.
  • Part of a Meze Platter: Add it to a Mediterranean-inspired mezze platter alongside hummus, baba ganoush, and muhammara. Don’t forget the lavash, Turkish pide bread, or pita bread (or pita chips) for scooping! This dish is meant for sharing.
  • As a Spread or Sandwich Topping: Use leftover ezme as a spread for sandwiches or wraps the next day. It’s especially good on my Grilled Lamb Burgers, adding a bright, tangy kick that makes them even more special.
Spicy ezme served on an oval plate from the top view.
Print

Turkish Ezme Recipe

This authentic Turkish Ezme is a refreshing tomato and pepper salad that pairs perfectly with kebabs or grilled meats. Quick, fresh, and versatile. Vegan, no-cook, and gluten-free recipe.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 73kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 yellow onion medium size
  • 1 clove garlic finely minced
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 4 medium tomatoes
  • 2 green peppers Anaheim, jalapeño, or serrano, seeded
  • 1 tablespoon Turkish red pepper paste or tomato paste
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped
  • 1 tablespoon sumac
  • ¼ teaspoon Urfa chili Aleppo pepper, or red pepper flakes (optional)
  • 2 tablespoons pomegranate molasses optional

Instructions

  • On a large cutting board, finely chop onion and garlic. Sprinkle with kosher salt and knead gently to soften. Transfer to a large bowl.
    Person chopping onions for ezme.
  • Remove the seeds of your tomatoes and give them a fine chop. Alternatively, you can chop them first and strain through a fine mesh strainer to remove the juices. Transfer the tomatoes to the bowl.
    Person chopping tomatoes and peppers on a cutting board.
  • Chop the seeded peppers finely and add them to the bowl.
  • Stir in the red pepper paste, lemon juice, parsley, sumac, and chili flakes (if using). Mix well to combine.
    Person mixing ezme salad ingredients in a bowl.
  • If using, drizzle with pomegranate molasses and serve*.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 to 2 1/2 cups of ezme, which is ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Leftovers will keep well for 2-3 days when stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator.
  • *Let it rest before serving: It is optional, but if you have the time, chill it in the fridge for about 30 minutes before serving. This gives the ingredients a chance to mingle and develop deeper flavor. Just keep in mind that it will release some of its juices as it sits, so you may want to spoon out the excess liquid before bringing it to the table.
  • Adjusting the spiciness: If you prefer your ezme to be on the milder side, I recommend taking the time to remove all of the seeds of your peppers and avoid using red pepper flakes.

Nutrition

Calories: 73kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.5g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 624mg | Potassium: 512mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 1623IU | Vitamin C: 77mg | Calcium: 34mg | Iron: 1mg

FAQ’s

Is ezme spicy?

Ezme has a gentle heat, but you can easily control the spice level. If you prefer it mild (or not spicy at all), take the time to remove all of the seeds of your peppers and omit using red pepper flakes.

How does Acılı ezme vary by region?

In Turkey, every region puts its own spin on ezme. In Gaziantep, it’s usually spicier, in Urfa it leans more tomato-forward, and in Adana it often includes extra pepper paste. My mom’s version here is closest to what you would find in kebab restaurants across the country.

Can I make it less acidic?

Absolutely. If you’re sensitive to acidity, try reducing the amount of fresh lemon juice or skipping the pomegranate molasses. It will still taste fresh and delicious.

How long does Turkish ezme last in the fridge?

As long as it is stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator, it should still be fresh for up to 3 days.

Other Turkish Salads You Might Like:

If you’re already convinced to make this Turkish ezme salad recipe, you’re already on your way to creating a fantastic feast. Here are a few more fresh and delicious Turkish salad recipes to serve alongside your grilled meats:

  • My go-to Turkish summer salad, Piyaz, is A zesty and refreshing salad made with white beans, red onions, tomatoes, and parsley, all tossed in a simple lemon-olive oil dressing. It’s a perfect complement to rich, grilled meats.
  • For a simple side salad that will pretty much work with any grilled meat and vegetable, look no further than my Turkish Shepherd Salad.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/feed/ 0
CAVA Cucumber Mint Lime Drink (Copycat Recipe) https://foolproofliving.com/cava-cucumber-mint-lime-drink/ https://foolproofliving.com/cava-cucumber-mint-lime-drink/#respond Tue, 05 Aug 2025 12:59:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82635 As I set out to recreate CAVA’s cucumber mint lime drink, I started with a base of lime juice, almost…]]>

As I set out to recreate CAVA’s cucumber mint lime drink, I started with a base of lime juice, almost like making a classic limeade. At first, I blended cucumber juice, lime juice, and a bit of simple syrup. It was good, but honestly, it just tasted like limeade. It was nothing memorable.

Then I came across a tip that suggested enhancing limeade with lime zest and a splash of lemon juice. That tip was golden. Those two small additions completely transformed my simple drink into something bright, layered, and refreshing, and more importantly, just like the version I love at CAVA.

CAVA copycat mint lime cucumber drink in glasses garnished with mint lime, and cucumber slices.

This homemade cucumber mint lime juice drink recipe has that exact light, crisp, and not overly sweet flavor. It’s also incredibly easy to customize, can be served non-alcoholic or as a cocktail, and is also make-ahead friendly, making it a total crowd-pleaser for any warm day. Not to mention, making your own is way more cost-effective than buying at the store.

Cava Cucumber Mint Lime Ingredients

To make this copycat CAVA cucumber mint limeade, you only need a few simple, fresh ingredients you probably already have in your fridge/pantry. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my testing:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

For the Mint Simple Syrup

Sweetener: Traditionally, simple syrup uses equal parts sugar and water. I like to use honey (or agave syrup) instead, inspired by my Honey Simple Syrup recipe, to keep the drink naturally sweetened. Both options work beautifully.

Mint: Any fresh mint you grow or can find in your local supermarket will do. Peppermint or spearmint are both great choices.

For the Drink

Cucumbers: I prefer Persian cucumbers for their crisp, sweet taste, but English cucumbers are a great substitute. Peeling is optional, but if you keep the skin on, give it a taste first to make sure it’s not bitter, since older cucumber skins can sometimes be tough and a bit bitter.

Lime and Lemon Juice & Zest: Freshly squeezed juice is best for a bright, clean taste. Bottled juice works in a pinch, but if you can, squeeze your own. When I was testing this recipe, I noticed that using only the juice didn’t quite capture the citrusy kick that makes CAVA’s version so refreshing.

That’s when I decided to add the zest of both lime and lemon. It turned out to be the missing piece, bringing the drink much closer to the one I first enjoyed at CAVA.

Ice: Cubed or crushed ice keeps the drink cold and refreshing.

For the Garnishes

This is where you can have some fun. Add cucumber slices, sliced lime, or fresh mint sprigs for a pretty, restaurant-style touch.

How To Make Cucumber Mint Limeade?

Although it may seem like a lot of steps, making this refreshing drink is actually quite simple. Just follow the easy steps below:

A collage of images showing the making of simple syrup and cucumbers in a food processor.

Step 1 – Make the mint simple syrup: To keep my drink naturally sweetened, I am making a batch of my honey syrup recipe. That being said, you can make it with regular simple syrup by using 3/4 cup of granulated sugar and 3/4 cup of water, following the same steps.

If you are following in my footsteps, combine honey (or sugar) and water in a small saucepan over medium heat. Cook, stirring occasionally, until the honey fully dissolves. Refrain from boiling honey, as exposure to high heat can potentially degrade the nutritional value and natural flavors of your honey.

Remove from the heat and stir in the mint leaves, ensuring they are fully submerged. Let them steep for 15-20 minutes, then strain and set aside to cool.

Step 2- Puree the cucumbers: Cut the peeled cucumbers into small chunks and transfer them into a food processor or high-powered blender and blend until smooth and lightly pureed. 

A collage of images showing the making of cucumber juice.

Step 3- Strain the juice: Pour it into a fine-mesh strainer set over a bowl (or a nut milk bag would also work). Use the back of a spoon or spatula to press out as much of the juice as possible. In the end, you should get about ½ cup of cucumber juice.

A collage of photos showing the mixing and making of the cucumber lime mint drink.

Step 4 – Mix the drink: Grab a large pitcher and pour in all the prepared ingredients, starting with cucumber juice, lime and lemon zests and juices, now-cooled mint simple syrup, and 2 cups of cold water. Give it a good stir to ensure everything is thoroughly mixed.

Step 5 – Chill & Serve: Cover and refrigerate for an hour or two to allow the flavors to blend together. When ready to serve, fill glasses with ice and pour the drink over it. Garnish it with a sprig of fresh mint and your other preferred garnishes.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

One of the best parts about this cucumber mint limeade is how easy it is to prepare ahead of time. It’s perfect for entertaining or for keeping a refreshing drink ready in the fridge all week.

Make Ahead: The mint simple syrup can be made 1-2 days in advance and stored in an airtight jar or bottle in the refrigerator.

If you’d rather mix the whole drink ahead, you can prepare it a day in advance. Just cover and refrigerate until ready to serve.

Storage: Store the finished drink in a sealed pitcher in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days.

It’s normal for the liquid to separate as it sits. Just give it a good stir before pouring.

Freezing for Later:

A fun option is to freeze the cucumber mint limeade in ice cube trays. Once frozen, drop the cubes into a glass of water or sparkling water for a light, refreshing sip without making a whole batch.

I like using silicone ice cube molds (affiliate) so the cubes pop out easily.

Expert Tips:

Adjust sweetness to your liking: If you’ve ever made lemonade or limeade, you know that not all lemons and limes taste the same. Some are sweeter while others can be quite tart. I find that about ¾ cup of simple syrup is just right for this cucumber mint drink, but you can easily adjust it according to your taste buds. If it tastes too strong, add a bit more water. If you’d like it sweeter, stir in a touch more syrup until it’s just right for you.

Freshly squeezed juice is best: Fresh limes and lemons make all the difference in this mint and cucumber drink. While bottled juice is a convenient shortcut, it often tastes flat or even slightly bitter. If you can, take the extra few minutes to squeeze your own; it gives the drink a much brighter, cleaner taste.

Don’t skip the straining: It may feel like an extra step, but straining makes a big difference. For a smooth, pulp-free cucumber drink, be sure to strain the mixture before serving. It keeps the drink light, clean, and refreshing.

Chill thoroughly: For the best taste, let the cucumber mint refresher chill in the refrigerator for at least 1-2 hours before serving. This gives the flavors time to meld together. If you’re short on time, you can cut the chilling time by starting with cold ingredients, like refrigerated cucumbers and citrus.

Don’t forget the garnishes: A few simple garnishes can take this beverage from everyday to eye-catching. Add lime slices, sliced cucumber, and a sprig of mint (though be sure to remove the woody stems) to make it look as refreshing as it tastes. For the prettiest presentation, serve it in a clear glass or pitcher over ice; it’s an instant crowd-pleaser.

Variations

One of the best parts about this cucumber mint drink recipe is how easy it is to customize. With just a few simple swaps or additions, you can make it fit any occasion, like serving it to kids on a hot afternoon or mixing it up for friends at happy hour.

Add Sparkling water: For a bubbly twist, replace some or all of the water with sparkling water. You can even use lightly flavored sparkling water  (like Bubly or Spindrift) that you enjoy. It adds a refreshing fizz and makes the drink feel extra special.

Turn it into agua fresca: For a lighter taste, similar to a cucumber mint agua fresca, use less citrus and more water.

Make it a cocktail: This limeade is the perfect base for gin, vodka, or even white rum. Add a splash over ice for a refreshing adult beverage.

Add some ginger: If you enjoy a little spice, try steeping a few slices of fresh ginger in the mint simple syrup. It adds a subtle warmth and zing that balances beautifully with the cool cucumber and bright citrus.

What to Serve It With

This cucumber mint lime CAVA recipe is honestly one of those drinks that just goes with everything. It’s light, refreshing, and makes whatever you’re eating taste even better. But if I had to pick my favorites, these are the times I always want a glass in my hand:

FAQs

Can I substitute fresh lime juice for bottled juice?

Yes, you can. However, please keep in mind that freshly squeezed juice will be better in terms of flavor.

Should I peel the cucumbers for this drink?

Peeling is optional, but here’s a little trick: if you decide to keep the skin on, give it a taste first. Older cucumber skins can sometimes be a little bitter, and I wouldn’t recommend that for this drink.

How long does Copycat Cava Cucumber Mint Limeade last?

As long as it is kept in an airtight container in the fridge, this drink will taste fresh for up to 5 days. You may notice some natural separation, which is completely normal. Just give it a quick stir before pouring, and it should be good to go.

Can I make this drink alcoholic?

Absolutely! This limeade is the perfect base for a summer cocktail. It pairs wonderfully with a splash of white rum, gin, or even vodka. You can just add a shot or two over ice, and you’ve got a fantastic new happy hour drink ready to go!

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Similar Drink Recipes You Might Like

If you’re as obsessed with this CAVA drink as I am, you’ll love these other refreshing recipes from the archives:

  • If you are in search of the most refreshing summer drink on a hot day, look no further than my Strawberry Basil Mocktail. Made in just a few minutes with strawberries and fresh basil, it’s such a nice twist to the classic version.
  • Elevate your lemonade game with my go-to Rosemary Lemonade Recipe, made from scratch with a unique hint of vanilla.
  • Inspired by a trip to Dominica, my honey-sweetened Iced Ginger Tea is a true summer treat for any ginger lover.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

CAVA copycat cucumber mint lime garnished with a sprig of mint.
Print

CAVA Copycat Cucumber Mint Lime Recipe

If you've been looking for a good recipe for CAVA's Cucumber Mint Lime Juice Drink, you are in the right place! This refresher is cool, crisp, and just the right amount of citrusy. Perfect for get-togethers, cocktails, or a refreshing sip for the kids.
Course Non Alcoholic Drink
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 3 minutes
Cooling time 2 hours
Total Time 2 hours 23 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 153kcal

Ingredients

For the simple syrup:

  • cup honey or sugar
  • cup water
  • 1 cup fresh mint leaves rinsed and picked over – plus more as garnish (15 g)

For the drink:

  • 6 Persian cucumbers peeled and cut into chunks or 2 English cucumber (peeled), plus more as garnish
  • Zest of 1 lime 1g – about 1 tsp
  • Zest of 1 lemon 1g – about 1 tsp
  • 1 ½ cups fresh lime juice about 10-12 medium-sized limes
  • ½ cup fresh lemon juice about 5 medium-sized lemons
  • 2 cups water

As Garnish:

  • 1 lime sliced
  • Ice for serving

Instructions

  • Make the Mint Syrup: In a small saucepan, combine honey (or sugar) and water. Warm over medium heat, stirring occasionally, until the honey dissolves completely. Remove from the heat and stir in the mint leaves. Make sure they're fully submerged. Let steep for 20 minutes, then strain and set the syrup aside to cool.
    Images showing how to make cucumber juice.
  • Juice the Cucumbers: Place peeled cucumbers in a food processor and blend until smooth. Set a fine mesh sieve or colander over a bowl and pour in the puree. Use a spoon or spatula to press out as much juice as possible. You should get about ½ cup of cucumber juice.
    Images showing how to make cucumber juice.
  • Mix the Drink: In a large pitcher, combine the cucumber juice, lime zest, lemon zest, lime juice, lemon juice, and the cooled mint syrup. Add 2 cups of water and stir well.
    A collage of images showing how to make the drink.
  • Chill: Cover and refrigerate for 1-2 hours to allow the flavors to blend together.
  • Serve: When ready to serve, fill glasses with ice, cucumber slices, and lime slices. Pour the drink over the ice and garnish with fresh mint.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6 to 7 cups of limeade, ideal for serving 6 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Simple syrup: I made a honey simple syrup to keep my drink naturally sweetened, but you can make a regular simple syrup by mixing an equal amount of granulated sugar with water (1 to 1 ratio). Do not skip this step, otherwise the sugar will not dissolve in the drink.
  • Taste and adjust: Not all lemons and limes are created equal. Some can be sweet, some can be too tart. Once you mix all the ingredients, be sure to give it a taste and adjust with more water or syrup.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in a bottle or jar with a tight fitting lid for upto 3-4 days. Be sure to give it a good shake before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 153kcal | Carbohydrates: 42g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.3g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 12mg | Potassium: 261mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 34g | Vitamin A: 424IU | Vitamin C: 34mg | Calcium: 47mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cava-cucumber-mint-lime-drink/feed/ 0
Sumac Onions Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/ https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 21:22:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82353 What Are Sumac Onions? Growing up in Turkey, sumac onions were always on the table. For us, they were what…]]>

What Are Sumac Onions?

Growing up in Turkey, sumac onions were always on the table. For us, they were what pickled onions are for many American homes: a simple, tangy side that brightens up almost any meal.

While we called it “sumac onions” and served it more like a condiment, some people also refer to it as a “red onion salad” and serve it as a side dish. Both are perfectly acceptable.

Sumac onions in a bowl from a top view.

Now, in case you are not familiar, the key ingredient is sumac. It is a deep red spice made from dried berries (not peppers, though many people think so) with a tangy lemony flavor and slightly earthy taste. Unlike chili powders, it isn’t spicy hot.

When mixed with thinly sliced red onions, sumac helps tame their sharpness, turning them into a slightly sweet and refreshing bite. That’s why you’ll often see sumac onions served alongside meat-centric dishes like lamb, beef, or chicken kebabs. They cut through the richness and spice, bringing a welcome crunch and a pop of brightness to every bite.

Simple Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll need only a few basic pantry staples to make this sumac onions recipe. You can find the complete list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Ingredients for sumac red onions in bowls from the top view.

Red Onion: Since this is the main ingredient, use a fresh red onion and slice it as thinly as possible. A sharp knife works well, but a mandolin ensures even slices. In a pinch, you can substitute white or yellow onions, though the flavor will be slightly different.

Extra Virgin Olive Oil: A mild-flavored olive oil works best.

Lemon Juice: My mom always used lemon juice, as most Turkish families do, but other acidic ingredients like apple cider vinegar, red wine vinegar, or lime juice also work. Keep in mind, though, that the flavor profile will vary depending on the acid you use.

Kosher Salt: I used Diamond kosher salt, but if you are using other brands like Morton’s or sea salt, I would use half the amount and adjust it as necessary.

Sumac: Usually available in the Middle Eastern section of most supermarkets, sold as sumac spice or sumac powder. If you’re new to sumac, I really like Eastanbul sumac spice (affiliate link). Keep an eye on the best-by date, since sumac typically has a shorter shelf life than many other spices, about 6 months.

Red Pepper Flakes (Urfa Chili or Aleppo Pepper): Optional, but the authentic version often uses a pinch of Urfa chili or Aleppo pepper. If you can’t get your hands on either one of those, any other red pepper flakes you have on hand would also work.

Fresh Chopped Parsley: Finely chopped parsley is traditional, but you can switch it up depending on the dish you are serving it with. For example, fresh mint pairs beautifully when serving with lamb.

Pomegranate molasses (optional): A drizzle of pomegranate molasses is optional, but it would add a nice sweetness, especially if you are serving this with kebabs.

Tomatoes (optional): If I am serving this sumac onion salad with lamb kabobs like the traditional Adana Kebab, I add a handful of halved cherry tomatoes. They bring a pop of color and an extra touch of freshness.

How to Make Sumac Onions (Step-by-Step Guide)

Making Turkish sumac onions is as straightforward as it gets. You don’t need any special equipment, just a sharp knife and a bowl. Follow these simple steps, and you’ll have a tangy, refreshing side ready to serve with your favorite dishes.

A collage of images showing thinly sliced onion and a bowl of onions mixed with the rest of the ingredients.

Step 1 – Slice the onions: On a sturdy cutting board, cut the red onion in half lengthwise. Remove the skins and slice thinly into half-moon shapes. A sharp knife works best, but always keep the flat side of the onion against the board for safety.

Step 2 – Mix the ingredients: Place the sliced onion in a medium bowl. Add the olive oil, lemon juice, kosher salt, sumac, and Aleppo pepper (if using).

A collage of images showing thinly sliced red onions being massaged and garnished with parsley.

Step 3 – Massage: Using clean hands, gently massage the onions for 1-2 minutes, until they have softened slightly and absorbed the seasonings.

Step 4 – Garnish and rest: Sprinkle with chopped parsley and toss to combine. If you have the time, cover and refrigerate for 10-15 minutes before serving to let the flavors meld.

Helpful Expert Tips

Whether you’re serving sumac pickled onions as a condiment for kebabs or tucking them into sandwiches, this recipe is simple enough for anyone to make. Still, a few tips can help you get the best results on your first try:

  • Soak the onions if needed: If you’re sensitive to the strong, pungent taste of red onions, soak the slices in cold tap water with a pinch of salt for about 10 minutes, then drain before mixing. This works especially well if you plan to serve them right away. However, keep in mind that if you are making them ahead, this step is unnecessary, as their sharpness naturally mellows as they sit in the fridge.
  • Use fresh sumac: Unlike many other spices, sumac has a relatively short shelf life. Check the freshness before using it. I list one tablespoon in the recipe, but I often add closer to 2 tablespoons at home because I love the flavor. Taste and adjust to your preference.
  • Slice evenly: Try to cut the onions into even slices so each bite has the same texture and balance of seasoning. A mandolin can be helpful, but a sharp chef’s knife works just fine.
  • Don’t skip the massage: Gently massaging for a minute not only softens the onions but also helps them absorb the sumac and other seasonings more fully. 
  • Serve slightly chilled: While you can enjoy them right away, serving them chilled adds a refreshing crunch that pairs especially well with rich meat dishes.
  • Watch out for stains: Sumac has a deep red color, and when mixed with red onions, it can easily stain.. Avoid wearing your favorite white shirt while preparing it, and consider using gloves if you prefer.

Delicious Ways to Serve Sumac Onions

The pairing options are endless for this Turkish onion salad. While you can serve it with nearly any savory dish, here are some of my favorite ways to enjoy it:

  • With Kebabs & Grilled Meats: Sumac onions are the classic pairing with the rich, smoky kebabs that Turkish, Lebanese, and other Middle Eastern cuisines are known for. I especially love to serve on top of my Adana Kebab, Chicken Shish Tawook, Doner Kebab, and Oven Chicken Kebabs.
  • With Shawarma: Their tangy bite balances the spices in shawarma beautifully. Try them with my Easy Chicken Shawarma or Beef Shawarma.
  • In Bowls: Add freshness and brightness to grain or salad bowls. They’re perfect on top of a Chicken Shawarma Bowl or a Homemade CAVA Bowl.
  • With Seafood Dishes: They pair wonderfully with Grilled or Baked salmon, adding contrast to the richness of the fish.
  • Make it a part of your mezze platter: Serve it along with other mezze platter staples like Hummus, Muhammara, and Baba Ganoush.
  • Vegetarian & Vegan Favorites: Sumac onions bring life to plant-based meals, adding a burst of freshness that makes every bite more satisfying. I love serving them alongside Rice with Vermicelli or crispy Falafel.

Storing Leftovers & Making Ahead

Making Ahead: This recipe is perfect for meal prep since the onions continue to mellow and develop flavor as they sit. You can make them 2–3 days in advance and store them in an airtight container or mason jar in the fridge.

Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers refrigerated for 3 to 4 days. Just give them a quick stir before serving to mix the seasonings back in.

Freezing: Freezing isn’t recommended, as the onions lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the best taste and crunch, enjoy them fresh.

Zoomed in photo of sumac onions in a bowl.

FAQs

What do sumac onions taste like?

Sumac onions have a bright, tangy taste with a hint of sweetness. The sumac adds an earthy, citrus-like note that softens the sharpness of raw red onions.

How do you make raw onions less strong/pungent?

If you find raw onions too sharp, soak the slices in a bowl of cold water with a pinch of salt for about 10 minutes, then drain well before using.

How long do sumac onions last / How should I store sumac onions?

They should last for 3-4 days as long as they are stored in an airtight container or a jar with a tight-fitting lid.

Can I add other ingredients or variations?

Yes, absolutely. Sumac onions are very versatile. You can drizzle in a little pomegranate molasses for extra sweetness, swap in fresh mint instead of parsley, or add spices like ground cumin for a different twist.

Other Middle Eastern/Mediterranean Condiments You Might Like

If you enjoy this onion sumac salad, chances are you’ll love other Middle Eastern and Mediterranean condiments too. Here are a few to try next:

  • If you’re a fan of the bold, spicy flavors of the region, my homemade harissa recipe is a must-try.
  • Bright and earthy with lemon and garlic, tahini sauce is one of the easiest ways to add depth to grilled meats or roasted vegetables.
  • When you want to mellow out the richness of kebabs or grilled meats, everyone’s favorite creamy Greek white sauce (known as tzatziki) made with cucumber, garlic, and dill is hard to beat.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Turkish red onion sumac salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Sumac Onions Recipe

These quick and tangy Sumac Onions are a quick Middle Eastern condiment. Made with thinly sliced red onions, lemon juice, olive oil, and sumac, they add a refreshing, citrusy bite that balances rich dishes like kebabs, shawarma, or grilled fish. Serve as a side, condiment, or salad for a fresh pop of flavor.
Course Condiment
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 45kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 red onion medium sized
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoon sumac
  • ¼ teaspoon Urfa or Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Cut onions in half lengthwise, remove the skins, and slice thinly into half-moon shapes. Transfer to a medium bowl.
  • Add the olive oil, lemon juice, Kosher salt, sumac, and Aleppo pepper.
    Two images side by side showing onions being thinly sliced and onions in a bowl garnished with sumac.
  • Using your hands, gently massage the onions for 1–2 minutes until they soften slightly and absorb the seasonings.
  • Add the parsley and toss to combine.
    A collage of images showing sumac onions massaged and then garnished with parsley.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes ½ to ¾ of sumac onions, which would be ideal for serving 4 adults. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Onions: While the traditional recipe is made with red onions, in a pinch, you can use white onions, but keep in mind that the flavor profile will be slightly different.
  • Make Ahead: These onions get even better as they sit. You can prepare them 2-3 days in advance and store them in an airtight container or jar in the fridge.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in the fridge for up to 4 days. Just give them a quick stir before serving to mix the seasonings back in.
  • Freezing: Not recommended, as the onions lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the best flavor and crunch, enjoy them fresh.

Nutrition

Calories: 45kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 295mg | Potassium: 61mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 207IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 10mg | Iron: 0.2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/feed/ 0
Watermelon Cucumber Salad with Feta and Mint https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/ https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/#comments Wed, 16 Jul 2025 21:24:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=9222 Having grown up in the Mediterranean means having a few cooling staples like this cucumber, watermelon, and feta salad in…]]>

Having grown up in the Mediterranean means having a few cooling staples like this cucumber, watermelon, and feta salad in your back pocket. Summers get so hot that refreshing, no-cook dishes like this are a staple on every table.

Versions of this salad show up all across the Mediterranean, from Italy to Greece and beyond. The ingredients may vary slightly, but the combination of juicy watermelon, crisp cucumbers, briny feta cheese, and fresh herbs is a classic in many Mediterranean kitchens.

Every year, as soon as watermelons showed up at the market, my mom would start making it on repeat. With the sweet juiciness of watermelon, the crunch of cold cucumbers, and the creamy-salty bite of feta, it’s the kind of dish that doesn’t need much fuss to shine.

This is what summer tastes like where I’m from: easy, filling, and somehow always the first thing to disappear from the table.

Watermelon Feta Mint Salad Ingredients

This summer watermelon salad with feta and cucumber starts with an easy honey-lime dressing and a short list of ingredients. You can find the complete list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes to consider when shopping for this refreshing salad.

The ingredients for watermelon cucumber salad from the top view.

For the Salad Dressing:

I use my honey-lime dressing in this watermelon mint feta salad because the sweet, floral brightness of lime and honey pairs beautifully with the natural sweetness of the watermelon.

Olive Oil: Choose a light and balanced extra virgin olive oil that isn’t overly peppery or grassy. You want something that supports the salad without overpowering the other ingredients. My current favorite single-source olive oil brand is Garcia de la Cruz (affiliate link.)

Lime Juice: Freshly squeezed lime juice is best, but bottled works in a pinch. If you don’t have lime, freshly squeezed lemon juice is an acceptable substitute. It will taste slightly different but still refreshing. You can also add a little lime zest (about ¼ teaspoon) to enhance the citrus notes. Just be sure to zest the lime before juicing it.

Honey: A floral local honey works especially well here, but maple syrup or agave are good alternatives if that’s what you have. Just know they’ll shift the flavor slightly.

For the Salad:

Watermelon: You’ll need 8 cups of watermelon cut into small 1-inch cubes. Seedless watermelon is the easiest option, but if you’re using regular watermelon, try cutting along the natural lines of the seeds to remove them more easily.

Cucumbers: Persian cucumbers offer great crunch, but regular English cucumbers also work well. I usually peel mine, especially if the skin tastes bitter, which can happen if the fruit has been sitting for a while. Removing the seeds is optional.

Fresh Herbs: The classic combo is watermelon, feta, and mint, but I like to add a little torn fresh basil for even more freshness. I don’t recommend using dried herbs here, as their flavors tend to overpower the dish.

Feta Cheese: I recommend buying a block of feta and crumbling it yourself. It’s creamier, fresher, and gives you more control over the size and texture of the crumbles. If you’re looking for alternatives, mild cheeses like goat cheese or queso fresco would also work well.

How to Make Watermelon Cucumber Salad (Easy Step-by-Step Instructions)

This watermelon and cucumber salad recipe comes together in just 15 minutes from start to finish. Here’s how I make it, step by step:

A collage of images shwowing the dressing for watermelon cucumber salad and the ingredients in a bowl.

Step 1- Make the Dressing: In a mason jar or small bowl, combine the olive oil, fresh lime juice, salt, and honey. Shake or whisk well until the mixture is fully emulsified and appears creamy and cohesive, with no oil separation. If you’d like to save even more time, you can make the dressing in advance and store it in an airtight jar in the fridge for up to 2 days.

Step 2 – Assemble the Salad: Grab a large bowl (one that gives you plenty of room to toss later without squishing anything) and add the diced watermelon, sliced cucumber, and fresh mint and basil. I recommend tearing the herbs by hand instead of chopping them with a knife. This helps preserve the delicate texture of the basil and prevents it from bruising or darkening.

A collage of images showing Mediterranean watermelon salad being drizzled with the dressing.

Step 3 – Add the Dressing: Right before serving, drizzle the dressing over the salad. Gently toss with a large spoon (or two spoons, for an even gentler touch), taking care not to mash/bruise the watermelon cubes.

Step 4 – Finish with Feta: Top the salad with crumbled feta cheese just before serving. If you’d like, finish with a pinch of flaky sea salt to bring out the natural sweetness of the watermelon.

Watermelon Cucumber Salad Variations & Easy Add-Ins

Looking to truly make this watermelon cucumber mint salad recipe your own? Below are a few easy ways to switch things up using ingredients you may already have at home. These are optional, but they’re great if you want to build on the base recipe.

Change up the dressing: When I want a different twist, I swap the honey-lime dressing with my Lemon Balsamic Dressing. Watermelon cucumber salad with balsamic vinaigrette is just as bright and tangy. You can also finish the salad with a drizzle of balsamic reduction right before serving for a deeper, more concentrated flavor.

Make it heartier: If you’re making this watermelon feta salad as part of your meal prep, stir in a cup (or two) of cooked quinoa, bulgur, or wild rice to make it more filling. For a more traditional green salad base, add a handful of salad greens or baby spinach.

Add Summer tomatoes:  Juicy sliced summer tomatoes (I like heirlooms for salads like these) add another layer of flavor and make the salad even more seasonal and vibrant.

Add Onion: A little onion can bring a nice savory bite. You can use thinly sliced red onions, Pickled Red Onions, or Roasted Red Onions. For a milder option, chopped scallions work well too.

Make it vegan: To make this a vegan-friendly salad, simply omit the cheese or use a store-bought or homemade vegan feta. And don’t forget to swap the honey in the dressing for maple syrup or agave.

Foolproof Tips for the Best Watermelon Cucumber Salad

Making this watermelon feta cucumber salad is simple, but here are a few tips to help you get the best results on your first try:

Be gentle when mixing: Use a light hand when tossing the salad to keep the delicate ingredients from breaking apart. A large spoon or your hands work best for gently combining everything.

Choose a good watermelon: Look for a ripe watermelon that feels heavy for its size and has a large yellow field spot. That spot means it had time to ripen on the vine, which usually means better taste and juiciness.

Cut your watermelon and cucumber evenlyDice the watermelon into bite-sized pieces, or use a melon baller for a more decorative look. For the cucumber, peeling is optional, but I recommend slicing it thinly or cutting it into evenly sized cubes so you get both watermelon and cucumber in every bite.

Do not skip the salt: It may sound unusual, but adding a bit of salt to sweet watermelon makes a big difference. It brings out the natural sweetness and enhances the flavors of both the watermelon and cucumber.

Serve it chilled: This watermelon salad tastes best when it is nice and cold. I like to refrigerate the watermelon, cucumber, and feta before prepping so that everything is cool and refreshing when it is time to serve.

Assemble at the last minute: For the best texture, combine the watermelon, cucumber, herbs, and dressing just before serving. This keeps the watermelon and cucumber from getting soggy.

How to Make Ahead and Store?

If you are planning to make this watermelon cucumber feta salad recipe ahead of time, here are my best tips:

Make Ahead: To save valuable time when you’re ready to serve, you can prep the components ahead: Cut the watermelon, slice the cucumbers, crumble the feta, and make the dressing. Store each component in a separate container with a tight-fitting lid. Assemble your feta watermelon cucumber salad right before serving to ensure the best texture and prevent sogginess.

Storage: Leftover salad will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. However, be aware that the watermelon mixture will collect water as it sits. Simply drain, sprinkle salad with fresh herbs, and mix with a touch more dressing to bring it back to life before serving.

A close up of watermelon salad with feta and mint in a bowl.

What to Serve with Watermelon Cucumber Salad?

There are so many options when it comes to serving this watermelon salad with feta and mint. While I usually make it for lunch and serve it by itself, you can easily pair it with meats and vegetables for your summer meals. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

Grilled Protein: Enjoy it as a light lunch or dinner, and serve it as a side dish to hearty grilled meat and seafood like Grilled Pork Chops, Shrimp Kebobs, Grilled Shrimp, Grilled Mahi Mahi, Shish Tawook, or Greek Yogurt Chicken.

Vegetarian Dinners: Keep the entire meal plant-forward and serve it as a wonderful addition to vegetarian main meals like Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant, Baked Eggplant Ziti or Lemon Ricotta Pasta.

Picnic & Potluck Dishes: This salad is always a hit at summer BBQs, picnics, and potlucks. Pair it with other crowd-pleasers like my No Mayo Coleslaw or Greek Yogurt Coleslaw, or Caper Potato Salad.

Quick Answers to Common Questions (FAQs)

Does watermelon and cucumber taste good together?

Yes, watermelon and cucumber are exceptionally delicious when paired together. The juicy watermelon is the perfect balance to the crisp cucumber.

What is watermelon salad made of?

Watermelon salad consists of watermelon, cucumber, fresh mint, fresh basil, and feta cheese tossed in a lime or balsamic vinegar-based dressing.

How do I pick a ripe watermelon quickly?

Look for one with a creamy yellow field spot, a dull rind (not shiny), and that feels heavy for its size. When you give it a gentle tap, it should sound deep and hollow.

What if I don’t have fresh mint?

Fresh mint adds a lot to this recipe, but if you do not have any on hand, you can simply leave it out. The salad will still be delicious, just a little less aromatic.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Savory Fruit Salads You Might Also Like:

If you love sweet and savory salads, you are in the right place. Here are a few other fruit-forward recipes you might want to try:

Watermelon and cucumber salad in a bowl with two spoons in the bowl.
Print

Watermelon Cucumber Salad Recipe

This Watermelon cucumber salad is an incredibly refreshing savory fruit salad that is flavored with honey lime dressing. Ready in 15 minutes, it is the perfect summer salad you can serve for lunch or take with you to summer potlucks, picnics, and BBQ parties.
Course Lunch
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 290kcal

Ingredients

For the Honey Lime Dressing:

  • 4 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 3 tablespoons fresh lime juice from 1 lime
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoon honey

For The Salad:

  • 8 cups fresh watermelon ~ 5 to 6 lbs – cut into 1-inch cubes (preferably seedless)
  • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and sliced ¼ inch thick, or English cucumbers
  • 3 tablespoons fresh mint roughly torn
  • 2 tablespoons fresh basil roughly torn
  • ½ cup feta cheese crumbled (or goat cheese)
  • Pinch sea salt optional

Instructions

  • Mix olive oil, fresh lime juice, salt, and honey in a mason jar and shake vigorously. Set aside.
    Watermelon salad dressing and the ingredients in a bowl.
  • Place watermelon cubes, sliced cucumber, fresh mint, and basil in a large salad bowl.
  • Right before serving, drizzle the dressing over the salad. Give it a gentle toss being careful not to bruise or break the watermelon chunks.
  • Sprinkle the feta cheese on top, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary. Alternatively, you can sprinkle it with a pinch of sea salt. Serve cold.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 8 cups of cucumber watermelon salad ideal for serving 4 adults. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Serve it chilled. This salad is best when served cold. I like to keep each ingredient in the refrigerator before and after prepping. This way, all the salad is perfectly chill (and super refreshing) before serving.
  • Assemble at the last minute: Toss all the ingredients with the dressing just before serving. This keeps the integrity and texture of the watermelon and cucumber intact.
  • Be gentle while tossing: Use gentle hands to keep the delicate ingredients’ shape and structure.
  • Make Ahead: Prepare all the ingredients and store them in separate containers. You can also make the dressing 3 days in advance and keep it in a mason jar in the fridge. Toss it all together just before serving.
  • Storage: Leftover salad will keep fresh in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. However, be aware that the watermelon mixture will collect water as it sits. Drain, sprinkle salad with fresh herbs, and toss with a touch more of the honey lime dressing to bring it back to life before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 290kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 365mg | Potassium: 434mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin A: 2056IU | Vitamin C: 30mg | Calcium: 131mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/feed/ 6
Easy Tzatziki Sauce Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/#comments Tue, 01 Jul 2025 16:52:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15923 What is Tzatziki Sauce? (Beyond the White Gyro Sauce) You know that question about your desert island food? Tzatziki would…]]>

What is Tzatziki Sauce? (Beyond the White Gyro Sauce)

You know that question about your desert island food? Tzatziki would be mine. 

At its core, tzatziki is a yogurt-based dip made with strained yogurt (also known as Greek yogurt), cucumber, garlic, lemon juice, and herbs (typically dill or mint).

Referred to by many names, such as Greek Tzatziki sauce, Tzatziki Sauce, and Cucumber Yogurt Sauce, it can be served as a dip, a sauce, or even as a dressing. 

It pairs well with just about anything, from meat to gyros, to Turkish kebabs, to grilled or roasted vegetables.

While many people in the U.S. know it as the white sauce that comes with a gyro, that version is often heavier, sometimes made with mayonnaise or sour cream, and doesn’t always include cucumber. 

My homemade tzatziki sauce recipe is different here. It’s the real thing. The kind of tzatziki you’ll find on tables in homes across Turkiye, Greece, and beyond.

Essential Ingredients for Authentic Tzatziki (And Why They Matter)

The good news is that this easy tzatziki recipe requires only a few simple ingredients and comes together in minutes. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful tips to keep in mind when shopping:

Tzatziki sauce ingredients from the top view with text on the image.

Full-fat Greek Yogurt (also known as Strained Yogurt): I think the best yogurt for tzatziki is a whole-milk, plain Greek yogurt. It yields a rich and creamy tzatziki dip, a main characteristic of this Mediterranean sauce.  If your container has any liquid sitting on top, be sure to strain that out before using.

You can also use plain, unsweetened yogurt or even low-fat or fat-free yogurt, but the texture will be a bit looser compared to Greek yogurt.

Fresh Cucumber: Either Persian or English cucumbers work well. I like to peel them first, as some cucumber skin can be bitter. Still, it is a personal preference.

I grate them using the large holes on a box grater and then drain them in a mesh sieve. It might seem like an extra step, but thoroughly draining the grated cucumber helps eliminate excess liquid, giving you the thick, creamy consistency that this cucumber tzatziki sauce is known for.

Fresh Garlic Cloves: The traditional version of this Mediterranean yogurt sauce calls for fresh, finely minced garlic. I usually add two cloves per 1 ½ cups of yogurt, but feel free to adjust the amount based on your preferences. 

If you prefer a milder flavor, garlic powder is a fine substitute. Since it’s more concentrated, I recommend using about 1 teaspoon per 1 ½ cups of yogurt.

Fresh Herbs: I like using fresh dill, but fresh mint is another classic option. In Turkiye, it’s also common to use dried dill or mint if fresh isn’t available. That said, I think fresh herbs bring a brighter, more vibrant taste.

Fresh Lemon Juice: Just a squeeze is enough to brighten the flavors and balance the richness of the yogurt.

Kosher Salt and Black Pepper: You won’t need anything beyond basic seasoning here. Start with the amounts listed in the recipe and adjust to taste.

Extra Virgin Olive Oil (Optional): You won’t see olive oil listed in my recipe because my mom never used it. I find that thick, whole-milk yogurt gives the sauce all the richness it needs. However, if you’d like to add it, a tablespoon of olive oil per 1 ½ cups of yogurt is a good starting point.

How to Make Easy Homemade Tzatziki: A Step-by-Step Guide

Making a delicious tzatziki with yogurt, shredded cucumber, and lemon juice doesn’t require any special cooking techniques, so anyone can do it.

A collage of images showing how to strain grated cucumber and make the yogurt mixture.

Step 1 – Grate and drain the cucumber: Using the large holes of a box grater, grate the peeled cucumber and transfer it to a fine-mesh strainer. Press down with a spatula to release the excess moisture. I usually let it sit for a few minutes to help the juices drain completely.

Once drained, you should have about 1 cup of grated cucumber.

Alternatively, you can wrap the shredded cucumber in a clean tea towel and squeeze it by hand to remove as much liquid as possible.

Step 2 – Whisk the yogurt base: In a medium bowl, combine the Greek yogurt, freshly squeezed lemon juice, minced garlic, salt, and black pepper.

Whisk until smooth and creamy. This is also a good time to give it a quick taste and adjust the seasoning if needed.

A collage of photos showing how to make tzatziki from scratch.

Step 3 – Add cucumber and herbs: Fold in the drained cucumber and fresh dill or mint. Mix until everything is evenly combined.

Step 4 – Cover and chill:
You can serve it right away, but if you have the time, cover and let it rest in the fridge for at least 30 minutes. This allows the flavors to meld and deepen.

A bowl of tzatziki surrounded with vegetables.
Print

Easy Tzatziki Sauce Recipe

An easy tzatziki sauce recipe that you can make in minutes and serve with all your savory Mediterranean/Middle Eastern dishes.
Course Sauce
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 61kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 English Cucumber peeled (or 2 Persian cucumbers)
  • 1 ½ cups Whole Milk Greek Yogurt unsweetened and unflavored
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2 cloves fresh garlic peeled and minced finely
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • cup fresh dill or fresh mint

Instructions

  • Using the large holes of a box grater, grate the cucumber. Transfer it into a fine-mesh strainer and strain all of its juices, pressing it with a rubber spatula. Set aside.
    A collage of images showing how to make the recipe.
  • In a medium-size mixing bowl, whisk together yogurt, lemon juice, minced garlic, salt and pepper.
  • Using a spatula, fold in the cucumber and dill. Transfer to a bowl.
    Person making the tzatziki in a bowl.
  • If you have time, cover with plastic, and let it sit in the fridge for a few hours before serving.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ¼ to 1 ½ cups of tzatziki sauce which is ideal for 4 servings as a condiment. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as written up to 2 days before serving. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. Be sure to give it a good stir before serving.
  • Storage: This sauce will stay fresh for about 3-4 days. Simply place leftovers in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge. If you notice any liquid separation, just give your Tzatziki a good stir before serving.
  • A word on olive oil: My recipe relies on rich yogurt for creaminess and does not require adding any olive oil, unlike some other tzatziki recipes. However, for extra depth, drizzle 1 tbsp extra virgin olive oil on top before serving.
  •  

Nutrition

Calories: 61kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 4mg | Sodium: 31mg | Potassium: 245mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 381IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 105mg | Iron: 1mg

Expert Tips from a Lifelong Tzatziki Maker

This recipe is pretty straightforward, but there are a few things I want to point out so you can end up with the best tzatziki on your first try:

  • Don’t skip draining the shredded cucumber: This is the single most important step when it comes to achieving that creamy texture tzatziki is known for. Yes, it’s an extra step, but it makes all the difference.
  • DIY Greek Yogurt: If you don’t have Greek yogurt, you can strain plain yogurt at home. Just place a fine-mesh sieve over a bowl and line it with cheesecloth (a paper towel will also work in a pinch). Add the yogurt, cover it, and let it sit in the fridge for a few hours. The longer it sits, the thicker it becomes.
    Since plain yogurt has more liquid, I recommend using about half a cup more than the recipe calls for to account for the liquid that will drain.
  • Avoid overmixing: Once you have folded in the cucumber and herbs, mix only until the ingredients are just combined. Overmixing can cause the cucumber to release more liquid, which may water down the sauce.
  • Do not skip the chilling: To me, the secret to the best tzatziki sauce is letting it rest in the fridge. This time allows the flavors (especially the garlic and fresh herbs) to develop and deepen. Even just 30 minutes makes a difference, but planning for an hour or two can yield even better results.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

Make Ahead: You can make this Greek tzatziki sauce recipe a day or two ahead. Just be sure to transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge.

Storage: Leftovers will keep for up to 3 days in the refrigerator. Give it a good stir before serving, and if any liquid has collected on top, simply pour it off or drain it before mixing.

Delicious Ways to Serve Tzatziki Sauce in Your Daily Cooking

Images showing food that uses tzatziki.

I may or may not have been caught eating this Mediterranean classic with a spoon. All jokes aside, tzatziki is a staple for a reason. It pairs beautifully with just about any meat or vegetable dish that could use a cooling, creamy contrast. Here are a few of my favorite ways to use it:

Kabobs and Gyros: Simply drizzle it right on top! If you want to try something different, try drizzling this sauce over my Karniyarik recipe (aka Turkish Stuffed Eggplant), Greek Yogurt Chicken, Shish Taouk, or Baked Chicken Kabobs, Chicken Shawarma, or serve it with Turkish Kofte

Sauce for Burgers and Sandwiches: I love using it as a spread for Greek Lamb Burgers (pictured above) or my Chicken Pita Wraps. It adds a creamy contrast and brings everything together.

Vegetables and Vegetable Dishes: A dollop of tzatziki can turn simple roasted eggplant into a delicious appetizer. It’s also a great match for baked zucchini fritters, crispy falafel, or just about any veggie-forward dish you’d serve at a gathering.

With Salads: Tzatziki isn’t just a dip; it makes a fantastic, creamy addition to various salads. I particularly love a dollop alongside or even mixed into my easy Greek salad for an extra layer of freshness.

Grain Bowls: Drizzle it over shawarma chicken bowls (pictured above) or make it part of a DIY Cava bowl. It adds creaminess and brightens the rest of the toppings.

Part of a Meze Platter: Serve it in a bowl as a dip on a large platter along with cheese and crackers, olives, hummus, muhammara, pita bread (or pita chips), and fresh raw vegetables.

Tzatziki Sauce Variations & Substitutions:

  • Dairy-Free/Vegan Options: To make this vegan or dairy-free, use a neutral-flavored plant-based yogurt. I prefer unflavored cashew yogurt, but coconut or almond milk yogurt can also work. Just make sure it’s unsweetened and as thick as possible for the best consistency.
  • Herb Variations: You can easily make this creamy tzatziki sauce your own by switching up the herbs. Fresh dill and mint are classic options, but parsley or chives are also great alternatives. No fresh herbs on hand? You can leave them out and still have a delicious dip.
  • Making it Thinner (like Turkish Cacık): If you have ever been to Turkiye, you’ve probably had cacik, a thinner version of tzatziki. To achieve that texture, simply use plain yogurt instead of Greek yogurt, or stir in about ½ cup of cold water (or more, depending on your preference) until you reach the desired consistency.

FAQs:

How Do You Spell Tzatziki?

The phonetic spelling is /tsaˈtsiːki/. The word for this Greek yogurt cucumber sauce is spelled T-Z-A-T-Z-I-K-I. It is a loanword from Modern Greek, which actually comes from the Turkish word cacık, of unknown origin.

How Do You Pronounce Tzatziki?

So, how do you say Tzatziki? The correct way to pronounce Tzatziki is “tsah-see-key.” Think of the tsah part as how you say “pizza,” without the first two letters.

Can Tzatziki sauce be frozen?

Technically, you can freeze yogurt, but after thawing, it loses its creamy consistency. This is generally true for most savory yogurt-based dressings or sauces. Therefore, I wouldn’t recommend freezing Tzatziki sauce.

Can I use non-fat yogurt?

Yes, you can use any plain yogurt you like. However, I recommend sticking to Greek Yogurt as it is thicker than other yogurt types. The higher the fat content, the more delicious and creamy it would be, but non-fat or low-fat plain yogurt would still do the job.

Do I have to strain the juice of the cucumber?

The correct answer is yes. Some people even go as far as straining yogurt and cucumber in a colander lined with cheesecloth overnight in the fridge. I guess it is because they prefer a thicker consistency. However, in my opinion, the thickness of Tzatziki is a personal preference. If you like yours runny then no need to strain the juices and vice versa.

Do I have to peel the cucumber?

It is a personal preference. I prefer to peel mine as some cucumber skin can be bitter.

Can I substitute sour cream for yogurt?

I don’t usually recommend it, as the flavor and texture are quite different. Sour cream is richer and tangier than yogurt, and it has a higher fat content, which can make the sauce feel heavier than intended.

What can i substitute for greek yogurt in tzatziki sauce?

If you don’t have Greek yogurt, you can use plain (unsweetened) yogurt to make tzatziki. Since it is not as thick as Greek yogurt (also known as strained yogurt), I recommend straining its liquid before use. Simply place it in a fine-mesh strainer lined with cheesecloth and set it in a bowl.

Other Yogurt Sauce Recipes You Might Also Like:

  • My Yogurt Dill Sauce is bright, herby, and perfect for serving with salmon, baked potatoes, or simple roasted vegetables.
  • A drizzle of my Greek yogurt salad dressing instantly turns any salad greens into a refreshing, creamy side that goes with just about any meal.
  • A spoonful of my Yogurt Tahini Sauce adds a creamy, nutty layer to grain bowls, roasted veggies, or just about anything that needs a little something extra.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/feed/ 25
Texas Caviar Recipe (Cowboy Caviar) https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/ https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/#comments Wed, 25 Jun 2025 18:24:29 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=22788 For years, I avoided this cowboy bean salad anytime I saw it at a potluck or outdoor party. If you’re…]]>

For years, I avoided this cowboy bean salad anytime I saw it at a potluck or outdoor party. If you’re like me and didn’t grow up eating it, you might agree that some versions can be overly sweet.

Then I came across Dorie Greenspan’s version in her cookbook Everyday Dorie (affiliate link) and decided to give it another shot. To my surprise, it was nothing like what I had tasted before. Her cowboy caviar dressing was perfectly tangy with just a touch of sweetness, balancing out the earthy beans in the best way.

Cowboy caviar in a bowl with two spoons on the side.

This recipe, sometimes called Texas Caviar, Cowboy Caviar, Cowboy Salad, or even Cowboy Bean Dip, is my take on her version, with a few minor tweaks.

Whatever name you use, it’s one of the easiest dishes to throw together, and it works as a dip, a salad, or a chunky salsa perfect with a side of tortilla chips.

Texas Caviar Ingredients

For a quick overview, find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below. But for truly foolproof results, here are my top tips as you shop and prep:

The Dressing Ingredients:

Some versions of this recipe use bottled Italian dressing, but I find those to be overly oily and lacking in depth. What makes this Cowboy Caviar dip different is the homemade lime and olive oil dressing. It’s just enough to coat the beans and veggies without weighing them down, adding brightness and balance in every bite.

Ingredients for cowboy caviar's dressing.

Here are a couple of helpful ingredient notes as you make the dressing:

Lime zest and lime juice: My version of the Texas Caviar dressing uses both lime zest and fresh lime juice to bring out a bright, tangy flavor. Four tablespoons of lime juice might sound like a lot, but trust me, it’s just the right amount.

If you prefer a milder taste, you can use 2 tablespoons of red wine vinegar and reduce the lime juice to 2 tablespoons.

And just a quick tip: it’s always easier to zest the lime before squeezing it.

Spices: I use a small amount of ground cumin and sweet paprika, following Dorie’s recipe. I think they add a beautiful depth and a welcome punch. Still, if you’re not a fan of either spice, feel free to leave them out.

Sweetener: I almost always reach for natural sweeteners like honey or maple syrup, but granulated sugar works in a pinch if that’s what you have on hand.

Garlic: Whenever I make a salad dressing, I love using fresh garlic. I think the sharp bite and depth of flavor just can’t be replicated. But if you prefer something milder, you can substitute it with 1 teaspoon of garlic powder.

Salad Ingredients:

A photo showing what's in Texas caviar.

Beans: I use a combination of black beans and black-eyed peas in my version of this Cowboy Caviar salad. In my opinion, black-eyed peas are pretty much a must in any Texas Caviar dip recipe. You can swap red kidney beans or pinto beans in place of the black beans if you’d like, and you’ll still get the heart of the dish.

Canned beans help keep things quick and easy, but you can absolutely cook them from scratch if that’s your preference.

Just be sure to rinse and dry them well before assembling the salad to avoid extra liquid watering it down.

Corn: In the summer, I love using fresh shucked corn when it’s in season. But if you’re making this at another time of year, frozen (and thawed) or canned (rinsed and drained) corn works just as well.

Onion: I use a combination of finely chopped green onions and red onions because I love the distinct flavors each one adds. You get a mix of color, crunch, and both mild and sharp flavors. If you prefer a milder taste, you can leave out the red onion. Or if you want something with more bite, skip the green and just use red.

Peppers: Most Texas Caviar recipes use a combination of red bell peppers and jalapeño, and for good reason. Each one brings its own unique flavor. If you like a bit of heat, feel free to leave some of the jalapeño seeds in for a touch of spiciness.

Tomatoes: During the summer months, I love using colorful cherry tomatoes for this Texas Caviar dip. But really, any kind of tomato will work. Heirloom, beefsteak, or even regular Roma tomatoes are all good options. Just be sure to cut them into small, bite-sized pieces so they mix easily with the other ingredients.

Avocado: It is optional and not traditional, but I think a ripe avocado makes a great addition, especially if you’re planning to serve this as a dip with chips on the side. Just be sure to cut it into small cubes so it blends in nicely.

Fresh Herbs: I used a handful of finely chopped fresh cilantro leaves, but if you are not a fan, you can use fresh parsley instead.

How To Make Texas Caviar?

Making this recipe takes no more than 15-20 minutes and requires no special equipment. 

Step 1 – Make the Cowboy Caviar Dressing: 

Person making Texas caviar dressing.

In a mixing bowl, whisk together the olive oil, lime zest, lime juice, ground cumin, paprika, kosher salt, honey, and garlic until fully combined.

Or, if you prefer, add everything to a mason jar, put the lid on, and give it a good shake.

You can also make the dressing a day or two ahead of time to speed things up even more when you’re ready to assemble the dip.

Step 2 – Assemble the salad:

Cowboy caviar salad from the top view in a bowl.

In a large salad bowl, combine the drained and rinsed black beans and black-eyed peas with the corn kernels, scallions, red onion, bell peppers, jalapeños, tomatoes, and chopped cilantro.

If you’re using avocado, I recommend adding it just before serving so it doesn’t brown.

Step 3 – Drizzle and Serve:

Images showing how to make Cowboy caviar.

Drizzle the dressing over the salad and gently toss to combine, being careful not to break up the beans too much.

This is also a good time to give it a taste and adjust the seasoning if needed.

Make Ahead and Storage Tips:

One of the best things about this Cowboy Salad recipe is that it can be made ahead of time (one or two days). In fact, I recommend it because the extra time allows the flavors to mingle and develop. Here’s how I do it:

  • To make ahead:
    Prepare the dressing and chop all the salad ingredients except the avocado. Toss everything together in a large bowl, drizzle with the dressing, cover tightly, and refrigerate. If you’re using avocado, add it just before serving to keep it from browning.
  • Storing leftovers:
    Transfer any leftover Cowboy Caviar to an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Before serving, give it a good stir and freshen it up with a squeeze of lime juice and a sprinkle of salt if needed.

Expert Tips for The Best Texas Caviar

While this recipe is pretty straightforward, below are a few helpful tips for the best results.

  • Let it rest: This step is optional, but I recommend letting the salad rest in the fridge for about an hour before serving. It gives the tangy lime juice dressing time to soak into the beans and veggies, bringing everything together.
  • Evenly cut vegetables: The most time-consuming part of this recipe is chopping the vegetables, but it’s worth taking your time. Aim to cut everything into similar-sized pieces so each bite feels balanced. Try to slice the tomatoes thinly and cut the peppers into small, bite-sized pieces, ideally smaller than the black-eyed peas.
  • Be gentle as you toss: When mixing the salad, go slowly and gently to avoid breaking the beans. This helps keep the texture nice and prevents everything from turning into mush. 

Cowboy Caviar Variations and Substitutions

Making this Cowboy Caviar dip your own is easy because, let’s face it, this simple recipe is endlessly customizable. Here are a few ideas to get you started:

  • Add more veggies: You can pack your Cowboy Caviar with even more fresh vegetables. Try thinly sliced cucumbers, chopped celery, or even finely diced radishes for extra crunch and color.
  • Add fruit: I’ve seen versions of this recipe made with sweet fruit like mango or pineapple. It might sound unexpected, but the sweetness pairs nicely with the tangy dressing, adding a refreshing twist, especially when served as a dip with chips.
  • Switch up the dressing: While my favorite part of this recipe is the tangy lime dressing, I sometimes change things up with my chili lime vinaigrette, which incorporates chili powder and adds a more Mexican-inspired twist.
  • Toss in grains: I love adding a cup of cooked quinoa, wild rice or farro to make it a filling salad especially if I am making this recipe as a part of my weekly meal prep.
  • Make it vegan: If you prefer a vegan version, just swap the honey for maple syrup or agave.

What To Serve with Texas Caviar?

It’s no secret that this recipe makes a great side dish or appetizer, whether you’re heading to a summer BBQ, a potluck, or packing lunch for work. But if you’d like to turn it into a full meal, you have plenty of options. Here are a few ideas:

  • Grilled Meats and seafood: Serve it alongside grilled chicken, shrimp, or salmon for a light and colorful plate. It’s a perfect match for summer cookouts or easy weeknight dinners.
  • With chips on the side: This Cowboy Salsa recipe makes a great appetizer when served with tortilla chips. I like using the scoopable kind, so you can get a little bit of everything in each bite.
  • With eggs: Scrambled eggs wrapped in a tortilla with a generous spoonful of Texas Caviar makes an excellent breakfast burrito. It adds freshness, texture, and just the right amount of zing to your morning meal.

FAQs

What is Texas Caviar?

Texas Caviar is a recipe originally created and served by Helen Corbitt, the culinary director of Neiman Marcus, in 1940s Dallas.

Made with a combination of canned or cooked beans (i.e. red, black, or pinto), black-eyed peas, peppers, tomatoes, garlic, and other extras like corn, avocado, mango, and various herbs and spices, since then it has stood the test of time and become a Southern classic.

Texas Caviar vs. Cowboy Caviar: Is There a Difference?

The dish was originally created in Texas, which is how it got the name “Texas Caviar.” Over time, people started calling it “Cowboy Caviar” as a fun, casual nickname.

How far in advance can you make cowboy caviar?

You can make Cowboy Caviar up to 2 days in advance. Just store it in an airtight container in the fridge, and it should still taste fresh and delicious. If you’re planning to include avocado, wait to add it until right before serving to keep it from browning.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Delicious Bean Salads You’ll Love

Fan of bean salads? Me too! Here are a few more that you might like:

  • My Corn and Black Bean Salad is yet another great alternative to a bean salad that you can serve with chips on the side.
  • What makes my Five Bean Salad recipe the best bean salad is the garlicky mustard dressing. Just like this cowboy caviar recipe, it uses a combination of canned beans and some lightly boiled fresh green beans.
  • If you have extra black eyed peas, then my Black Eyed Peas Salad is just as fresh and satisfying. Not to mention, it takes 15 minutes to make.
Texas caviar in a bowl with two spoons on the side.
Print

Texas Caviar Recipe

This Texas Caviar (aka Cowboy Caviar)loaded with black-eyed peas, corn, tomatoes, peppers, and tangy lime dressing makes the best salad, dip, or side dish. Ready in 30 minutes and can be made ahead.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 192kcal

Ingredients

For The Dressing:

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon lime zest
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon paprika sweet or smoked
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon honey
  • 2 cloves garlic minced

For The Caviar Dip:

  • 1 can black beans 15-oz can, drained and rinsed
  • 1 can black eyed peas 15-oz can, drained and rinsed
  • ½ cup corn kernels frozen (and thawed), canned (and drained) or fresh corn would all work
  • 3 scallions both white and green parts are chopped
  • cup red onion chopped finely or diced
  • 1 red bell peppers chopped (approx. 1/2 cup)
  • 1 jalapeno pepper seeded and chopped
  • ½ cup cherry tomatoes sliced thinly
  • ½ avocado ripe – cut into small cubes
  • ½ cup fresh cilantro rinsed and chopped

To Serve With (Optional)

  • Your favorite hot Sauce
  • Tortilla Chips

Instructions

  • To make the dressing: Whisk together the olive oil, lime zest, lime juice, ground cumin, smoked paprika, salt, honey and garlic. Set it aside.
    Person making Texas caviar dressing with lime juice.
  • For the Texas Caviar dip (or salad): Place, black beans, black eyed peas, corn kernels, scallions, red onion, bell peppers, jalapeno pepper, cherry tomatoes, avocado, and fresh cilantro in a bowl.
    The ingredients for Cowboy caviar in a bowl from the top view.
  • Drizzle it with the dressing and give it a gentle toss. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
    Person drizzling the salad with dressing and mixing it.
  • If preferred, add in a few dashes of your favorite hot sauce and serve with tortilla chips.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 5-6 cups of Cowboy caviar ideal for serving 6 adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving and does not include the calories coming from (optional) tortilla chips.
  • Make ahead: You can make this recipe up to 2 days in advance. If you go in that direction, add the avocado right before serving to avoid browning.
  • Storage: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • If you want to go with more of the traditional Italian salad dressing route instead of the lime dressing I used, feel free to use my Italian salad dressing below: ¼ cups extra virgin olive oil
    2 tablespoons white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
    1 tablespoon freshly squeezed lemon juice
    1 clove of garlic, minced
    1 teaspoon dried basil
    1/4 teaspoon dried oregano
    ¼ teaspoon crushed red pepper (optional)
    ½ teaspoon Kosher salt (I use Diamond kosher salt)
    ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Nutrition

Calories: 192kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 326mg | Potassium: 386mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 982IU | Vitamin C: 39mg | Calcium: 31mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was originally published in March 2019. It has been updated with some additional information with no changes to the original recipe in July 2025.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/feed/ 44
Burrata Caprese https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/ https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/#comments Wed, 18 Jun 2025 22:05:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67454 Key Ingredients to make Caprese Salad with Burrata Caprese burrata salad is a cinch to make and requires just a…]]>

Key Ingredients to make Caprese Salad with Burrata

Caprese burrata salad is a cinch to make and requires just a few key ingredients from the grocery store or farmer’s market. You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Below are some helpful tips as you shop for this recipe’s ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Burrata cheese: Fresh burrata cheese is a soft Italian cheese with a delicate, creamy center, similar in taste and texture to fresh mozzarella. It’s usually sold submerged in water in a tub. Before using it in your salad, take it out of the fridge and let it come closer to room temperature to enhance its flavor and texture. 

Also, drain off any excess liquid before tearing it into pieces.

Tomatoes: I like to use a mix of large heirloom tomatoes and sweet cherry tomatoes. The juicy heirlooms bring a meaty, steak-like texture to the salad, while cherry tomatoes add a pop of sweetness. Feel free to use any variety you have on hand, including Roma, beefsteak, vine-ripened, or grape tomatoes.

To get the best flavor, keep your tomatoes on the counter (not in the fridge) and try to use them within a few days of buying them. For easy, clean slices, I recommend using a serrated knife.

Fresh basil leaves: To finish the salad, use whole basil leaves or tear them gently with your hands instead of cutting them with a knife, which can bruise their delicate leaves and release bitter flavors.

Balsamic vinegar: If your budget allows, look for a traditional, aged balsamic vinegar from Modena. Its deep sweetness and complex flavor will elevate the salad. However, you can absolutely use a more affordable condiment-style balsamic vinegar and it’ll still taste delicious!

Extra virgin olive oil: I prefer a single-origin extra virgin olive oil with mild, fruity notes for this recipe. It adds a lovely finishing touch and complements the creamy burrata perfectly.

Seasonings: Keep it simple with kosher salt and freshly cracked black pepper. A final sprinkle of flaky salt adds a nice, salty crunch.

How to Make this Burrata Caprese Recipe?

The combination of burrata, tomato and basil is just as delicious here as a traditional caprese salad. The good news is that making it is quick and easy with only a few steps:

A collage of images showing how to make burrata Caprese recipe.

Step 1 – Prepare tomatoes: Slice the larger tomatoes using a serrated knife into ⅓-inch thick slices. If using cherry tomatoes, cut them in half (or you can quarter them as well). 

Grab a large serving platter and arrange the sliced tomatoes overlapping until it covers the bottom of the plate. 

Sprinkle it with salt to ensure they are properly seasoned.

Step 2 – Add burrata: Place burrata balls in the center of the serving platter. Alternatively, gently cut them into smaller pieces with a sharp paring knife and scatter the chunks over the sliced tomatoes. Alternatively, you can carefully tear into small chunks by hand.

Step 3 – Season: Sprinkle the tomatoes and burrata with the remaining salt and black pepper. Finish with a generous drizzle of olive oil and balsamic vinegar ensuring that each slice of tomato gets a bit of oil and a bit of balsamic vinegar.

Garnish with torn basil leaves before serving.

How to Store Leftovers?

Leftover burrata caprese will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for 2–3 days. Keep in mind that the burrata’s creamy center will solidify a bit over time, so it won’t be quite as creamy on days two and three.

Before serving leftovers, drain off any excess liquid to prevent them from becoming soggy. To “revive” your burrata caprese, add a few fresh tomato slices and some fresh basil leaves, then drizzle with a little extra olive oil and balsamic vinegar. Finish with a sprinkle of flaky salt for a fresh, vibrant bite.

Expert Tips

  • Use peak season tomatoes for the ultimate flavor. While creamy burrata may seem like the star of the show, slightly ripe, juicy tomatoes are just as crucial for the most delicious dish. When shopping for tomatoes for this recipe, take a moment to ensure that they are not overly ripe and free of any bruises.
  • Season tomatoes liberally:  Don’t be shy about salting the tomatoes. Properly seasoning them draws out their natural juices and enhances their sweet, vibrant flavor.
  • Serve at room temperature: To achieve the perfect burrata “ooze”, bring it to room temperature before tearing and adding it to the salad. This way, it will be extra creamy with a soft and spreadable texture.
  • Presentation is key: This is a showstopping salad that will become the talk of the table. Be creative – assemble the tomatoes somewhat haphazardly and whimsical. Allow the burrata to shine in the center or scattered into pieces.
  • Resist the urge to overcomplicate it: This is a super simple tomato salad that truly shines when made with in-season, high-quality ingredients. Stick to the basics and let the fresh flavors speak for themselves. There is no need for extra bells and whistles!
  • Double the recipe or halve it for a small crowd: The recipe below serves four, but I could honestly eat the whole thing myself. Double or triple the recipe for a large party, or halve it when serving for one or two.

Variations

While the combination of basil, burrata, and tomatoes is quite simple and effective, you can take this recipe to the next level by changing it up a bit. Here are a few variations I’ve tried and recommend:

  • Use balsamic reduction instead of balsamic vinegar: Balsamic reduction (also known as sweet balsamic glaze) is reduced balsamic vinegar that is sticky and sweet, and can add just another level of flavor to this burrata caprese salad recipe. Simply drizzle your burrata salad with balsamic glaze at the very end (instead of the balsamic vinegar drizzle) for a robust and tangy finish.
  • Change up the Dressing: Take it up a notch with a simple basil dressing for caprese salad, like Basil Vinaigrette or go for Balsamic and Lemon Dressing.
  • Add avocado: Although unconventional, a ripe avocado adds another layer of creaminess and color to this tomato burrata salad. Simply slice a ripe avocado (or cut it in cubes) for an added layer of flavor and texture.
  • Add summer fruit: Add a handful of summer berries, such as sliced juicy strawberries or raspberries, or some ripe stone fruit like peaches and apricots for a burst of color and natural sweetness.

What to Serve With Caprese Burrata Salad

When you put this Caprese salad with burrata on the table, I think we can all agree that it will be the star of the show. Make it a part of your Memorial Day Menu, Labor Day Menu, or 4th of July celebrations! Here are some pairing and serving suggestions:

  • Crusty Bread: Serve it with warm crusty bread like French baguette or No Knead Olive Bread on the side for an appetizer that is guaranteed to impress.
  • Bruschetta: Slice a baguette, brush with olive oil and toast just before serving alongside the tomato caprese with fresh burrata, or make it a part of your Meat and Cheese Platter.
  • Grilled or Roasted Meats: Give it a nice boost of protein and serve it as a side dish with Marinated Shrimp Skewers, Grilled Mahi Mahi, Greek Yogurt Chicken or Shrimp Scampi.
  • Pasta: Go all-out Italian and serve it with a main dish, such as my Garlic Butter Pasta or Lemon Ricotta Pasta.
  • Crisp White Wine: If all else fails, treat yourself to this gorgeous salad and a crisp, chilled glass of wine like an Italian Pinot Grigio or Sauvignon Blanc.
Burrata Caprese styled on a plate from the top view.

FAQs

What is burrata?

Creamy burrata cheese is an Italian cow’s milk cheese that features an outer shell of fresh mozzarella wrapped around a soft-center of stracciatella (cheese curds and cream).

Where does burrata cheese come from?

Burrata originated in Puglia, Italy at the Castel del Monte and since has become a global sensation around the world.

What’s the difference between burrata and caprese?

Burrata is the soft cheese ball with a creamy center, whereas caprese is the simple Italian salad that can be made with either burrata or fresh mozzarella.

What is the difference between burrata and mozzarella?

Burrata and mozzarella are both creamy, white, semi-soft Italian cheeses very similar in appearance. However, burrata is made with an outer layer of fresh mozzarella and filled with soft, stringy curd and cream known as stracciatella (the cheese, not the gelato). As a result, it has a super creamy texture and taste. Mozzarella is made from cow or water buffalo milk that is firm and bouncy.

How to cut burrata?

Instead of slicing it with a knife (as you would with mozzarella cheese), try breaking it using your clean hands. I usually like to break it into chunks, revealing all the creamy bits, and place it over the tomatoes.

How do you eat burrata?

Burrata is typically first sliced with a knife (or torn with clean hands) to reveal its creamy soft center, drizzled with olive oil and flakey sea salt, then eaten just as is with a fork, summer produce, or toasted bread.

Other Tomato Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

Whether you simply love the combination of tomato, basil, and burrata, or need some delicious ideas to use up your summer tomatoes, I have plenty of recipes I know you’ll love. Below are a few that I make over and over again during the peak tomato season:

  • My Caprese Chicken Sandwich is an open-faced sandwich that’s a wonderful weeknight recipe, with the same classic flavor profile as burrata caprese. It’s a fantastic summer dinner idea.
  • For a quick and easy weeknight dinner, my Pizza Caprese celebrates the flavors of the classic Italian recipe by turning it into a pizza that’s especially great when serving kids.
  • If you want to travel down to the South Mediterranean, try my Piyaz – Turkish Tomato White Bean Salad for another tomato salad recipe that’s a bit different but just as delicious.
  • Try my quick Tomato Cucumber Mozzarella Salad for a simple summer side that you can make in less than 15 minutes.
Burrata Caprese placed on a plate from the top view.
Print

Burrata Caprese Recipe

Put your fresh summer tomatoes to good use with this Burrata Caprese recipe that you can make in 10 minutes.This easy summer salad combines the classic Italian flavors we all love, but uses Burrata instead of mozzarella cheese.
Course Salad
Cuisine Italian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 93kcal

Ingredients

  • 4-5 large tomatoes
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt or flaky sea salt
  • 2 balls burrata cheese 8 ounces in total
  • ¼ cup fresh basil leaves torn
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil plus more for finishing
  • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar or balsamic glaze

Instructions

  • Slice tomatoes into ⅓-inch thick slices. Arrange them on a serving platter. Sprinkle tomato slices with ½ teaspoon salt.
  • Arrange burrata balls in the middle or gently break them with a sharp pairing knife and scatter the chunks over the sliced tomatoes.
  • Sprinkle everything with the rest of the salt and freshly ground black pepper. Drizzle with olive oil and balsamic vinegar.
  • Garnish it with basil leaves. Serve!

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 4 generously. I usually serve one ball of burrata and two medium-sized tomatoes for 2 people. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply this recipe using this ratio.
  • Tomatoes: While we use heirloom tomatoes in the recipe, you can use any type of tomatoes you have on hand. Cherry tomatoes, vine-ripened tomatoes and even roasted tomatoes would work in this recipe.
  • You can serve burrata as a whole or gently break it to reveal the creamy center. This way, your guests can easily serve themselves.
  • Storage: Leftover burrata caprese will keep for 2-3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. However, keep in mind the buratta’s cream will solidify and lose its viscosity over time, so it will not be as creamy on days two and three.

Nutrition

Calories: 93kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 0.4mg | Sodium: 444mg | Potassium: 307mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1108IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 21mg | Iron: 0.5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/feed/ 2
Balsamic Chicken Marinade https://foolproofliving.com/balsamic-chicken-marinade/ https://foolproofliving.com/balsamic-chicken-marinade/#comments Wed, 04 Jun 2025 21:44:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81713 Whether you’re cooking on the grill, in the oven, or on the stovetop, this versatile marinade transforms everyday chicken breasts…]]>

Whether you’re cooking on the grill, in the oven, or on the stovetop, this versatile marinade transforms everyday chicken breasts (or thighs) into a flavorful, crowd-pleasing meal. Plus, it’s easy to make ahead, perfect for meal prep, and freezer-friendly, making it ideal for busy weeknights or laid-back weekend BBQs.

Key Ingredients for Balsamic Marinade for Chicken

You can find the full list of ingredients for this balsamic vinegar chicken marinade in the recipe card. Below are a few helpful notes to help you make it your own.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Balsamic vinegar: When choosing a balsamic vinegar, follow your taste buds and your budget. 

You can use a traditional, aged balsamic from Modena for deeper sweetness and complexity, or a more affordable condiment-grade balsamic vinegar. Both will work beautifully to add that sweet-tangy depth to your chicken.

I would not recommend substituting store-bought balsamic glaze here, as it is already sweet and thickened. As a result, it won’t work the same way in the marinade.

Olive oil: I recommend using a high-quality extra-virgin olive oil here. Its smooth flavor perfectly balances the tangy balsamic vinegar and creamy Dijon mustard, helping the marinade coat the chicken evenly and soak up all those delicious flavors.

Sweetener: While I used honey, other liquid sweeteners such as maple syrup and agave can also be used. If you prefer to use brown sugar instead, be sure to stir it thoroughly so that no grainy sugar particles are left behind.

Garlic: I find that fresh garlic cloves make this recipe shine, but for a milder flavor, you can use ½ teaspoon garlic powder (equivalent to 2 cloves of fresh garlic).

Fresh Herbs: I think chopped fresh thyme pairs beautifully with the tangy-sweet flavors in this balsamic vinaigrette marinade, but if you don’t have fresh thyme, use half the amount of dried thyme instead. 

Alternatively, a robust Italian seasoning blend or other fresh (or dried herbs) like rosemary and oregano would also work well in this recipe.

Chicken: While I used skinless and boneless chicken breasts, you can also use skinless and boneless chicken thighs. 

How To Make Balsamic Chicken Marinade?

Making this balsamic vinegar marinade for chicken is easy and quick (in fact, the base is very similar to my versatile Lemon Balsamic Salad Dressing). Here are the steps:

A collage of images showing how to make balsamic marinade for chicken.

Step 1 – Mix the Ingredients: Use a container large enough to comfortably hold two pounds of chicken, ideally one with a tight-fitting lid. 

Place the balsamic vinegar, olive oil, honey, Dijon mustard, minced garlic, thyme, salt, and pepper in the container and whisk until thoroughly combined.

Alternatively, you can use a heavy-duty resealable bag, such as a Ziplock bag (for easy cleanup), and pour marinade over the meat. This is especially ideal if you are making it in larger quantities.

Step 2 – Add the chicken: Place the chicken in the marinade, making sure each piece is fully coated. Cover tightly with the lid and refrigerate.

Chicken marinating in balsamic marinade from the top view.

Step 3 – Let time do the rest: Marinate the chicken in the fridge for at least 30 minutes or, if you have the time, overnight for maximum flavor.

How To Cook Balsamic Marinated Chicken?

What makes this balsamic vinegar-marinated chicken so versatile is that you can cook it in any way you like. During the summer months, I love to fire up the grill, while in cooler weather, I let the oven do the heavy lifting. And when I’m short on time, cooking them quickly on the stovetop makes for an easy and delicious lunch. Here’s how you can do it:

Balsamic marinated chicken breasts on the grill.

On The Grill:

This is by far my favorite way to cook chicken marinated in balsamic vinegar—the high heat seals in the juices and creates those beautiful charred grill marks. Here’s how I do it:

Step 1 – Prepare the grill: Preheat your grill to medium-high heat (about 425–450°F). Clean the grill grates to ensure there’s no residue from previous grilling sessions. Use a pad of oiled paper towels to thoroughly oil the grates to prevent the chicken from sticking.

Step 2 – Remove the chicken: Take the chicken out of the marinade, letting any excess drip off. This is an important step, as too much marinade can cause flare-ups on the grill.

Step 3 – Grill: Place the chicken breasts on the hot grill and close the lid. Grill for about 6 to 8 minutes per side. A good way to tell when it is time to flip is to gently lift the chicken. If it releases easily from the grill, it is ready to flip. If it is sticking, give it another minute or two. It will release naturally once it is properly seared. 

Please note that the timing may vary depending on the thickness of your chicken. Check for doneness by inserting a digital thermometer in the thickest part of the chicken—it should read 165°F.

Step 4 – Rest & Serve: Loosely tent the grilled balsamic-marinated chicken with foil and let it rest for 5–7 minutes, allowing the juices to redistribute before serving.

Balsamic marinated grilled chicken on a plate from the top view.

In The Oven:

When I’m after a more hands-off approach, I let the oven do most of the work for me. Below are the steps:

Step 1 – Preheat the oven: My go-to oven temperature for baking chicken is 425°F (218 °C). I find that any lower, and it takes longer; plus, caramelization happens better at this hotter temperature.

Grab a baking sheet and line it with parchment paper. This helps with cleanup later, but if you prefer a more caramelized, slightly sticky exterior, you can skip using it.

Step 2 – Arrange: Place the chicken breasts on the sheet pan. Just like with the grilling method, it is important to let any excess marinade drip off first. Otherwise, it will steam instead of roast, and you will miss out on that beautiful caramelized crust.

Step 3 – Roast: Let the oven do its magic for 20 to 22 minutes, keeping in mind that the exact timing will depend on the thickness of your chicken pieces. Rotate the pan halfway through for even roasting.

Again, the best way to check for doneness is by inserting a digital thermometer into the thickest part of the chicken and ensuring that it registers 165°F (74°C).

Step 4 – Rest & Serve: Remove from the oven, cover loosely with foil (or parchment paper) and let it rest 5-10 minutes before serving.

On The Stove Top:

I usually cook it on the stove when I am preparing my balsamic marinated chicken for lunch, to serve with a quick salad or rice on the side. Here’s how:

Step 1 – Heat your skillet: Heat 1 tablespoon of oil in a large (10–12 inch) skillet over medium-high heat. 

Pro Tip: It is essential that the skillet is shimmering hot before adding the chicken. A properly heated skillet ensures the chicken sears immediately, creating a flavorful crust and preventing it from sticking to the pan.

Step 2 – Add the chicken: Place the chicken breasts in the pan, making sure to (1) let the excess marinade drip off first and (2) avoid overcrowding the skillet. Giving the chicken enough space helps it sear and brown properly rather than steaming.

Step 3 – Cook: Let the chicken cook for 5 to 7 minutes on each side. Similar to the grilling method, if the chicken releases easily when you try to flip it, it is ready to be turned. If not, give it a few more minutes to develop a nice sear.

Use a digital thermometer to check doneness.

Step 4 – Rest and serve: Transfer the now-cooked chicken to a plate, cover with foil and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before serving.

How To Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

My favorite thing about this balsamic marinade recipe is that you can make a batch in minutes and have it ready to cook at a moment’s notice. 

It also freezes beautifully, making it perfect for those busy days when you need a quick and flavorful meal.

Storage and reheating: The leftover cooked or grilled balsamic-marinated chicken can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. You can reheat it in a low-temp oven (300 degrees F) for 10 minutes or until it is heated through, being careful not to overcook and dry it out.

Freezing: If you prefer to freeze, I recommend freezing the raw chicken in the marinade instead of cooking it first. Simply place the chicken and marinade in a freezer-safe bag or container, removing as much air as possible to help prevent any ice crystals from forming. It will keep well in the freezer for up to 3 months.

Thawing: Remove the frozen chicken and marinade from the freezer and let them thaw in the fridge overnight.

Balsamic marinated chicken served with a salad on the side.

Expert Tips:

While marinating chicken in this balsamic vinegar marinade is a straightforward process, there are a few key points to consider for optimal results.

  • Marinating time: I find that the ideal marinating time is between 30 minutes and 12 hours, maximum. Balsamic vinegar, as an acidic ingredient, helps break down the muscle fibers in the chicken, making it more tender and juicy.
    However, any longer than that and the acidity can start to break down the chicken too much, especially with lean cuts like chicken breasts, leading to a mushy texture.
  • Take the chicken out of the fridge 15-30 minutes before cooking: While it may sound like an extra step, letting the chicken come close to room temperature helps it cook evenly. If you put cold chicken directly into a hot pan, grill, or oven, the outside will start cooking quickly while the inside remains cold.
  • Save some of the marinade: Before adding the chicken, save a few tablespoons of the marinade to use for a light brushing at the end. I especially recommend this when you’re grilling. It adds a beautiful finishing touch, keeping the chicken juicy and glossy all at the same time.
  • Safety First: Discard any marinade that came in contact with raw chicken once you’re done with it. This helps prevent any foodborne illnesses or salmonella contamination.
  • Large Chicken Breasts: If you’re using very large chicken breasts, I recommend cutting them in half lengthwise or pounding them with a meat mallet to an even thickness. This not only shortens the cooking time but also helps them cook more evenly.

FAQs

How long can you marinate chicken in balsamic vinegar?

I recommend marinating the chicken for at least 30 minutes or up to 12 hours in the refrigerator.

Why did my balsamic chicken burn on the grill?

Balsamic marinated chicken can potentially burn if the grill is too hot or if you use too much sugar in the marinade.

Do I need to rinse the marinade off the chicken before grilling?

No, you do not. Just let the excess marinade drip off before cooking.

Pairing Suggestions with Balsamic Chicken

Starches: Pair it with my Seasoned Quinoa for a light meal, or turn it into a feast with Yukon Gold Mashed Potatoes.

Salads: During the summer months, when I need something quick and easy to serve with grilled balsamic chicken, I usually go for my 5 Bean Salad or Greek Cucumber Salad.

Vegetables: If you’re after a low-carb dinner, serve your balsamic marinated chicken with a side of my Garlic and Butter Green Beans or Sauteed Asparagus.

Make it a dinner: Try my Grilled Caprese Chicken, where I use this marinade and then grill the chicken with sliced fresh mozzarella for an easy summer dinner.

Other Chicken Marinade Recipes You Might Like:

If you enjoyed this recipe, I think you might also:

  • Enjoy my Yogurt Chicken Marinade. Similar to vinegar-based marinades, the lactic acid in yogurt gently tenderizes the meat, keeping it just as juicy and flavorful.
  • Like my Mediterranean Chicken Marinade recipe, it embodies the characteristics of the Mediterranean diet with fresh lemon juice, olive oil, and fresh herbs. And you only need 15 minutes of marinating time for the most succulent chicken recipe.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Balsamic chicken breasts sliced on a plate.
Print

Balsamic Chicken Marinade Recipe

This easy balsamic chicken marinade comes together in minutes using simple pantry staples. It’s perfect for grilling, baking, or pan-searing, and it leaves your chicken tender, juicy, and full of rich, tangy-sweet flavor.
Course Chicken
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Resting time 30 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 426kcal

Ingredients

  • ½ cup balsamic vinegar
  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more for cooking and for grill grates
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 2 cloves minced garlic
  • 1 teaspoon chopped fresh thyme or ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 lbs boneless skinless chicken breasts 6-8 oz each / or thighs

Instructions

To Make The Marinade:

  • In a large container with a lid, whisk together ½ cup balsamic vinegar, ¼ cup olive oil, 1 tablespoon honey, 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon chopped thyme, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon black pepper until combined.
    A collage of images showing how to make balsamic chicken marinade.
  • Place the chicken in the container and ensure it is thoroughly coated with the marinade.
  • Cover it with the lid and refrigerate for 30 minutes or overnight.
    Chicken marinating in balsamic marinade.
  • When ready to cook, remove it from the fridge 10-15 minutes before you are prepared to cook.

To Cook on the Grill:

  • Preheat a gas grill to medium-high heat (450°F/232°C). Clean grill grates and brush them with vegetable oil.
  • Remove the chicken from the marinade, letting excess liquid drip off as much as possible, and place on the grill.
  • Grill for 6-8 minutes per side (the timing would change depending on the thickness of your chicken breasts) or until the thickest part of a chicken breast registers 165°F (74°C) when inserted with a meat thermometer.
    Balsamic grilled chicken on the grill from the top view.
  • Transfer the now cooked chicken onto a plate, cover with aluminum foil and let it rest for 5-7 minutes before serving.

To Cook in the Oven:

  • Preheat the oven to 425°F/218°C. Line a sheet pan with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Place the chicken breasts on the sheet pan and bake for 20-22 minutes, or until the internal temperature reaches 165°F / 74°C.
  • Remove from the oven and onto a plate. Cover with aluminum foil and let them rest for 5 minutes before slicing and/or serving.

To Cook on the Stove:

  • Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large skillet (10 or 12-inch cast iron skillet or a skillet grill is ideal) over medium-high heat.
  • When it is simmering hot, place the chicken breasts in the skillet, making sure not to overcrowd the pan.
  • Cook, turning once until they are fully cooked, 12-15 minutes, or until a digital thermometer inserted in the center of a breast registers 165°F /74°C.
  • Remove the chicken breasts from the skillet and onto a plate; cover with aluminum foil and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about ¾ cups of balsamic vinegar chicken marinade, enough for marinating 2 pounds of chicken which is good for 4 servings. The nutritional values listed below are per serving.
  • Let the excess marinade drip off: Regardless of the cooking method you are using, take the time to let the excess marinade drip off before cooking. This is an essential step for achieving perfectly cooked and lightly caramelized balsamic chicken, rather than burned or steamed chicken.
  • Storage and Reheating: Leftover cooked or grilled chicken can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat in a low-heat oven (300°F / 149°C) for 10 minutes or so until it is warmed to your liking.
  • Freezing & Thawing: You can freeze raw chicken in marinade in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight before cooking.

Nutrition

Calories: 426kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 48g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 145mg | Sodium: 866mg | Potassium: 889mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 70IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/balsamic-chicken-marinade/feed/ 2
Mediterranean Chicken Marinade https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-chicken-marinade/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-chicken-marinade/#comments Wed, 04 Jun 2025 21:37:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81740 Inspired by my Turkish roots and my mom’s love for bold, homemade flavors, this marinade is truly foolproof. No more…]]>

Inspired by my Turkish roots and my mom’s love for bold, homemade flavors, this marinade is truly foolproof. No more bottled dressings or long waits needed. Just real, simple ingredients that deliver mouthwatering results with minimal effort. 

Whether you’re firing up the grill, roasting in the oven, or searing on the stovetop, my marinade for Mediterranean chicken guarantees tender, delicious chicken that’s perfect for meal prep or a fast, flavorful dinner.

Key Ingredients – Building Blocks of Flavor

The beauty of this chicken marinade is that it is made with everyday ingredients you likely already have in your pantry. You can find the complete list of ingredients in the recipe card below. Below are some helpful ingredient notes.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Olive Oil: I recommend using extra-virgin olive oil, which is the purest and least processed type of olive oil. Look for a brand that offers fruity flavors with balanced bitterness and a slight peppery finish.

Lemon zest: The zest of a lemon is essential for delivering the distinctive lemony flavors that Mediterranean chicken marinade recipes are known for. Keep in mind that zesting the lemon is much easier before juicing it, so zest first, then juice.

Fresh lemon juice: No bottled supermarket juice here. Take the time to juice fresh lemons as freshness is key to a bright, zesty flavor.

Garlic: For the most potent flavor, I recommend using 3 minced fresh garlic cloves. For a milder garlic flavor, feel free to use garlic powder.

Mustard: I prefer Dijon mustard for its smooth tanginess, which brings the marinade together beautifully. However, grainy mustard can also be a great choice, adding a bit of texture and richness.

Fresh herbs: For the most authentic Mediterranean chicken marinade, I used fresh oregano, chopped just before adding it to the mix. Fresh rosemary, thyme, or even parsley (for a milder flavor) also work well in this recipe. If you’re using dried herbs instead, they’re more concentrated, so use about half the amount of fresh to avoid overpowering the marinade.

Seasoning: While I used basic salt and pepper for seasoning my marinade, you can use your favorite seasoning blends or spices from your cabinet. I particularly like my Mediterranean spice blend, also known as Baharat Spice Mix, for its continuation of Mediterranean flavors.

Chicken: I tested this recipe both with skinless and boneless chicken breasts and thighs, and they both worked beautifully. However, I think this is an all-purpose chicken marinade that would work with any cut of chicken.

How to Make Mediterranean Chicken Marinade?

Making this chicken marinade is quick and easy (in fact, the base is very similar to my versatile Mediterranean Salad Dressing). While the steps are pretty straightforward, there are a few things to keep in mind. Below are the steps to follow:

Steps showing how to make the marinade.

Step 1 – Mix the Ingredients: Grab a large container with a tight-fitting lid (big enough to hold 2 pounds of chicken). 

Combine the olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, minced garlic, Dijon mustard, oregano, and a good pinch of salt and pepper. Whisk until everything is combined.

Alternatively, you can use a heavy-duty resealable ziplock bag, which makes cleanup easy and is especially handy if you’re doubling or tripling the marinade.

Step 2 – Add the chicken: Place the chicken breasts in the marinade, making sure each piece is fully coated. Cover tightly with the lid.

Chicken breasts submerged in the marinade.

Step 3 – Let it rest: Let the chicken marinate on the kitchen counter for 15 to 30 minutes.

Pro Tip: Due to the amount of lemon juice we’re using, marinating for longer can cause the chicken to start “cooking” in the acid, which can result in a slightly rubbery texture and an overpowering lemony flavor once cooked.

How to Cook Mediterranean Marinated Chicken?

In addition to being a quick marinade that only needs 15 minutes, you can cook your Mediterranean marinated chicken any way you like. While grilling is my favorite method for this chicken recipe, I also love roasting it in the oven for a hands-off approach. And when I need a quick sear, I turn to the stovetop. 

Below, you’ll find my tips and how I use each cooking method.

Marinated Mediterranean chicken on the grill.

On The Grill:

This is one of my favorite grilled chicken marinade recipes because as soon as the chicken hits the hot grill, the tangy juices lock in the flavors, and you get those beautiful grill marks. Here’s how I do it:

Step 1 – Heat Up the Grill: Start by preheating your grill to a medium-high heat about 425–450°F (218-232 °C). Give the grates a good scrub to remove any lingering bits from past cooks, then lightly oil them with a paper towel pad dipped in oil. This keeps the chicken from sticking and makes for easy flipping.

Step 2 – Prep the Chicken: Take the marinated Mediterranean chicken out of the marinade, letting any extra drip off. Too much marinade can cause flare-ups or uneven cooking, so this step is worth taking the extra time to do it right.

Step 3 – Grill Away: Place the chicken on the hot grill and close the lid. Grill for 6 to 8 minutes per side. You’ll know it’s ready to flip when it naturally releases from the grill. If it sticks, give it another minute. Patience here pays off! 

Use a digital thermometer to check for doneness; you’re aiming for 165°F (74°C) in the thickest part.

Step 4 – Rest and Enjoy: Once the chicken is grilled, transfer it to a platter, cover it loosely with foil, and let it rest for 5–7 minutes. This brief pause allows the juices to settle back into the meat, ensuring every bite is juicy and full of Mediterranean flavor.

In the Oven:

When I’m in the mood for a more hands-off approach, I let the oven do all the work.

Oven-roasting helps lock in moisture and ensures the meat cooks through gently and evenly, which is something you don’t always get with quicker, high-heat methods.

Step 1 – Preheat the Oven: Heat your oven to 425°F (218°C). This temperature is ideal for roasting chicken because it cooks quickly, helping the chicken stay juicy and flavorful. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper for easy cleanup, or skip the parchment if you prefer a slightly crispier exterior.

Step 2 – Arrange the Chicken: Place the chicken breasts on the sheet pan, making sure to let any excess marinade drip off first. This prevents the chicken from steaming and helps it roast to a golden perfection.

Step 3 – Roast: Bake the chicken for 20 to 22 minutes, rotating the pan halfway through for even cooking. Keep in mind that the exact timing will depend on the thickness of your chicken. Check for doneness with a meat thermometer. It should register 165°F (74°C) when inserted in the thickest part of a chicken breast.

Step 4 – Rest and Serve: Remove the chicken from the oven, cover loosely with foil (or parchment paper), and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before slicing and serving.

Grilled chicken from the top view.

On the Stovetop:

I often turn to the stovetop when I want to get a quick sear for lunch or an easy dinner. 

Step 1 – Heat Your Skillet: In a large skillet (10–12 inch), heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil over medium-high heat. You can also use a cast iron skillet if you prefer.
Pro Tip: Wait until the oil is shimmering hot before adding the chicken—this ensures a flavorful sear and prevents the chicken from sticking.

Step 2 – Add the Chicken: Place the marinated chicken breasts into the pan, shaking off any excess marinade first. Avoid overcrowding the pan to give the chicken space to sear properly.

Step 3 – Cook: Let the chicken cook for about 5 to 7 minutes on each side. If the chicken releases easily when you try to flip it, it’s ready; otherwise, let it cook a bit longer to develop that beautiful crust. Use a digital thermometer to check that the thickest part of the chicken reaches 165°F (74°C).

Step 4 – Rest and Serve: Transfer the cooked chicken to a plate, cover it with foil, and let it rest for 5-10 minutes to allow the juices to redistribute.

Expert Tips for the Best Mediterranean Chicken

While this recipe is straightforward and doesn’t involve any fancy steps, there are a few key points to keep in mind for optimal results. Here are some of the helpful insights I picked up while testing this recipe:

  • Reserve Some Marinade: It’s a good idea to set aside a few tablespoons of the marinade before adding the chicken. I love to use this reserved portion to brush over the grilled or cooked chicken at the end for a glossy finish.
  • Toss the Marinade: After marinating the chicken, discard any leftover marinade. This helps prevent the risk of spreading harmful bacteria, such as Salmonella.
  • Don’t Marinate for Too Long: Through testing, I found that the sweet spot for this lemon and olive oil chicken marinade is 15 to 30 minutes. Marinating longer can cause the chicken to become rubbery, so stick to the recommended time.
  • Cooking Times Vary: The cooking times in the recipe card are based on chicken breasts. If you’re using other cuts, such as chicken thighs, keep in mind that they may take a bit longer to cook. The foolproof way to check doneness is with a digital meat thermometer.
  • Pound the Chicken Breasts: I used chicken breasts that were around 6–8 ounces, which is considered a normal size. If yours are larger or thicker, use a meat mallet to pound them to an even thickness, which ensures even cooking and juicy results.
  • Garnish for Presentation: For an extra-special presentation, serve your Mediterranean chicken with slices of fresh lemon and a sprinkle of fresh herbs.

Storage and Freezing Tips

Storage and reheating: You can store leftover cooked chicken in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat in a low-heat oven (300°F/149 °C) for 5-10 minutes, or until warmed to your liking.

Freezing: While freezing does slow down the effects of the acidic lemon in the marinade, it doesn’t completely stop it. As a result, when the chicken is thawed and cooked, it can end up rubbery and mushy. For that reason, I don’t recommend freezing the raw chicken in the marinade.

What to Serve with Mediterranean Chicken?

What I love most about this recipe is its versatility, transforming your marinated Mediterranean chicken into an impressive feast with endless pairing options to suit any crowd. Here are a few of my favorite ways to round out the meal:

  • Salads: Keep things fresh and light with salads that highlight Mediterranean flavors. My creamy yogurt cucumber salad or Greek salad are both low-carb, crisp, and refreshing recipes that pair perfectly with this chicken. If you’re after a vibrant splash of color, my Red Cabbage and Carrot Slaw adds a satisfying crunch and a pop of color.
  • Pilafs: For a more substantial meal or to incorporate into your weekly meal prep, pair your chicken with Mediterranean classics like my Bulgur Wheat Pilaf or Mediterranean Rice with Vermicelli. These cozy sides bring a warm, hearty balance to the lemony chicken.
  • Pasta: Looking for a comforting plate? Slice your chicken and serve it over or alongside my Garlic Butter Spaghetti or Lemon Ricotta Spinach Pasta for a delicious, easy-to-make dinner.
  • Sauce: Add an extra layer of Mediterranean flavor with classic sauces like my Tzatziki sauce or yoghurt tahini sauce. They’re creamy, cooling, and the perfect finish for this juicy chicken.

FAQs

Can I use this marinade for other proteins?

Yes! This Mediterranean marinade recipe is a great all-purpose option that works beautifully with seafood (like shrimp or salmon) and lamb.

Do I need to pat the chicken dry before marinating?

Patting the chicken dry does help the marinade stick better and more evenly coat the meat, but it will still work well if you skip this step.

Can I use the leftover marinade as a sauce?

No. Since the marinade has come into contact with raw chicken, it’s not safe to use as a sauce. Instead, if you’d like to brush it on the cooked chicken for extra flavor, set aside some marinade before adding the raw chicken.

How can I prevent my chicken from drying out?

Use a digital meat thermometer to make sure you don’t overcook the chicken. Once it reaches an internal temperature of 165°F (74°C), take it off the heat. Also, don’t skip the resting step because letting the chicken rest before slicing helps the juices settle back in, keeping every bite tender and juicy.

Other Chicken Marinade Recipes You Might Also Like

  • If you prefer a yogurt-based marinade that still captures those Mediterranean flavors, try my Yogurt Chicken Marinade. It’s creamy and packed with herbs.
  • For a more robust, vinegar-forward flavor, my Balsamic Vinegar Chicken Marinade is a fantastic option with its sweet and tangy notes.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim

Mediterranean marinated chicken on a plate.
Print

Mediterranean Chicken Marinade Recipe

This Mediterranean Chicken Marinade is a quick 15-minute marinade that infuses chicken with fresh, vibrant flavors. Made with basic ingredients, this foolproof recipe guarantees juicy, flavorful chicken that can be cooked on the grill, in the oven, or on the stovetop.
Course Chicken Recipes
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Marinading Time 15 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 430kcal

Ingredients

  • cup olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • cup lemon juice
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon fresh oregano chopped or 2 tsp dried plus more as garnish
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 lbs chicken breasts boneless & skinless (6-8 oz each) or chicken thighs

Instructions

To make the marinade:

  • In a large bowl, whisk together ⅓ cup olive oil, 1 teaspoon lemon zest, ⅓ cup lemon juice, 3 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard, 1 tablespoon chopped fresh oregano (or 2 teaspoons dried), 1 teaspoon kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon black pepper until fully combined.
    A collage of images showing how to make the marinade.
  • Add the chicken into the bowl, making sure it’s fully coated with the marinade.
    Chicken breasts in the marinade.
  • Cover with the lid and refrigerate for 15 minutes or up to 30 minutes.

To Cook on the Grill:

  • Preheat a gas grill to medium-high heat (about 450°F/232 °C). Clean grill grates and brush lightly with oil.
  • Remove chicken from the marinade, letting excess drip off, and place on the grill.
  • Grill for 6-8 minutes per side, or until a digital thermometer inserted into the thickest part registers 165°F (74°C)
  • Transfer the now-cooked chicken to a plate, cover with aluminum foil, and let rest for 5-7 minutes before serving.
    Grilled Mediterranean chicken from the top view.

To Cook in the Oven:

  • Preheat oven to 425°F/218°C. Line a sheet pan with parchment paper.
  • Place chicken breasts on the prepared sheet pan. Bake for 20-22 minutes, or until a digital thermometer registers 165°F (74°C)
  • Transfer the cooked chicken to a plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and let it rest for 5 minutes before slicing and serving.

To Cook on the Stove:

  • Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large skillet (10- or 12-inch cast-iron skillet or grill pan) over medium-high heat.
  • Once the oil is hot and shimmering, place chicken breasts in the skillet, making sure not to overcrowd the pan. You may have to cook them in batches.
  • Cook, turning once, for 12-15 minutes, or until a digital thermometer inserted into the thickest part of the breast registers 165°F (74°C)
  • Transfer the cooked chicken to a plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and let it rest for 5-10 minutes before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about ⅔ cup of marinade, enough for 2 pounds of chicken breasts, which is ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional information below is calculated per serving.
  • Drip off the excess marinade: Take a moment to let any extra marinade drip off before cooking. This is especially important if you’re grilling to prevent flare-ups.
  • Storage: Cooked marinated chicken can be stored in the fridge for up to 3 days. You can reheat it in a low-heat oven (300°F/ 149 °C) for 5-10 minutes or until it is warmed through.
  • Freezing: I do not recommend freezing raw chicken in this marinade. The acid in the lemon juice will continue to break down the chicken (similar to ceviche), leading to a rubbery texture when cooked.

Nutrition

Calories: 430kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 49g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 145mg | Sodium: 860mg | Potassium: 891mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 93IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-chicken-marinade/feed/ 2
Strawberry Banana Smoothie with Yogurt https://foolproofliving.com/strawberry-banana-yogurt-smoothie/ https://foolproofliving.com/strawberry-banana-yogurt-smoothie/#comments Fri, 23 May 2025 22:12:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=13979 Banana and Strawberry Smoothie Ingredients You’ll need only four basic ingredients to make this banana strawberry smoothie recipe. I have…]]>

Banana and Strawberry Smoothie Ingredients

You’ll need only four basic ingredients to make this banana strawberry smoothie recipe. I have listed all the ingredients in the recipe card below, but below are some helpful notes to make it your own.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Fresh strawberries: When they’re in season, I always go for fresh strawberries. They are naturally sweet, and I never feel the need to add extra sugar. If you’re making this in the off-season, frozen strawberries work too. Just be aware that your smoothie will be thicker, and you might need to add more milk to adjust the consistency.

Banana: Using a frozen banana gives this smoothie a creamy texture and chills it without needing ice. If you only have a fresh banana, that’s fine too. I usually go for a ripe, soft banana since it’s sweeter and helps avoid adding any sweeteners.

Yogurt: Any type of yogurt will work here. I usually use plain or vanilla yogurt that I make from plain yogurt. Plain Greek yogurt is a good option if you like a thicker smoothie, though you may need to add a little extra milk. For a dairy-free or vegan smoothie, plant-based yogurts like cashew or almond yogurt are great. Personally, I like cashew yogurt because it has a more neutral taste that doesn’t overpower the fruit.

Milk: You can use regular or any plant-based/dairy-free milk you have on hand. Almond milk, oat milk, or soy milk are all good choices and blend well with the other ingredients.

Optional Add-Ins

This strawberry banana smoothie recipe is simple and satisfying as is, but it’s also easy to customize. Here are a few optional add-ins you can try to make it your own:

Sweeteners: I find the smoothie sweet enough with just fresh fruit, but if you want a little extra, a drizzle of honey or maple syrup works well. I often use local honey, especially during allergy season.

Protein: If you want to turn this smoothie into a more filling breakfast or post-workout snack, adding protein is a great option. A scoop of your favorite protein powder blends in easily, or you can use a tablespoon of peanut butter (or almond butter) for extra creaminess and a touch of nutty taste.

Superfoods: While optional, adding a spoonful of chia seeds, ground flax seeds, or hemp seeds is an easy way to include a bit more fiber and protein. The good news is that they mix in well and do not change the taste much.

Greens: A small handful of spinach or baby kale blends in well and is an easy way to add more vegetables to your day. The fresh fruit does a great job masking the taste, especially if you’re making this for picky eaters (or trying to sneak in some greens yourself).

Flavor boosters: For an extra layer of warmth and sweetness, a tiny splash of vanilla extract can truly elevate this smoothie. It’s my secret touch that makes it taste a bit more gourmet without any extra effort.

How To Make a Strawberry Banana Smoothie with Yogurt?

Making this smoothie is as simple as it gets. It comes together in just a few minutes, and cleanup is minimal—perfect for busy mornings or a quick afternoon pick-me-up.

Grab your blender: If you have a high-powered blender like a Vitamix, this is a great time to use it. That said, a standard blender will work just fine for this banana and strawberry smoothie.

A collage of images showing how to make banana strawberry smoothie recipe.

Add ingredients: For best results, start with the softer ingredients. Add your liquids and softer ingredients, meaning your yogurt, milk, and fresh strawberries (and of course any of the optional add-ins, if using). Then top it with the frozen banana. This layering helps the blades move freely without getting stuck and blend everything more easily. This is especially helpful if you do not have a high-powered blender because “the vortex” that the softer ingredients create helps break the fruit more efficiently without overworking your blender.

Blend: Start on a low speed to help break down the fruit gradually and avoid splashes, then increase to high and blend until everything is thoroughly combined and smooth to your liking. If you like your smoothie thinner, add a splash more milk and blend again. 

Taste and adjust: Give it a quick taste. If you want more strawberry or banana flavor, feel free to toss in a little extra and blend again. Smoothies are wonderfully flexible, so make it your own according to your taste.

Strawberry banana smoothie in a glass garnished with a strawberry.

Helpful Tips

Using ice: I avoid using ice in my smoothies to prevent diluting the rich fresh fruit flavors. That said, if you’re using fresh bananas, a small amount of ice can help chill the smoothie without changing its consistency too much.

Consistency and texture: This is where you have so much creative control. If you prefer your smoothie thick and creamy, blend less or add a bit more fruit. For a thinner, smoother texture, just add more milk or yogurt.

Quick blender clean up: This strawberry banana smoothie takes just 5 minutes to make, but let’s be honest, cleaning the blender often takes longer. Here’s my go-to trick: fill the empty blender with warm water and a drop of dish soap, blend for about 30 seconds, then rinse. That’s it. No scrubbing needed!

FAQs

How do you freeze bananas to make this smoothie?

Peel and slice a ripe banana and place the slices on a sheet pan lined with parchment paper in a single layer. Place in the freezer for at least 3 hours or overnight.

Can I use a fresh banana instead of frozen?

Yes, you can. However, keep in mind that using frozen bananas make the smoothie creamy without using ice. If using fresh, feel free to use a handful of ice to make it cold.

How can I make my smoothie thicker or thinner?

Add more fruit to make it thicker or more liquid to make it thinner.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Smoothie Recipes:

It is no secret that smoothies are wonderful when you need a quick breakfast or snack. Over the years I have shared many smoothie recipes. Below are a few of my favorites. If you enjoyed this strawberry banana smoothie you might also like them.

  • My go-to green smoothie 👉🏻 This Pineapple and Kale Smoothie is a green powerhouse. Similar to this strawberry banana recipe it is made without any added sugar.
  • Favorite turmeric smoothie 👉🏻 I make this Turmeric Ginger Smoothie made with carrots, fresh ginger and fresh turmeric is sunshine in a glass.
Person serving a strawberry smoothie in a glass.
Print

Strawberry Banana Smoothie with Yogurt Recipe

A quick and easy strawberry banana smoothie made with yogurt, milk, and no added sugar. Perfect for breakfast or a refreshing afternoon snack. Ready in just 5 minutes!
Course Smoothie
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 173kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups fresh strawberries hulled and cut in half – 275 g
  • ½ cup plain yogurt or vanilla yogurt or plant based yogurt
  • ½ cup milk regular or plant-based milk
  • 1 frozen banana sliced 125 g.

Optional Add ins:

  • 1 tablespoon chia seeds
  • 1 tablespoon hemp seeds
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract

Instructions

  • Place strawberries, yogurt, milk, and frozen banana slices in a blender.
  • Start blending at low speed and then up the speed and blend until smooth.
  • Serve right away.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about ~ 2 cups of smoothie, ideal for 2 adult servings. The nutritional values below do not include calories from optional add-ins.
  • Storage: Place leftovers in an airtight container or jar and keep in the fridge for up to 2 days. Be sure to shake well before serving.
  • Freezing: For longer storage, you can freeze it in a freezer-safe container or popsicle molds for up to 1 month.

Nutrition

Calories: 173kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 53mg | Potassium: 618mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 20g | Vitamin A: 215IU | Vitamin C: 90mg | Calcium: 175mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/strawberry-banana-yogurt-smoothie/feed/ 6
Red Cabbage Slaw https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/ https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/#comments Wed, 30 Apr 2025 14:37:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81303 How to Make Red Cabbage Slaw? This recipe comes together in just a few steps with simple ingredients you probably…]]>

What You Need to Know in a Nutshell?

Before you dive in, here are a few quick tips that will help you make the best red cabbage slaw every time:

Slice Thinly for Best Texture: A mandolin is great for getting ultra-thin, even slices, but a sharp knife works just as well. The key is to slice the cabbage as evenly as possible to keep the slaw light, crisp, and not bulky.

Make It Ahead: This simple slaw stores beautifully in the fridge if you prefer to make it ahead. In fact, it gets even better as it sits and the flavors meld together — ideal for meal prep!

No mayo dressing: Made with a light, tangy vinegar dressing instead of mayo, this purple cabbage slaw recipe is naturally vegan. It’s a great option if you’re looking for a coleslaw that’s a little lighter but still delivers on texture and taste.

How to Make Red Cabbage Slaw?

This recipe comes together in just a few steps with simple ingredients you probably already have on hand, and once everything’s sliced and tossed, you’re ready to go. Here’s how to make it:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Step 1 Gather Your Ingredients: For a full list and measurements, check out the recipe card below. Here’s a few ingredient substitution ideas:

  • Make It Creamy: I opted for a vinegar-based dressing to keep it light, but if you prefer your red cabbage coleslaw with mayonnaise, this classic coleslaw dressing will give you that creamy texture and flavor you’re after.
  • Onion: I like the milder bite of green onions here, but thinly sliced red onions work just as well if you want a bit more punch.
  • Fresh Herbs: A handful of parsley brightens up the slaw and adds a pop of green, but feel free to use what you have — fresh cilantro, dill, or even fresh mint would all be delicious.
  • Carrots: I add carrots for extra crunch and a pop of color, but you can definitely leave them out if you prefer a simpler slaw.
    Steps showing how to make coleslaw with red cabbage.

    Step 2 Prepare the vegetables: Using a mandolin (or a sharp chef’s knife if you prefer), shred the red cabbage into thin, even slices. Grate the carrots using the large holes of a box grater, then thinly slice the green onions and chop the parsley. Add all the ingredients to a large mixing bowl and set it aside.

    Step 3 Mix the Dressing: In a small bowl or mason jar, whisk together the extra virgin olive oil, minced garlic, lemon juice, apple cider vinegar (or red wine vinegar or rice vinegar), honey (or maple syrup or sugar), Dijon mustard, kosher salt, and black pepper until smooth.

      Red cabbage slaw being drizzled with dressing.

      Step 4 Toss It All Together: Drizzle the dressing over the cabbage mixture. Use clean hands (or tongs) to toss everything together, making sure the vegetables are evenly coated.

      Step 5 Chill and Serve: If you have the time, cover the bowl and refrigerate for at least 30 minutes to let the flavors come together. Serve your red cabbage carrot slaw chilled and enjoy.

        Coleslaw with red cabbage and carrots in a bowl.

        What to Serve It With?

        This simple red cabbage slaw is one of those side dishes that pairs well with many meals. Whether you’re making tacos, grilling, or just pulling together a quick weeknight dinner, it brings the perfect pop of color and crunch. Here are some of my favorite ways to serve it:

        • Tacos: I love using this red cabbage slaw for tacos! It’s especially good piled onto brisket tacos for a smoky, hearty bite. It’s also fantastic with flank steak tacos, adding just the right amount of freshness, and honestly, it’s a must with fish tacos. The crunch balances out the tender, flaky fish so well.
        • Grilled Meats: This slaw is a total no-brainer for BBQ season. Serve it alongside grilled harissa chicken for a spicy kick or with grilled turkey tenderloin for a light but satisfying meal. And I am pretty sure no one would complain if you served it with grilled lamb burgers either.
        • Grilled Seafood: For seafood nights, I love pairing it with grilled shrimp, grilled salmon, or grilled mahi mahi. It’s the kind of side that keeps everything feeling light, bright, and colorful. Perfect for summer dinners!
        • Pulled Pork: Try tossing this purple cabbage slaw onto your pulled pork sandwiches for a crunchy twist, or serve it next to a big plate of roasted veggies and grains for a fresh meal.

        Similar Salad Recipes You Might Like:

        It is no secret that coleslaw recipes are some of the most popular summer salads. Here are a few other reader favorites in case you need more inspiration:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Red cabbage and carrot slow in a bowl.
        Print

        Red Cabbage Slaw Recipe

        A vibrant and easy Red Cabbage Slaw made with a light, zesty dressing — no mayo needed! Great for tacos, pulled pork, grilled meats, and fresh summer meals. Vegan and gluten-free.
        Course Vegan side dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Resting time (otpional) 30 minutes
        Total Time 45 minutes
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 98kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Coleslaw

        • 1 head of red cabbage about 1 ½ lbs shredded (~7-8 loosely packed cups)
        • 2 medium carrots peeled and shredded, about ½ lbs (~2 cups)
        • 3 green onions chopped thinly (or 1/2 cup sliced red onion)
        • 3 tablespoons fresh parsley roughly chopped

        For The Dressing

        • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
        • 2 cloves fresh garlic finely minced
        • 1 tablespoon lemon juice or lime juice
        • 3 tablespoons apple cider vinegar or red wine or rice vinegar
        • 1 tablespoon honey or maple syrup, or sugar
        • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        Instructions

        • Place shredded red cabbage (about 7-8 cups), 2 shredded carrots, 3 thinly sliced green onions, and 3 tablespoons of chopped fresh parsley in a large bowl. Set it aside.
          Cabbage slaw made with red cabbage preparation photos.
        • In a small bowl (or mason jar), whisk together 3 tablespoons of extra virgin olive oil, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 1 tablespoon honey (or your preferred sweetener), 1 tablespoon of lemon juice, 3 tablespoons apple cider vinegar, 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and ¼ teaspoon of ground black pepper.
          Person drizzling and mixing purple cabbage slaw with dressing and mixing it.
        • If you have the time, cover and refrigerate for 30 minutes before serving. Serve chilled.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: Red cabbage can range in size. I used a small to medium-sized head (about 1 ½ pounds with the core), which gave me roughly 7 to 8 cups of sliced cabbage. Once you mix it with the shredded carrots (about 2 cups), you’ll have around 10 cups of veggies. After tossing it with the dressing and letting it sit, the slaw wilts slightly and loses about 1½ to 2 cups in volume. Even so, this recipe still makes plenty — enough to comfortably serve 6 to 8 people as a side dish.
        • Taste for Seasoning: Always give your slaw a taste before serving. If it seems like it needs more salt right away, give it a little time to sit first. As the slaw rests, the flavors develop and become more pronounced, so it might balance out perfectly without adding anything extra.
        • Make ahead: You can prep it a day in advance — just toss everything together, cover it, and place it in the fridge. Letting it sit for a few hours (or even overnight) helps the flavors come together.
        • Storing leftovers: Leftovers will keep well in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Just give it a quick toss before serving. If any liquid has settled at the bottom, that’s totally normal — a quick stir will bring it right back to life.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 98kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 339mg | Potassium: 337mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 3890IU | Vitamin C: 64mg | Calcium: 60mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/feed/ 2
        Schug Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/schug/ https://foolproofliving.com/schug/#comments Fri, 25 Apr 2025 16:41:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81215 How to Make Schug Sauce? This shug sauce recipe comes together quickly in a food processor and keeps well in…]]>

        What You Need to Know in a Nutshell?

        • What is Schug? Also known as skhug, zhug, s’hug, zhoug, zoug, schugg, or by its Arabic name sahawiq, schug is actually its Hebrew name. This vibrant and spicy condiment is made from fresh herbs, chili peppers, garlic, and spices. Originating from Yemen, think of it as the Middle Eastern counterpart to chimichurri or salsa verde. It’s a staple in Israeli shawarma and falafel stands, and for us home cooks, it’s perfect for spooning over grain bowls, grilled meats, roasted vegetables, or swirling into hummus and soups.
        • Spice levels are adjustable: Authentic schug brings the heat, but you can dial it down by removing more of the pepper seeds or reducing the number of chilies used. Want it fiery? Keep the seeds.
        • Stores and freezes well: Green schug keeps fresh in the fridge for up to a week in an airtight container. For extended storage, freeze the cubes in ice cube trays, then transfer them to a freezer-safe container. This makes it super easy to grab just what you need, whether it’s a single spoonful or more.
        • Green, Red, and Brown Varieties: While this recipe is for the most common, green schug, made with green chili peppers like jalapeños and serranos, there are also red schug (made with dried red chilies) and brown schug (made with tomatoes).

        How to Make Schug Sauce?

        This shug sauce recipe comes together quickly in a food processor and keeps well in the fridge or freezer. Let’s walk through it step-by-step.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.
        1. Gather your ingredients: You’ll find the complete list of skhug ingredients in the recipe card below. Below are a few helpful notes:
          • Peppers: I like to use a combination of green peppers like jalapenos and serranos—together they add a layered, more complex heat and flavor to the sauce. However, if you only have one type on hand, either pepper will still give you a delicious result.
          • Fresh Herbs: While schug is often called a spicy cilantro sauce, I find that a mix of fresh parsley and cilantro gives it a more balanced, herbaceous flavor. That said, if cilantro isn’t your thing, feel free to use an equal amount of fresh parsley instead.
          • Optional Add-Ins: Depending on the region, some schug recipes include extra spices for added complexity. You can try adding a pinch of ground cardamom, caraway seeds, or a small amount of red pepper flakes if you want to bump up the heat even more.
        A collage of images showing the peppers in a food processor before and after they are processed.
        1. Pulse the peppers: Add the seeded jalapeno and serrano peppers to your food processor. Pulse about 10 times, scraping the sides halfway through to ensure even chopping.
        Green schug sauce in the food processor.
        1. Add the herbs and spices: Toss in the cilantro, parsley, garlic, ground cumin, ground coriander, lemon juice, lemon zest, salt, and pepper. Blend until you get a coarse, pesto-like texture, stopping to scrape the sides as needed.
        Drizzling the shug with oil and showing the texture.
        1. Drizzle in the olive oil: With the processor running, slowly pour in the olive oil. You want the texture to be saucy but still textured.
        2. Taste and adjust: Give your green schug sauce a taste and tweak the salt, lemon juice, or spice to your liking.
        3. Store or freeze: Transfer to an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 5 days. Or freeze in portions using ice cube trays for later use.

        Expert Tips

        • Keep the stems on: No need to pick off all the leaves—both cilantro and parsley stems are tender and full of flavor. They blend right in and actually add to the sauce’s vibrant, herbaceous taste.
        • Texture: Stop blending once you reach a pesto-like texture—overprocessing it can turn it into an herb puree.
        • Using mortar and pestle: While the food processor is a great time-saver, if you’ve got a little extra time and a mortar and pestle, it’s worth trying the traditional way. Start by grinding whole spices, such as cumin and coriander. For even more flavor, you can toast them in a dry skillet for a minute until fragrant before grinding. Then add the garlic, lemon juice, lemon zest, and salt to create a flavorful paste. Next, add the fresh herbs and green chilies, pounding until you reach a chunky paste. Finally, slowly drizzle in the olive oil while mixing to bring everything together into a smooth, spoonable sauce.
        • Wear gloves: Since this Israeli schug is made with hot peppers like jalapeños and serranos, it’s a good idea to wear gloves while handling them, especially if you’re sensitive to spice or tend to touch your face while cooking.
        • Schug replacement: Wondering what to use instead of schug in a recipe? While the flavor profiles are quite different, you can use chimichurri, salsa verde, or even pesto as a substitute in a pinch.
        Zhug sauce in a jar with a spoon on the side.

        Serving Suggestions

        One of the best things about this spicy schug is its versatility. It can totally transform a simple dish into something exciting and flavorful. If you’re wondering where to start, here are a few of my favorite ways to use it— any place you’d typically use a punchy green sauce, schug fits right in.

        • Grain Bowls: I love spooning this Yemenite hot sauce over my Homemade CAVA Bowl—it adds a zesty flavor that ties everything together. It’s even better when paired with other Middle Eastern condiments like Harissa and Tzatziki.
        • Hummus: Whether you’re making a classic batch or going with something a little different, like Roasted Carrot Hummus, the spicy kick and fresh herbs swirled right in add an extra layer of flavor. Serve it with some warm Pita Bread on the side, and you’ve got a snack that everyone will love.
        • Meat Dishes: Schug pairs beautifully with richly seasoned dishes from the Mediterranean and the Middle East. It’s especially good with Shish Tawook, Beef Shawarma, or Grilled Harissa Chicken—adding a fresh, spicy contrast that lifts all those bold flavors.
        • Eggs: A spoonful stirred into your scrambled eggs in the morning or drizzled over poached eggs is a game changer. If you like savory breakfasts, try it on top of my çilbir, also known as Turkish poached eggs with yogurt. It brings just the right amount of heat to balance out the creaminess.

        Other Green Sauces You Might Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this schug sauce and bring the bold flavors of the Middle East to your home, I’d love to hear how it turned out! Leaving a rating and a comment below is a great way to support the site and helps others who are thinking about making it. And if you snap a photo, be sure to tag it on Instagram with #foolproofeats—I’d love to see and share your creations with the Foolproof Living community.

        Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Schug sauce in a jar with a spoon from the top view.
        Print

        Schug Recipe

        This bold and herb-packed green sauce is a staple Middle Eastern condiment with roots in Yemenite cuisine. Made with fresh herbs, chili peppers, and spices, it's perfect for adding a spicy kick to grain bowls, grilled vegetables, and meats, or even hummus.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 2 cups
        Calories 304kcal

        Ingredients

        • 7 jalapeno peppers stems and seeds removed (98 g.)
        • 2 serrano peppers stems and seeds removed (12 g.)
        • 2 cups fresh cilantro with stems and loosely packed
        • 2 cups fresh flat leaf parsley with stems and loosely packed
        • 4 garlic cloves roughly chopped
        • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
        • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
        • 6 tablespoons lemon juice
        • 1 teaspoon lemon zest from one large lemon
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon fresh ground black pepper
        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil

        Instructions

        • Place both the jalapeno and serrano peppers in the bowl of the food processor and pulse 10 times, scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through.
          A collage of images showing the processing of the peppers.
        • Add cilantro, parsley, garlic, cumin, coriander, lemon juice, lemon zest, salt and pepper and process until all ingredients resemble a “chunky” blend. Again, stop and scrape down the sides a few times to ensure that everything is processed evenly.
          A collage of photos showing the sauce being made and a person scraping the side of the food processor.
        • While the food processor is still running, slowly drizzle in the olive oil until you reach your desired consistency. It should (almost) resemble a pesto-like texture.
          Person drizzling the sauce with oil and showing texture.
        • Taste for seasoning and adjust the amount of seasoning, lemon juice, and spices as needed.
        • Refrigerate in an airtight container in the fridge for up to a week (be sure to stir before using it) or spoon it into an ice cube tray and freeze for up to 3 months.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about ~ 2 cups of green schug sauce. The nutrition information below is per cup.
        • Size of the peppers: I used seven medium-sized jalapenos, which were about 3.5 ounces (98g). If yours are smaller or larger, adjust the number of peppers accordingly.
        • Remove the seeds (or not): You can adjust the spice levels by removing or keeping the seeds of the peppers.
        • Olive oil solidifies in the fridge: It’s normal for the olive oil in schug to firm up when chilled. Just let it sit at room temperature for a few minutes before serving, and it will return to its smooth, spoonable consistency.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 304kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Sodium: 1209mg | Potassium: 650mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 6731IU | Vitamin C: 166mg | Calcium: 126mg | Iron: 5mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/schug/feed/ 4
        Mint Chimichurri https://foolproofliving.com/mint-chimichurri/ https://foolproofliving.com/mint-chimichurri/#respond Fri, 07 Mar 2025 16:28:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80649 My chimichurri with mint is also a playful alternative to my other mint sauces—Lamb Mint Sauce and Yogurt Mint Sauce.…]]>

        My chimichurri with mint is also a playful alternative to my other mint sauces—Lamb Mint Sauce and Yogurt Mint Sauce. Serve them with lamb, seafood, steak, and more!

        Mint chimichurri in a jar with a spoonful of it.

        Ingredients and Substitutions

        The fresh, crisp flavor of my mint chimichurri recipe is all thanks to these fresh ingredients that you can find at your local grocer, farmer’s market, or in your garden. 

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Fresh mint leaves: We will be using only the leaves for my mint chimichurri sauce, as I find the stems to be too “woodsy” in flavor to include. 
        • Fresh parsley leaves: While I prefer to use only the leaves of the parsley, if you can chop it all very finely, feel free to include the stems as well. 
        • Red chili pepper: Traditional chimichurri sauce uses red chili peppers, but you’re welcome to swap them out with ¼ teaspoon of red pepper flakes, if that’s what you have available. Or, if you’d like to up the heat, you can also try using serrano or jalapeno peppers instead. 
        • Fresh garlic cloves: Garlic is a big part of the classic recipe, and the fresh cloves add a bold spiciness that you won’t want to skimp on. 
        • Vinegar: In Argentina, chimichurri sauce is always made using red wine vinegar. If you don’t have any on hand, you are welcome to swap in white wine vinegar. Another non-traditional option for the acid in this chimichurri sauce with mint that works, too, is lime juice.
        • Seasonings: With so many fresh herbs, the only additional seasonings needed are Kosher salt and black pepper. 
        • Extra virgin olive oil: I recommend a good extra-virgin olive oil since this isn’t being cooked (unless you end up using it as a marinade), and the flavor will really shine through. 
        • Shallot (optional): The traditional chimichurri sauce does not use shallots, but you can add a finely chopped shallot, especially if you plan on using this as a salad dressing. 

        How to make Mint Chimichurri?

        You can chop the ingredients of this simple sauce by hand, or use a food processor. I personally prefer the rough traditional hand-chop method, but a few quick pulses of the processor do the trick, too. Here are the simple steps to throw it all together:

        Steps showing how to make the recipe.
        1. In a medium-sized bowl, combine your finely chopped fresh mint and parsley leaves, chopped small red chili pepper, minced garlic cloves, red wine vinegar, Kosher salt, ground black pepper, and extra virgin olive oil. 
        2. Mix to combine, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary before serving.

        How To Store and Freeze?

        This is an excellent make-ahead condiment that stores well. Here’s how I do it:

        • Storage: You can store your mint chimichurri in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
        • Freezer: Freezing is a fantastic way to enjoy recipes with mint sauce for months to come. Simply pour your chimichurri sauce into an ice cube tray and freeze it. Once frozen, place the chimichurri cubes in a freezer bag and take out a cube to enjoy whenever needed. 

        Serving Suggestions

        This multi-purpose sauce can be used to add a cool burst of flavor to an array of dishes. Whether it’s enjoyed as a sauce, marinade, condiment, or dressing, these are some of my top choices to pair it with:

        • With Lamb: Mint and lamb are such a classic flavor combination. This mint chimichurri sauce is excellent with any of my lamb recipes but I particularly like serving it as a sauce for my Leg of Lamb and Rack of Lamb.
        • Seafood: Mint sauces like this pair beautifully with seafood dishes. Drizzle a generous spoon over  Grilled Shrimp or Grilled Salmon for a refreshing and bright finish.
        • Roasted Veggies: Savory veggies fresh out of the oven shine with a splash of chimichurri sauce with mint. I love pairing it with my Baked Eggplant and Roasted Asparagus, especially when I serve them with meat dishes.
        • Salad Dressing: Mint chimichurri can perk up your homemade salad dressing for an unexpected taste that perks up any boring salad. Try adding a few tablespoons to either my Lemon Vinaigrette or my Yogurt Salad Dressing.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Other Recipes with Fresh Mint

        If you make your own Mint Chimichurri recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Photography by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Mint chimichurri sauce in a bowl with a spoon.
        Print

        Mint Chimichurri Recipe

        A classic chimichurri with a mint twist, this play on the traditional Argentinean herb sauce comes together in about 5 minutes with everyday ingredients. It complements beautifully with any lamb, seafood, and veggie dishes.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Argentina
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 177kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 cup fresh mint leaves finely chopped
        • 1 cup fresh parsley leaves finely chopped
        • 1 small red chili pepper deseeded and chopped, or ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
        • 3 garlic cloves minced
        • 2 tablespoons red wine vinegar
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • cup extra virgin olive oil

        Instructions

        • Place 1 cup of finely chopped fresh mint leaves, 1 cup of finely chopped fresh parsley leaves, 1 chopped small red chili pepper, 3 minced garlic cloves, 2 tablespoons red wine vinegar, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper, and ⅓ cup extra virgin olive oil in a medium-sized bowl.
        • Mix to combine, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary before serving.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes ~ 2/3 cups of mint chimichurri sauce that is ideal for 4-6 servings.
        • Using a food processor: While I chopped the herbs by hand, you can certainly use a food processor if you want to make it quicker.
          • Storage: You can store it in an airtight container for up to 4 days. The green color of the chimichurri gets darker as it sits, which is normal.
        • Freezing: Place it in ice cubes and freeze overnight. Store the frozen cubes in an airtight container in individual portions.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 177kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 304mg | Potassium: 161mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 1742IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 53mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mint-chimichurri/feed/ 0
        Pickled Turnips Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-turnips/ https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-turnips/#comments Fri, 24 Jan 2025 17:23:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79897 If you’re a fan of classic Middle Eastern dishes like chicken shawarma, pita wraps, or chicken kabobs, you’ve likely seen…]]>

        If you’re a fan of classic Middle Eastern dishes like chicken shawarma, pita wraps, or chicken kabobs, you’ve likely seen them served with these pink turnip pickles. Their bold and zesty bite makes them the ideal accompaniment to the region’s spicy, rich, and savory dishes, adding texture, color, and a distinctive flavor.

        While they’re a staple in Lebanese cuisine (and therefore mostly referred to as Lebanese Turnip Pickles), they’ve also become widely enjoyed in neighboring countries, finding a place in their cuisines much like other popular Mediterranean condiments like hummus and tzatziki sauce.

        Pink pickled turnips in a glass jar.

        Ingredients and Substitutions

        This Mediterranean pickled turnips recipe uses just a few basic pantry-friendly ingredients you already have. But if you are missing one or two, below is everything you need to know about the ingredients:

        • Hot water: We need hot water to dissolve the salt and sugar. There is no need to boil water; hot tap water works just fine.
        • White distilled vinegar: Use distilled white vinegar for the most natural and authentic taste. However, while it is not traditional, you can use apple cider vinegar for a more fruity and sweet taste or white wine vinegar for a milder, slightly more delicate flavor. 
        • Sugar: A small amount of sugar balances the tanginess of the vinegar with a touch of sweetness. You can use both granulated and cane sugar when making these Arabic pickled turnips.
        • Kosher salt: We used kosher salt since home cooks widely use it daily. However, pickling salt and sea salt can also be used. We do not recommend table salt as it contains iodine, which can produce bitter-tasting pickled pink pickles.
        • Turnips: We used the purple skin white turnips, which are widely available in grocery stores. Peeling is optional, but we recommend cutting them into uniform batons to ensure even pickling. While it is not traditional, Japanese hakurei turnips (aka Tokyo turnips) can also be used in this recipe. They are smaller and have a milder (less bitter) flavor than white radishes.
        • Beet: Any color of beet can be used, but red beets are used for the signature pink color. 
        • Fresh Garlic: While optional, a clove of fresh garlic infuses the brine with a savory flavor. Use a large clove of garlic or two small ones.
        • Bay leaves: A small bay leaf gives the pickling brine an herbal note that enhances the flavor of the turnip pickles, but it is optional.
        • Whole black peppercorns: We added a small amount of black peppercorns to provide a hint of spice and complexity to the overall flavor.
        • Optional add-ins: If preferred, other flavorings, such as a few leaves of fresh herbs (such as dill, parsley, and thyme) and a pinch of red pepper flakes, can be added.

        How to Make Pickled Turnips?

        Pickling turnips at home requires only 10 minutes of hands-on time. The method we are using is usually referred to as “refrigerator pickles,” as we use a quick vinegar-based brine instead of canning using a heat-processing method used in other pickle recipes for a longer shelf life.

        Once it is assembled and the jar is sealed, all that’s left to do is to wait a few days for the most vibrant and flavorful Lebanese pickled turnips. Here are the steps:

        A collage of images showing how to pickle turnips.
        1. Prepare the quick brine: In a large measuring cup, combine the hot water, vinegar, sugar, and kosher salt. Add sugar and salt and whisk until they are completely dissolved.
        2. Layer the vegetables: In a clean 32-ounce glass jar with a wide mouth, start layering the turnips, beets, and garlic. Add a handful of turnips first, followed by a few beet pieces and a garlic clove. Repeat this process until the jar is nearly full.
        3. Add the spices: Add the bay leaf and sprinkle the peppercorns over the top.
        4. Pour the brine: Carefully pour the prepared vinegar mixture over the vegetables, making sure that everything is completely submerged,  but there is still an inch of space left on top.
        Two photos side by side showing Lebanese turnip pickles before and after they are pickled.
        1. Seal and cool: Seal it with the lid and let it cool to room temperature. At this point, you can let it sit on the counter or transfer it to the refrigerator.
        2. Let time do its magic: For the best flavor, let the pickles sit in the fridge for at least three days. However, keep in mind that the magic really happens after five to seven days when the flavors fully develop.

        FAQs

        How to cut turnips for pickling?

        To cut turnips for pickling, start by slicing the top and the bottom. Use a vegetable peeler to peel the turnip. Cut the now-peeled turnip in half and then cut it into ½-inch slices. Stack the slices and cut them into ½-inch wide strips, creating baton-like pieces.

        How long are pickled turnips good for?

        As long as they are kept in the fridge in a tightly sealed jar, they will last for upto 1 month.

        How To Store Pickled Turnips?

        The best way to store pickled turnips is in a tightly sealed jar kept in the refrigerator. They will stay fresh and flavorful for up to a month, making them a convenient condiment you can use any time.

        How To Serve Them?

        These Middle Eastern pickled turnips are a wonderfully versatile condiment that can add a flavorful kick to many dishes. Below are a few serving suggestions:

        • Shawarma: Whether you’re serving a chicken shawarma platter, beef shawarma wrap in pita bread, or falafel wrap, these pickled pink turnips are the ultimate condiment to complement the bold spices and rich flavors of this classic Middle Eastern dish.
        • Rice Bowls: Use these Lebanese pickles as a topping for rice bowls, like my Homemade Cava Bowl or Shawarma Chicken Bowl, for a tangy crunch that pairs beautifully with roasted vegetables, seasoned rice, and your favorite protein.
        • Mezze Platter: Serve them along with other classic Mediterranean condiments like Baba Ganoush, Muhammara, and Hummus.
        • Salads: Top off any of your favorite Mediterranean salads to add a touch of tangy flavor and a satisfying crunch.

        Expert Tips

        While the process of pickling turnips is a relatively straightforward one, we wanted to include a few helpful tips to make sure you’ll succeed on your first try:

        • Wash the root vegetables well: Rinse turnips and beets under cold water to ensure they are dirt-free. While you can pickle them with the skin on, I prefer to peel them before pickling to ensure that the brine penetrates easily and the pickles have a cleaner taste.
        • Slice the vegetables evenly: Make sure the turnips and beets are cut into uniform pieces (about ½-inch batons) so they pickle evenly. Uneven cuts may result in some pieces being softer or crunchier than others.
        • Start with a clean jar: There is no need to sterilize the jar, but we recommend that your jar is thoroughly cleaned and dried before use. If you don’t have a 32-ounce jar, two 16-ounce glass jars also work.
        • Don’t overfill the jar: It is okay to pack the root vegetables tightly, but it is best to leave about an inch of room at the top of the jar. We do want the turnips and the beets to be fully submerged in the liquid, but leaving a small room at the top will allow the brine to circulate properly.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this pink pickled turnips recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Pickled turnips in a jar with some placed on a fork.
        Print

        Pickled Turnips Recipe

        A Middle Eastern staple, pink pickled turnips are a tangy and crunchy condiment served with wraps, sandwiches, grilled meats, and as a part of mezze spreads.
        Course Condiment
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Resting time 5 days
        Total Time 5 days 10 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 44kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 cup hot water (tab water would work)
        • 1 cup white distilled vinegar
        • 1 tablespoon granulated sugar or cane sugar
        • 2 tablespoons kosher salt
        • 1 lb turnips peeled and cut into ½-inch batons
        • 1 red beet small one, peeled and cut into ½-inch batons
        • 1 garlic clove cut in half
        • 1 bay leaf
        • ¼ teaspoon black peppercorns

        Instructions

        • Add 1 cup of hot water, 1 cup of white distilled vinegar, 1 tablespoon sugar, and 2 tablespoons of kosher salt in a large measuring cup. Stir until the sugar is fully dissolved.*
        • In the mason jar, layer the turnips, beets, and garlic evenly: start with a handful of turnips, then a few pieces of beet, followed by a piece of garlic.
        • Repeat the same pattern until the jar is filled, ensuring the ingredients are distributed evenly throughout the jar. Gently push down to ensure they fit into the jar.
        • Add the bay leaf and peppercorns.
        • Pour the prepared vinegar mixture over the vegetables, ensuring everything is submerged but there is still an inch of space left on top.
        • Seal the jar tightly and let it cool to room temperature before storing it in the refrigerator.
        • Refrigerate for at least 3 days before serving to allow the flavors to meld. For best results, wait 5-7 days.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 to 2 1/2 cups of turnip pickles that is ideal for 6 servings as a condiment. The nutrition information below is per serving.
        • * Alternatively, you can place cold water in a small saucepan, add the vinegar, sugar, and salt, and cook, stirring occasionally, until the sugar and salt are fully dissolved.
        • Storage: While the color of the brine turns fully pink after 3 days, we highly recommend waiting at least 5 days for the flavors to develop. Be sure to store it in the fridge once the jar is opened. As long as it is tightly sealed and kept in the refrigerator, these Mediterranean pickled turnips will stay fresh for up to a month.
        • In the fridge or on the counter? We’ve seen versions of this pickled turnip recipe where some home cooks leave the jar on the kitchen counter (or a dark place like the pantry) for a few days before transferring it to the refrigerator, while others keep it in the fridge the entire time. We tried both ways and found that there were no differences in taste.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 44kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.1g | Saturated Fat: 0.02g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 2390mg | Potassium: 195mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 7IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 32mg | Iron: 0.4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-turnips/feed/ 2
        Christmas Fruit Salad https://foolproofliving.com/christmas-fruit-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/christmas-fruit-salad/#respond Mon, 23 Dec 2024 15:15:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79518 Making a fruit salad for Christmas is probably one of the easiest ways to bring a burst of color, freshness,…]]>

        Making a fruit salad for Christmas is probably one of the easiest ways to bring a burst of color, freshness, and flavor to your holiday table with minimal effort. While I focused on red and green fruits to keep it festive, the great thing about this recipe is that you can use virtually any fruits you have on hand.

        Christmas salad with fruit in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients and Substitutions:

        Like any great salad recipe, this fruit Christmas salad has two main components: the dressing and the fruit. To achieve the best flavor and texture, use ripe—but not overripe—fruits. Here’s everything you’ll need:

        For the Dressing:

        The dressing ingredients to make Christmas brunch fruit salad.
        • Maple Syrup: With its rich, caramel-like flavor, maple syrup adds a touch of natural sweetness to the salad. If you prefer, honey makes an excellent substitute.
        • Lemon zest: Be sure to zest the lemon before squeezing it, and whatever you do, do not skip using it, as it enhances the dressing by adding a concentrated burst of citrus flavor and aroma.
        • Lemon Juice: The bright, tangy flavor of lemon juice adds a refreshing tartness to the salad, while its acidity helps prevent the apples and pears from oxidizing and browning. However, you can use other citrus and fruit juices like lime juice, pineapple juice or orange juice.
        • Vanilla Extract
        • Spices: Ground cinnamon and a pinch of nutmeg add warm, spiced notes to the dressing, giving it a cozy, festive flavor perfect for the holiday season. 

        For the Fruit Salad:

        While I am listing a bunch of fruits, feel free to use this as a guide and a place to start to make your own winter fruit salad with whatever fruit you have on hand.

        The fruit used in the recipe in bowls.
        • Apples: I used a combination of green apples (such as Granny Smit) and red apples (Gala or Honeycrisp), but any other type of apple would be lovely.
        • Pear (Red, Anjou, or Bosc): Sweet and juicy pears balance the tartness coming from apples. 
        • Oranges: You can use a combination of navel oranges and mandarin oranges (if you can get your hands on them). I know it is an extra step, but take the time to segment the orange for a clean, membrane-free presentation that ensures each piece is tender, juicy, and easy to eat. Alternatively, you can use clementines as a substitute if you can get your hands on them.
        • Kiwis: I included kiwis for their green color and sweet and tart flavor. 
        • Red or green grapes: When buying grapes for making this Christmas day fruit salad, be sure to choose firm, seedless green or red grapes for the best texture and ease of eating.
        • Pomegranate seeds: Many Christmas recipes with fruit feature pomegranate arils, not just for their sweet-tart flavor but also for their vibrant, jewel-like pop of color they bring to the dish. Here is an easy way to cut pomegranate if you need a refresher.
        • Raspberries: I included raspberries for their vibrant red color and to add a delicate, softer texture that balances the crunch of the other fruits in the salad. Strawberries would be a great substitute if you can’t find raspberries.

        Optional Toppings:

        Many Christmas fruit dishes can end up looking like just a simple pile of fruit in a bowl. While optional, by adding a few thoughtful toppings, you can elevate the presentation and bring in extra pops of color and texture, making the salad as stunning as it is delicious. Try adding:

        • Coconut flakes: If you have the time, toast them to enhance their flavor with a warm, nutty aroma that adds even more depth to the salad.
        • Fresh mint: A few sprigs of fresh mint can add a refreshing aroma and a vibrant pop of green, making your salad look and taste even more festive.

        How To Make Christmas Fruit Salad?

        Yes, there’s a bit of chopping involved, but don’t let that intimidate you—this xmas fruit salad recipe is super simple to put together. It’s quick to assemble, making it a great choice for busy holiday mornings. Here’s how to do it:

        A collage of images showing how to make fruit bowl for Christmas.
        1. Make the Dressing: To keep cleanup simple, prepare the dressing directly in a large bowl. Whisk together the maple syrup, lemon juice, lemon zest, vanilla extract, ground cinnamon, and nutmeg until well combined.
        2. Chop the Fruit: Begin by chopping the apples and pears, then add them to the bowl with the dressing. Coating them in the acidic dressing immediately helps prevent browning. Continue peeling and chopping the rest of the fruit (except raspberries) and place them in the bowl. Give it a toss to ensure all the fruit is evenly distributed and coated with the dressing. If you have the time, chill it for an hour or for upto six hours before serving.
        3. Garnish and serve: Right before serving, top it off with raspberries and garnish with coconut flakes and/or fresh mint, if using. 

        How To Make Ahead, Store and Freeze?

        Once you’ve made this fruit salad for xmas, you won’t want any of it to go to waste. With a bit of planning, you can keep it fresh and delicious for longer. Here’s how:

        • Make ahead: Prepare the salad dressing and store it in a jar in the fridge for up to two days in advance. You can rinse, peel, and cut all the fruits—except the apples and pear—a day ahead. Keep in mind that pre-cut fruit will release some of their juices. When you’re ready to serve, chop the apples and pear, add them to a bowl with the other fruits, and drizzle everything with the dressing. Add the raspberries and serve.
        • Storage: Store leftovers of this holiday fruit bowl in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Keep in mind that the fruits will release their juices over time, but the salad will still taste great. Give it a good toss before serving.
        • Freezing: The leftovers of this Christmas fruit salad can be used to make smoothies. However, I recommend draining the juices (and the dressing) before freezing. Once drained, portion and place the leftover fruit in freezer-safe bags and freeze for upto 3 months.

        Expert Tips:

        • Uniform Cuts: Chop all fruits into similar-sized pieces for even mixing and easy eating. If you have the time, use cookie cutters (affiliate link) to cut apples and pears in fun shapes (like I did in the pictures). This is especially a fun way to make this salad with kids.
        A collage of images showing cutting of the fruit using cookie cutters and the finished dish.
        • Presentation: Use a clear trifle dish or a colorful holiday fruit bowl to show off the salad’s vibrant red and green colors, perfect for a Christmas morning fruit salad centerpiece.
        • Add Raspberries Last: I intentionally added the raspberries at the last minute as their soft texture can easily break.
        • Portion Planning: This recipe yields approximately 8 cups, suitable for a small Christmas dinner, but can be multiplied as needed. 
        • Make it your own: This recipe is a perfect starting point for creating your own signature fruit salad for any holiday! While the citrus-maple dressing is my go-to for Christmas, I love switching things up for other occasions. For Thanksgiving, I’ll often use my honey lime dressing for a bright, zesty twist that complements the autumnal flavors of the season. For Easter, I might add a splash of orange blossom water to the dressing for a festive springtime touch. No matter the holiday, this salad is versatile enough to adapt and impress every time!

        Serving Suggestions:

        This Christmas fruit salad recipe is wonderful when served on its own or as a refreshing side dish, but why not make it extra special for the holidays? Here are a few indulgent serving ideas to take it to the next level:

        You Might Also Like

        If you make this festive fruit salad recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Christmas fruit salad in a bowl.
        Print

        Christmas Fruit Salad Recipe

        Celebrate the holidays with this easy Christmas Fruit Salad recipe. Red and green fruits, drizzled with a citrus-maple dressing, make it a light and refreshing addition to your holiday table.
        Course Dessert
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 15 minutes
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 277kcal

        Ingredients

        For the dressing

        • 2 tablespoons maple syrup or honey
        • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
        • ¼ cup lemon juice freshly squeezed or lime juice
        • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
        • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon
        • Pinch of nutmeg

        For the fruit salad

        • 1 green apple (about 1 ½ cups) peeled, cored and cut into ½ -inch cubes – such as Granny smith apples
        • 1 red apple about 1 ½ cups, peeled, cored and cut into ½ -inch cubes – such as Honey Crisp, Gala or Fuji
        • 1 pear (180g/1 ½ cups) peeled, cored and cut into ½ -inch cubes – such as Red, Anjou or Bosc
        • 2 oranges (140g) peeled and segmented or mandarin oranges
        • 2 kiwis (142g/1 cup) peeled, quartered, and cut into ½- inch cubes
        • 1 cup green grapes 190g cut in half
        • 1 cup pomegranate arils (160g)
        • 6 ounces raspberries (170g)

        Optional Garnish

        • Sprigs of mint optional topping

        Instructions

        • To make the dressing: In a large salad bowl, whisk together the maple syrup, lemon juice, lemon zest, vanilla extract, cinnamon and nutmeg.
        • To make the salad: Add the apple, pear, orange segments, kiwis, grapes and pomegranate arils. Toss to coat thoroughly. Chill for at least an hour or up to 6 hours in the refrigerator.
        • Right before serving, top it off with raspberries and garnish with fresh mint leaves, if using. Serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 8 cups of fruit salad, ideal for 8 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Make ahead: Prepare the salad dressing and store it in a jar in the fridge for up to two days in advance. You can rinse, peel, and cut all the fruits—except the apples and pear—a day ahead. When you’re ready to serve, chop the apples and pear, add them to a bowl with the other fruits, and drizzle everything with the dressing. Add the raspberries and serve.
        • Storage: Store leftovers of this holiday fruit bowl in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. 
        • Freezing: The leftovers of this fruit salad can be used to make smoothies. However, I recommend draining the juices (and the dressing) before freezing. Once drained, portion and place the leftover fruit in freezer-safe bags and freeze for up to 3 months.
        • Uniform Cuts: Chop all fruits into bite-sized pieces for even mixing. If you have the time, use cookie cutters to shape the apples and pears into fun designs (like I did in the pictures). It’s a great way to make the salad more festive and a fun activity to enjoy with kids!
        • Presentation: You can serve this salad in a large salad bowl or transfer it into a trifle dish, if you have one. Alternatively, you can place it in a large platter as well.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 277kcal | Carbohydrates: 57.1g | Protein: 2.8g | Fat: 5.4g | Sodium: 6mg | Potassium: 405mg | Sugar: 40.4g | Calcium: 100mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/christmas-fruit-salad/feed/ 0
        Greek Cucumber Salad https://foolproofliving.com/greek-cucumber-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/greek-cucumber-salad/#comments Tue, 30 Jul 2024 15:36:15 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77332 This Greek cucumber tomato feta salad is the perfect way to enjoy fresh produce on a hot summer day. Bursting…]]>

        This Greek cucumber tomato feta salad is the perfect way to enjoy fresh produce on a hot summer day. Bursting with summer’s bounty while staying traditional, I serve this salad throughout the warm weather season.

        If you are a fan of fresh summer salads, make Tomato Cucumber Caprese Salad, Mediterranean Quinoa Salad with Feta, and Strawberry Spinach Salad.

        Tomato cucumber Greek salad in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients for Greek Tomato Cucumber Salad

        You will need just a few simple ingredients to make this Greek tomato and cucumber salad with feta. Feel free to experiment with substitutions and tips provided to suit your taste and what you have on hand. Below is what you’ll need:

        The dressing Ingredients:

        • Olive oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for a buttery, fruity and smooth flavor.
        • Lemon juice: Fresh lemon juice makes a light, bright dressing. If you prefer more acidity, you can also use red wine vinegar.
        • Garlic: Fresh garlic gives us an extra punchy bite. If you do not have any fresh garlic cloves on hand, swap them out for ¼ – ½ teaspoon garlic powder.
        • Oregano: Fresh oregano is deliciously aromatic and makes you feel like you’re on the cobblestone streets of the Mediterranean. If you grow oregano in your backyard, this is a great use for it. If you prefer a mild oregano taste, use half the amount of dried oregano.
        • Seasonings: An easy and simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper enhances those fresh summer vegetables.
        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

        Salad Ingredients:

        • Fresh Cucumbers: I love Persian cucumbers for their delicate flavor, crunchy texture, and thinner skin. That being said, English cucumbers have fewer seeds and can also be used in this cucumber tomato feta cheese salad recipe. If you can’t find either one, regular cucumbers can also be used.
        • Fresh Tomatoes: This recipe would work with any type of tomato. During the summer months, I usually use cherry tomatoes, grape tomatoes, or colorful heirloom tomatoes. However, other tomatoes, such as vine-ripened or Roma tomatoes, would also work.
        • Onions: Thinly sliced red onion provides color and flavor. If you do not prefer the taste of raw onion, thinly slice one bunch of green onion for a milder onion flavor.
        • Olives: Greek Kalamata olives are a classic when making this Mediterranean cucumber tomato salad, but black olives are a great substitute. If you are not a fan, you can leave them out.
        • Fresh herbs: I kept it simple with fresh parsley, but you can toss in any fresh herb available in your kitchen, including fresh mint, fresh dill, or fresh basil.
        • Crumbled feta cheese: Tangy feta cheese is the crowning glory of this healthy feta salad and it adds a creamy, salty brininess. Fresh feta can be found in the cheese section of the grocery store. If you are not a fan of salads with feta cheese, you can leave it out.

        Optional Add-Ins and Variations

        As it is with any iconic recipe, the authentic Greek Salad everyone seems to love can be customized with various (optional) add-ins and substitutions. Below are a few that I tried and recommend:

        • Dressing: While my Greek cucumber salad dressing is pretty basic, you can take it up a notch by using my Lemon Salad Dressing (with Dijon mustard), Red Wine Vinaigrette, or Lemon Balsamic Dressing.
        • Sweetener: Adding a small amount of sugar helps with balancing out the acidity. I like adding a small amount of honey or maple syrup. If that sounds good to you, make this recipe with my Mediterranean Salad Dressing.
        • Bell pepper: Toss in thinly sliced green or red bell peppers, or roasted red peppers.
        • Capers/Pepperoncini: Toss in a handful of drained and rinsed capers or sliced pepperoncini.
        • Salad greens: While leafy greens are not traditionally added to classic Greek salad, you can certainly pile all the ingredients on top of your favorite salad greens, such as romaine lettuce, mixed greens, or baby spinach.

        How to Make Greek Cucumber Salad?

        I love making this Greek cucumber tomato feta salad because all it takes is a quick whisk of the easy homemade Greek salad dressing and a few minutes of chopping the fresh veggies. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

        A collage of images showing how to make the tomato cucumber Greek salad recipe.
        1. Make the salad dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together olive oil, lemon juice (or vinegar), garlic, oregano, salt, and pepper until combined. Alternatively, you can place everything in a mason jar and shake vigorously.
        2. Assemble salad ingredients: In a large mixing bowl, place sliced cucumbers, tomatoes, red onion, olives, parsley, and crumbled feta cheese.
        3. Toss: Drizzle it with the dressing and gently toss to combine.
        4. Serve: Enjoy immediately or cover and store in the fridge until ready to serve.

        Make Ahead and Storage Instructions

        This tomato cuke feta salad is great for making ahead as long as you store the ingredients properly. Prep the ingredients a couple of hours (or up to a day) ahead of time to maintain the integrity of the vegetables. Here’s how I do it:

        • Make Ahead: Dice the vegetables into bite-sized pieces, then store them separately in an airtight container in the fridge. Crumble or cube the feta and store it in a separate container in the refrigerator. Assemble the dressing and keep it refrigerated in a mason jar. When ready to serve, assemble the prepared veggies and cheese, give the dressing a good shake, toss, and enjoy.
        • Storage: Leftover dressed cucumber Greek salad can be stored for 2-3 days in an airtight container in the refrigerator.

        What to Serve with this Cucumber Tomato Greek Salad?

        This is a great side dish to bring to all your summer barbecues, yet equally delicious to enjoy at home as a main course with grilled protein for a full meal. Some of my favorite ways to serve this cucumber tomato and feta salad include:

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        While this recipe is pretty straightforward and easy, I’d like to point out a few helpful tips for the best results on your first try:

        • Cut vegetables roughly the same size: Slicing and dicing the vegetables about the same size ensures you get each one of the vegetables in every bite.
        • Rest for 15 minutes: For the best flavor, let the cucumber and tomato salad rest for 15 minutes before enjoying it to allow the ingredients to meld together.
        • Pay attention to feta cheese and salt: Different brands of feta cheese will be saltier than others. I like to make the dressing, add the feta, toss it all together, then taste and add any additional salt, if necessary.
        • Tomatoes and cucumbers will release their juices: The water from the fresh tomatoes and cucumbers will naturally release when you add the dressing. If you prefer, you can serve the salad with a slotted spoon to hold back the excess water.

        FAQs

        What is the dressing made of in a traditional Greek salad?

        The traditional Greek salad dressing is made with good-quality extra virgin olive oil, lemon juice (or red wine vinegar), fresh garlic, fresh oregano, salt, and black pepper.

        What is the difference between Greek salad and Italian salad?

        Greek salad focuses on simplicity, using fresh vegetables, a simple dressing, salty feta cheese, and olives. Italian salad is more herbaceous and savory, thanks to a wider variety of vegetables, a more complex dressing, and different cheese options.

        Similar Salad Recipes You Might Like:

        If you make this Easy Greek Cucumber Salad recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Greek cucumber tomato salad in a bowl with serving spoons on the side.
        Print

        Greek Cucumber Salad Recipe

        This vibrant Greek Cucumber salad recipe combines crunchy cucumbers, juicy tomatoes, and creamy feta cheese with a zesty dressing, perfect as a refreshing side or light meal.
        Course Salad, Side Dish – Salad
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 15 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 311kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Dressing:

        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice or red wine vinegar
        • 1 clove garlic minced or pressed
        • 1 teaspoon fresh oregano or ½ teaspoon dried oregano
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        For The Salad:

        • 6 Persian cucumbers peeled and diced or 1 English cucumber
        • 3 cups cherry tomatoes cut in half or 4-5 Roma tomatoes – 15 oz.
        • ¼ cup sliced red onion thinly sliced
        • 1 cup Kalamata olives pitted and sliced
        • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped
        • 1 cup feta cheese crumbled

        Instructions

        • To make the salad dressing, whisk together olive oil, lemon juice (or vinegar), garlic, oregano, salt, and pepper in a small bowl until well combined. Alternatively, you can put everything in a mason jar and shake vigorously.
        • Place cucumbers, tomatoes, red onion, olives, parsley, and feta cheese in a large bowl.
        • Drizzle it with the dressing and give it a gentle toss to combine.
        • Serve right away or store in the fridge until ready to serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe (depending on the size of your vegetables) makes about 6-7 cups of cucumber and tomato salad, which is ideal for four servings. The nutritional information below is per serving.
        • Adding Salt: Be sure to taste your feta cheese before adding more salt to the recipe. Some brands tend to be saltier than others, so it is best to give it a taste.
        • Storage: Leftovers can be kept in an airtight container for up to 2 days. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 311kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Cholesterol: 33mg | Sodium: 1553mg | Potassium: 463mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1252IU | Vitamin C: 38mg | Calcium: 247mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/greek-cucumber-salad/feed/ 1
        Mediterranean Salad Dressing https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-salad-dressing/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-salad-dressing/#comments Tue, 30 Jul 2024 15:30:32 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77297 If you are a fan of Mediterranean salad dressings like my Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette and Yogurt Salad Dressing, you will…]]>

        If you are a fan of Mediterranean salad dressings like my Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette and Yogurt Salad Dressing, you will love this Mediterranean dressing recipe! It is similar to a traditional Greek salad dressing (known as ladolemono) but with a touch of inspiration from my Turkish roots. This homemade dressing is also a fantastic alternative to store-bought salad dressings and will surely be a big hit with the whole family.

        Mediterranean vinaigrette in a glass jar with a spoon.

        Ingredients

        This recipe for Mediterranean salad dressing is my secret to making salads that burst with fresh, vibrant flavors and keep everyone coming back for more. It is bright and tangy like most vinaigrettes but enhanced with boldly flavorful ingredients like Dijon mustard and garlic. You’ll need the following ingredients:

        Ingredients for Mediterranean vinaigrette dressing from the top view with text on the image.
        • Fresh lemon juice: I can’t imagine a Mediterranean vinaigrette dressing that doesn’t use freshly squeezed lemon juice. That said, this recipe would also work if you combine half lemon juice and half balsamic vinegar, red wine vinegar, or white wine vinegar.
        • Fresh garlic: A fresh garlic clove will offer the punchiest flavor, but you can substitute ½ teaspoon garlic powder if that is all you have.
        • Dijon mustard: Dijon mustard is the natural emulsifier in this Mediterranean vinaigrette recipe and adds special creaminess. 
        • Honey: While the honey is optional, I’ve found it balances the acidity and makes for a more well-rounded flavor. Real maple syrup is a good substitute.
        • Oregano: Fresh oregano is classic, but I like to use ¼ teaspoon dried oregano when fresh is unavailable. You could also use other fresh herbs, such as fresh mint, fresh parsley, or fresh basil.
        • Seasoning: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper enhances those Mediterranean flavors.
        • Olive oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for the best flavor.

        How to Make Mediterranean Salad Dressing?

        A Mediterranean diet salad dressing is made quick and easy with the help of a small mason jar. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

        A collage images showing how to make the recipe.
        1. Mix ingredients: In a small bowl, add lemon juice, garlic, mustard, honey (if using), oregano, salt and black pepper. Whisk until combined.
        2. Add olive oil: Slowly pour the olive oil in a steady stream while whisking it constantly until creamy and smooth, about 30 seconds.
        3. Taste test: Taste for seasoning and add more salt or lemon juice if necessary.

        How to Store?

        This homemade Mediterranean dressing can be stored in the refrigerator as a healthy essential to have on hand at all times. Simply store it in a mason jar with a tight-fitting lid or in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 1 week.

        Remember that as it sits in the fridge, olive oil and lemon will separate, which is normal. Just be sure to give it a good shake before using it.

        How to Use Mediterranean Dressing in Your Daily Cooking?

        While this dressing is perfect for salads, its versatility goes far beyond that. It’s an excellent way to elevate not only Mediterranean dishes but many other delicious recipes as well. Some of my favorite ways to incorporate this dressing into my daily cooking include:

        • Salad dressing: Think of this as an all-purpose salad dressing you can drizzle on any salad made with fresh ingredients such as veggies, pasta, or even potatoes. It can be used as the dressing component for any of my Summer Salads or drizzled over a simple green salad made with leafy greens, grape tomatoes, crunchy cucumbers, and tangy feta cheese. My favorite side salad, Spring Mix Salad, is a fantastic example. Additionally, its tangy and sweet flavors pair especially well with tomatoes and tomato salads, like my Burrata Caprese Salad, and it elevates pasta salad like my Mediterranean Pasta Salad and grain salads, like Mediterranean Quinoa Salad. The bright lemon flavors give a new meaning to Italian salads, such as the ever-so-popular La Scala Salad.
        • Finishing sauce for roasted or grilled meats: But don’t stop there. Use it as a finishing sauce to brush on any grilled protein, including Grilled Shrimp, Grilled Salmon, or Grilled Harissa Chicken.
        • Marinade for meat and fish: Take this dressing further and use it as a marinade for chicken, beef, lamb, or fish. The acidity from the lemon juice helps tenderize the meat, while the olive oil and fresh herbs add flavor.
        A salad with tomatoes, Kalamata olives, bell peppers and feta being drizzled with lemon olive oil salad dressing.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        Follow these helpful tips to achieve the best results when making this healthy Mediterranean salad dressing. Whether you prefer a well-emulsified dressing or a quick shake-and-go method, these pointers will help you create a flavorful and perfectly balanced dressing every time.

        • Emulsifying: If you are looking for a well-emulsified dressing, whisk together all the ingredients except the olive oil in a small bowl. Then, slowly pour in the olive oil while still whisking constantly. This gradual process helps the oil and vinegar whisk together smoothly.
        • Put it into a jar and shake: While I prefer the emulsifying method, for a fast and easy approach, you can put all the ingredients into a mason jar, seal, and shake vigorously until smooth.
        • Use good quality ingredients: The best dressing for Mediterranean salad will taste even better with high-quality extra-virgin olive oil, honey, and freshly squeezed lemon juice. As with any recipe with minimal ingredients, the quality of the ingredients you use in this lemon olive oil salad dressing matters. Use an extra virgin olive oil that you like, take the time to squeeze your lemon juice, and choose a good-quality honey for the best results.
        • Let it sit: Allow the dressing to sit for 15-30 minutes before using it for the best flavor. This allows the ingredients to marry together.
        • Serve at room temperature: The flavors will be most prominent when served at room temperature. If you have stored the dressing in the fridge, remove it from the refrigerator 5-10 minutes before using it and give it a good shake before serving.
        • Taste for seasoning: Adjust the level of lemon juice, honey, or salt based on your taste. Add some vinegar if you like it more acidic or a bit more salt or honey to tame the acidity.

        Other Mediterranean Diet Salad Dressings You Might Also Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Mediterranean Salad Dressing recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        A batch of my Homemade Mediterranean salad dressing recipe in a jar with a spoon.
        Print

        Mediterranean Salad Dressing Recipe

        Much better than any store-bought dressings, this Mediterranean Salad Dressing with olive oil, lemon juice, and garlic is bursting with fresh, vibrant flavors. Perfect as a salad dressing, marinade, or finishing sauce, it’s heart-healthy and versatile. Try it on salads, grilled veggies, and more!
        Course Salad Dressing
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 252kcal

        Ingredients

        • cup lemon juice or red wine vinegar
        • 1 clove fresh garlic grated or pressed – or ½ teaspoon garlic powder
        • ½ teaspoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon honey or maple syrup (optional)
        • 1 teaspoon fresh oregano finely chopped – or ¼ teaspoon dried oregano
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • ½ cup olive oil

        Instructions

        • In a small bowl, whisk together lemon juice, garlic, mustard, honey (if using), oregano, salt and pepper until combined.
        • Slowly pour the olive oil while whisking it constantly until creamy for 30 seconds.
        • Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
        • Use it immediately or store it in a mason jar in the refrigerator for up to 1 week.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 2/3 cup of vinaigrette, ideal for a salad serving four people, each serving about three tablespoons. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to a week. As it sits, olive oil and lemon will separate, so give it a good shake before using.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 252kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Sodium: 589mg | Potassium: 34mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 11IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 12mg | Iron: 0.4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-salad-dressing/feed/ 6
        Pesto Vinaigrette https://foolproofliving.com/pesto-vinaigrette/ https://foolproofliving.com/pesto-vinaigrette/#comments Wed, 17 Jul 2024 18:46:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=52273 Why Should You Make This Recipe? Basil pesto dressing is a mouthwatering yet simple recipe you can’t get enough of.…]]>

        Why Should You Make This Recipe?

        Basil pesto dressing is a mouthwatering yet simple recipe you can’t get enough of. This vinaigrette is easy, fresh, and pairs well with dozens of delicious dishes. 

        • This 5-minute pesto vinaigrette recipe is a great way to use fresh basil, especially if you’re growing your own fresh herbs. Who can resist natural ingredients?
        • Elevate any dish with ease when you top it with this herby and robust dressing. Whether you use pesto sauce for salad (or pasta salad!), to drizzle on pizza, or even to top grilled meat, your tastebuds will thank you.
        Basil Pesto Salad dressing in a jar

        Ingredients

        For this pesto dressing recipe, you will need:

        • Fresh basil leaves: It goes without saying your basil should be fresh and free of any bruises. I used green basil here, but you can use purple basil if you prefer.
        • Pine nuts: If you have the time, toasting your pine nuts in an empty skillet for 3-4 minutes will produce a rich, earthy vinaigrette.
        • Fresh garlic cloves
        • Acid: White wine vinegar and fresh lemon juice
        • Parmesan cheese
        • Kosher salt and black pepper
        • Extra virgin olive oil
        Sweetgreen pesto vinaigrette ingredients from the top view.

        Substitutions & Variations

        • Nuts: Don’t have any pine nuts on hand? No problem! Swap out your pine nuts for almonds or walnuts for an easy substitution.
        • Vinegar: Give your pesto vinaigrette sweeter, sharper, or more robust undertones by swapping out which vinegar you use. Simply substitute your white wine vinegar with an equal amount of red wine vinegar or balsamic vinegar for a delectable Pesto Balsamic Dressing.
        • Make it a 3-ingredient pesto vinaigrette: You can make this pesto vinaigrette with store-bought or homemade pesto, white wine vinegar, and parmesan cheese. For measurements, I recommend mixing ½ cup prepared pesto with ¼ cup vinegar and ¼ cup parmesan cheese.
        • Copycat Sweetgreen Pesto recipe: If you have ever dined at one of the Sweetgreen restaurant locations, you probably already know about their pesto dressing. It seems like Sweetgreen’s Pesto Vinaigrette recipe is very similar to mine, except that they use red wine vinegar instead of white wine vinegar and add a teaspoon of dDijon mustard to your basic lemon pesto dressing.
        • Make it vegan: To make a vegan version of this delicious recipe, all you need to do is use vegan parmesan. For a homemade substitution, I suggest using this recipe for vegan parmesan or an equal amount of nutritional yeast.
        • Sweetener: A teaspoon of honey or maple syrup can be added to balance out the acidity and earthy flavors coming from the vinegar and fresh basil leaves.

        How to Make Pesto Vinaigrette

        This 5-minute recipe for classic basil pesto dressing is as easy as it is fresh, and it comes together in just three steps.

        a collage of photos showing how to make pesto vinaigrette
        1. Chop/Pulse the ingredients in a food processor: Place all the ingredients except the olive oil (i.e., fresh basil leaves, pine nuts, garlic, vinegar, lemon juice, parmesan cheese, salt, and black pepper) into a food processor (or a blender). Pulse the mixture 4-5 times for a rough chop.
        2. Add the olive oil: Turn on the food processor and, while it runs, drizzle the olive oil through the tube. Stop the machine 1-2 times while mixing to scrape the bowl’s sides. Continue running your food processor until the salad dressing is creamy (approx. 45 seconds).
        3. Season and serve: Taste your pesto salad sauce and add any additional seasoning. Give the mixture one more pulse, and then serve.

        How to Store

        This pesto salad dressing recipe is a delicious addition to any meal. With these simple storage tips, you can keep your leftover vinaigrette fresh for days.

        • Storage: To store lemon pesto vinaigrette, place it in an airtight container (like a mason jar) in the refrigirator. Your dressing will stay fresh for up to 5 days.
        • Freeze: You can freeze this vinaigrette for up to 2 months in an airtight container.
        • Thaw: To thaw your pesto dressing, let it sit on the counter for 2 hours before using.

        Recipe Ideas to Use

        Basil pesto vinaigrette is a delicious dressing that goes with just about anything. This topping adds a sumptuous flavor to countless dishes, from leafy green salads to hearty mains.

        pasta salad in bowl using this basil salad dressing

        Expert Tips

        • Texture: Feel free to adjust the consistency and texture by processing (or blending) longer or shorter. I like it to have a pourable consistency, but you can always process it less if you prefer it to be more like a sauce.
        • Emulsify: You can process everything all at once, but taking the time to drizzle the olive oil over the tube after processing the rest of the ingredients will help the dressing blend well and result in a creamier vinaigrette.
        • Taste for seasoning: Be sure to taste it before serving and adjust the amount of acid and seasoning as needed.

        FAQs

        Pesto vinaigrette dressing is easy enough for even beginner chefs to prepare. Still, you can become an expert saucier in no time with these helpful FAQs!

        What is pesto vinaigrette?

        Pesto vinaigrette is a dressing that combines the classic elements of a pesto recipe (e.g., fresh basil, pine nuts, and parmesan cheese) with vinegar and lemon juice.

        How to turn pesto into salad dressing?

        For an easy pesto vinaigrette salad dressing, mix ½ cup of leftover pesto, ¼ cup of white wine vinegar, and ¼ cup of parmesan cheese. It’s that easy!

        What is in Sweetgreen pesto vinaigrette?

        Sweetgreen pesto vinaigrette is made with apple cider vinegar, fresh basil, garlic, dijon mustard, parmesan cheese, pine nuts, and salt and pepper.

        What is pesto dressing made of?

        This basil pesto salad dressing recipe consists of fresh basil leaves, pine nuts, minced garlic, white wine vinegar, lemon juice, parmesan cheese, salt, pepper, and olive oil.

        Other Homemade Salad Dressing You Might Like:

        If you try this Pesto Vinaigrette recipe or any other one of my homemade salad dressing recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Pesto Vinaigrette in a spoon
        Print

        Pesto Vinaigrette Recipe

        Learn how to make pesto vinaigrette recipe to use in salads, sandwiches, and more. Made with basic pantry staples, this basil salad dressing is easy and quick to make.
        Course Salad Dressing
        Cuisine American/Italian
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 254kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 ½ cups fresh basil leaves loosely packed
        • cup pine nuts or sliced almonds
        • 2 small cloves garlic minced
        • 2 tablespoons white wine vinegar
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
        • 2 tablespoons shredded parmesan cheese
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt*
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • cup extra virgin olive oil

        Instructions

        • Place fresh basil leaves, pine nuts, garlic, vinegar, lemon juice, parmesan cheese, salt, and black pepper into the bowl of a food processor*. Pulse 4-5 times to give them a rough chop.
        • Turn the machine on and while it is running drizzle the olive oil through the tube. Stop and scrape once or twice and continue running the machine until the salad dressing is creamy, 45 seconds or so.
        • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary. Give it one more pulse and serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe yields 2/3 cup pesto salad dressing that is ideal for 4 servings (about 3 tablespoon each.)
        • Amount of salt used: This is one of those recipes that you want to taste as you go. I listed 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt, but please give it a taste before serving to make sure that it is properly seasoned to your taste.
        • Blender: If you do not have a food processor, you can use a blender.
        • Make it a 3-ingredient pesto vinaigrette: You can make this pesto vinaigrette with store-bought pesto. For measurements, I recommend mixing ½ cup prepared pesto with ¼ cup vinegar and ¼ cup parmesan cheese.
        • Pesto Vinaigrette Sweetgreen Recipe: For a version similar to Sweetgreen’s pesto vinaigrette recipe, use red wine vinegar instead of white wine vinegar and add a teaspoon of Dijon mustard.
        • Storage: To store lemon pesto vinaigrette, place it in an airtight container (like a mason jar) in the fridge. Your dressing will stay fresh for up to 5 days.
        • Freeze: You can freeze this vinaigrette for up to 2 months in an airtight container.
        • Thaw: To thaw your pesto dressing, let it sit on the counter for 2 hours before using.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 254kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Cholesterol: 2mg | Sodium: 336mg | Potassium: 121mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 501IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 45mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/pesto-vinaigrette/feed/ 2
        Red Wine Vinaigrette https://foolproofliving.com/red-wine-vinaigrette/ https://foolproofliving.com/red-wine-vinaigrette/#comments Wed, 17 Jul 2024 14:48:29 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77071 If you are ready to skip the store-bought dressings and dive into the homemade salad dressings made from scratch with…]]>

        If you are ready to skip the store-bought dressings and dive into the homemade salad dressings made from scratch with basic pantry staples, you have come to the right place. This red wine vinegar dressing recipe is super versatile and exceptionally delicious. It is the dressing you would find at your favorite Italian restaurant or even bigger chain restaurants like Quiznos or Sweetgreen.

        If you love making homemade dressings as much as we do, be sure to check out our Lemon Vinaigrette and Maple Dijon Dressing.

        Salad dressing with red wine vinegar and olive oil in a jar with a spoon.

        Ingredients

        The secret to a good vinaigrette is to use good-quality ingredients. Most store-bought dressings fall short because they use canola oil and artificial flavors. Conversely, our classic red wine vinaigrette recipe requires six simple ingredients that are easy to find at the grocery store if you don’t already have them in your kitchen. Here’s a look at the ingredient list:

        Ingredients for olive oil red wine vinegar dressing.
        • Red wine vinegar: I have found the best red wine vinegar for salad dressing is one that is not too acidic (with an acidity level of 6-7%), made with natural ingredients without any artificial flavors, and offers a rich and complex flavor with slightly tangy and sweet notes. My favorite red wine vinegar brand is Napa Valley (affiliate link). It is made from organic oak-aged red wines. With that being said, any red wine vinegar that you enjoy using in your cooking would work in this recipe. Feel free to use your favorite brand based on your taste preference and price point.
        • Fresh garlic cloves: Fresh minced garlic provides the best flavor, but you can use ¼ – ½ teaspoon garlic powder instead.
        • Dijon mustard: Dijon mustard is the secret ingredient that helps emulsify the olive oil red wine vinegar dressing. Dijon mustard is a classic, but you can also use regular, country-style, or whole-grain mustard.
        • Honey: Honey adds a touch of natural sweetness, which helps to balance the acidity. Real maple syrup or agave nectar are great vegan options.
        • Oregano: This red wine vinegar vinaigrette recipe can be made with fresh or dried oregano. Some people consider fresh oregano quite potent and sometimes hard to come by. If you feel that way, ¼ teaspoons of dried oregano is a delicious alternative.
        • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper allows the red wine vinegar to shine.
        • Extra-virgin olive oil: For the best flavor in this homemade dressing, use good-quality extra virgin olive oil. 

        Optional Add-In’s & Variations

        While this red wine vinegar salad dressing recipe is delicious as written, you can swap out one or two ingredients or amp up the flavor based on your taste preferences. You could try:

        • Other kinds of vinegar: For a tangy flavor, you can swap a portion of red wine vinegar (perhaps half and half) for some balsamic vinegar. If you prefer the crisp flavors of white wine vinegar, you can substitute it for red wine vinegar. For a lighter (no alcohol) version, you can also use apple cider vinegar.
        • Parmesan cheese: If you like the classic Italian flavors, add ¼ cup of finely grated Parmesan cheese for a delicious, cheesy addition.
        • Fresh herbs: While I think fresh oregano complements this red vinegar salad dressing best, use any fresh herbs in your fridge, including fresh basil, fresh parsley, or fresh chives.
        • Citrus: Add even more tang with fresh lemon juice or orange juice for a bright, citrusy flavor.
        • Additional seasonings: To make it even more Italian, replace the oregano with ¼ – ½ teaspoon Italian seasoning blend.
        • Mayo / Greek yogurt: Add 1-2 tablespoons of mayo or Greek yogurt to make it creamy.

        How to Make Red Wine Vinaigrette?

        Homemade red wine vinaigrette can be made in one of two ways. Either using a bowl and a whisk or shaking it up in a mason jar. Here are the step-by-step instructions for each method:

        Steps showing how to make salad dressing with red wine vinegar.
        1. Whisk ingredients: In a small bowl, whisk together the red wine vinegar, garlic, Dijon mustard, honey, oregano, Kosher salt, and pepper until combined.
        2. Add olive oil: While still whisking, slowly add the olive oil in a steady stream. Continue whisking until slightly thickened, silky, and smooth. Alternatively, you can place all the ingredients in a mason jar, seal it with a tight-fitting lid, and shake vigorously until it is silky smooth.
        3. Taste test: Taste for seasoning, adding more salt or vinegar as needed.

        Ways to Use This Red Wine Vinegar Dressing

        I must admit that a salad dressing made with red wine vinegar and olive oil compliments nearly any kind of salad. Whip up a recipe, and this dressing will make it shine. But because it is so versatile, there are so many different ways you can use this red wine dressing, including:

        • Fresh Greens: Toss it over simple green salads like Spring Mix Salad or a sweet and salty salad combo of baby arugula, sliced red onion, dried cherries, walnuts or pecans, and feta cheese.
        • Vegetable Salads: Use it as the dressing component for Turkish Bean Salad or Greek Cucumber Salad for extra zing and tang.
        • Pasta Salad / Grain Salads: Go for a heartier side dish by tossing this red vinaigrette dressing over pasta salads and grain salads, such as my Quinoa Feta Chickpea Salad or Avocado Quinoa Salad.
        • Roasted or Grilled Vegetables: Drizzle over any cooked veggies to brighten and season them with tangy flavors. Try it on my Grilled Eggplant, Roasted Asparagus, or Air Fryer Green Beans.
        • Marinade for Meat or Tofu: Use it for your favorite protein, such as beef, pork, lamb, chicken, or tofu. Allow it to sit for a few hours in the refrigerator to allow the zippy, tangy flavors to sink in.
        • Brush onto Seafood or Fish: Use it as a fast and flavorful sauce by brushing onto fish filets, grilled shrimp skewers, or scallops before (or after) cooking.
        • Sandwiches and Wraps: Drizzle it on top of any sandwich or wrap for a tangy kick. It’s especially delicious when served on Chicken Caprese Sandwiches or Chicken Pita Wraps (instead of tzatziki).

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        Here are some of my expert tips for the best red wine vinaigrette recipe:

        • Emulsifying: While shaking all the ingredients in a mason jar is a simple approach, achieving a perfectly creamy red wine vinaigrette requires a bit more technique. When using Dijon mustard, it’s best to whisk the vinegar and mustard together first. Then, gradually drizzle in the oil while continuing to whisk constantly. This method allows the natural compounds in the mustard to effectively bind with both the water and oil, stabilizing the emulsion and preventing the dressing from separating.
        • Shake well before using: With that being said, the vinegar and oil will naturally separate as it sits over time, so it is best to give it a good shake or whisk before serving.
        • Serve at room temperature: The flavors and viscosity of the olive oil are best enjoyed at room temperature. If the salad dressing has been in the refrigerator for a while, take it out 5-10 minutes before using it in your recipe.
        • Olive oil red wine vinegar dressing ratio: After testing this recipe multiple times, we found the best ratio of oil to vinegar was 2:1 (½ cup olive oil to ¼ cup vinegar).
        Red wine vinegar oil salad dressing in a jar with a spoon on the side.

        FAQs

        Does red wine vinaigrette have alcohol?

        Yes, it does, but it contains a very tiny amount of alcohol. According to American Vinegar Works, during the production of red wine vinegar, bacteria eat away at the wine to convert it to vinegar, consuming most of the alcohol in the process. However, in the end, a small amount of alcohol might still remain.

        What is the difference between red wine vinaigrette and vinegar?

        Red wine vinaigrette is an emulsified dressing with olive oil, mustard, and additional seasonings like garlic and herbs. On the other hand, red wine vinegar is plain vinegar on its own.

        How long does red wine vinaigrette last in the fridge?

        Our homemade red wine vinegar salad dressing will keep for 1 week in the fridge when stored in an airtight container or mason jar with a tight-fitting lid.

        If you make this red wine vinegar oil salad dressing recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Red wine vinaigrette recipe with a spoon.
        Print

        Red Wine Vinaigrette Recipe

        This is an all-purpose red wine vinaigrette recipe that you can use as a salad dressing, drizzle for roasted or grilled veggies, marinade for meat (or tofu), and more. All you need is 5 minutes and 6 basic ingredients.
        Course Salad Dressing
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 167kcal

        Ingredients

        • ¼ cup red wine vinegar
        • ½ cup olive oil
        • 1 clove garlic grated or pressed
        • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon honey
        • 1 teaspoon fresh oregano finely chopped – I used ¼ teaspoon dried
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon fresh ground black pepper

        Instructions

        • In a small bowl (or a mason jar), whisk the red wine vinegar, garlic, Dijon mustard, honey, oregano, kosher salt, and pepper until combined.
        • While still whisking, slowly add the olive oil and continue whisking until fully incorporated*.
        • Taste for seasoning and adjust as needed before using it in your recipe.

        Notes

        • Yields: This red wine vinaigrette dressing recipe makes ¾ cups and is ideal for six servings, each serving around two tablespoons.
        • Make it in a jar: While I think whisking oil into the red vinegar and mustard mixture produces the most creamy dressing, you can also put everything in a mason jar, cover it tightly with the lid and shake vigorously.
        • Storage: You can store your vinaigrette in a mason jar (or an airtight container) for up to one week. The olive oil will naturally solidify in the refrigerator, so give it a good stir or whisk before serving.
        • Freeze: Freeze the dressing in a freezer-safe container for up to 1 month. Thaw to room temperature on the kitchen counter.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 167kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.1g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 398mg | Potassium: 12mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 6IU | Vitamin C: 0.2mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 0.3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/red-wine-vinaigrette/feed/ 7
        Harissa Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-sauce/#comments Tue, 09 Jul 2024 23:14:50 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76518 In this simple guide, you’ll discover how to make harissa sauce that’s as close to an authentic harissa paste recipe…]]>

        In this simple guide, you’ll discover how to make harissa sauce that’s as close to an authentic harissa paste recipe as possible, in addition to delectable serving suggestions, storage tips, and more.

        Harissa recipes are essential to any spice-lover’s cookbook. If you’re in the mood for a succulent poultry main, my Grilled Harissa Chicken and Harissa Honey Chicken offer a brilliant flavor that will enrich any weekday dinner.

        What is Harissa?

        Harissa is a smooth, spicy condiment that originated in Tunisia. Sometimes referred to as “Tunisian ketchup” or “harissa paste,” this bold, red sauce includes a basic mixture of dried chilis, warm spices, tomato paste, garlic, olive oil, and lemon juice. This mix results in a delicious blend of hot, smoky, and mildly tangy flavors.

        Since its creation, harissa has spread to neighboring countries, like Morocco, Jordan, and Algeria, and it’s now a staple in North African and Middle Eastern cuisine.

        Harissa paste in a jar from the front view.

        Harissa Ingredients

        You only need a handful of ingredients to make this iconic Middle Eastern condiment. Plus, you can even customize your harissa’s main ingredients to ensure your sauce matches any menu.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Dried chilies: I prefer using a mix of guajillo, ancho, and de arbol chilies in this recipe due to their balanced mix of heat and complexity. However, if you’re looking to make a spicy harissa recipe, you can incorporate Mexico chilies that fall higher on the Scoville Scale, or you can make a sweeter harissa sauce by using more New Mexico chilies (a milder variant). For the best harissa, I recommend using 7-8 dried peppers of different kinds. You should be able to find dried chilies at your local grocery store, or you can purchase them online (affiliate link) if desired.
        • Spices: Cumin, coriander, and caraway seeds are essential to giving this condiment its warm, fragrant heat. I prefer using pre-ground spices in this mixture to save time, but you can also grind an equal amount of whole spices with a spice grinder or mortar and pestle.
        • Roasted red peppers: To make homemade harissa paste, you’ll need two whole roasted red peppers. I usually opt for a jarred version (be sure to drain its juices first!), but you can also make homemade roasted red bell peppers for a fresher, smokier taste.
        • Fresh Garlic cloves
        • Seasonings: I found that a simple mix of kosher salt and Spanish paprika was sufficient to give this African chili paste a savory, bright flavor. Smoked paprika—a version of Spanish paprika—will also work if you prefer a more robust smokiness. If desired, you can also add ¼ teaspoon of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes to increase the recipe’s heat level.
        • Tomato paste
        • Lemon juice: I always opt for fresh lemon juice, which has the most vibrant, citrusy flavor. 
        • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: A mild-tasting extra virgin olive oil such as  Costo’s single-origin organic olive oil (affiliate link) would work beautifully in this recipe.
        • Honey (optional): The recipe below does not include honey, but harissa and honey are a wonderful combination that you’ll find in many recipes. If you prefer a sweet harissa, I recommend adding two tablespoons of honey, giving it a taste, and increasing it based on your preference.

        How to Make Harissa Sauce?

        It’s easy to make harissa paste worthy of a North African restaurant in your own kitchen. With my easy step-by-step instructions, you can prepare this condiment in under an hour.

        Steps showing how to make harissa from scratch.
        1. Rehydrate the chilies: Place the dried chiles in a medium-sized bowl, add boiling hot water, and place a weighted bowl on top to keep the chilies submerged. Alternatively, you can cover it with plastic wrap. Let the chilies steep in the water for 30 minutes.
        2. Deseed the chili peppers: Once the chilies rehydrate, remove them from the water and remove their stems and seeds. If you prefer a spicier blend, you can keep some of the seeds in the peppers.
        3. Blend the ingredients for harissa: Place the rehydrated harissa peppers in your food processor bowl (or a blender, depending on what you’re using). Then, add the ground cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, roasted peppers, garlic, kosher salt, Spanish paprika, tomato paste, lemon juice, olive oil, and cayenne pepper. Pulse the mixture until smooth.
        4. Enjoy: Use your harissa chili paste in your desired recipe or store it in an airtight container in the fridge if you plan to use it later.

        How to Store & Freeze?

        Once you make harissa paste, you’ll want to use it every day of the week. These storage tips guarantee easy meal prep and keep this condiment fresh whenever the craving strikes.

        • Storage: To store your harissa sauce, transfer it to an airtight container or jar and store it in the refrigerator for 2-3 weeks. I also recommend pouring a thin layer of olive oil over the top of the sauce before storage to prolong its shelf life, as this layer will help limit exposure to oxygen and bacteria.
        • Freezing: This red harissa recipe can be frozen for up to one month in an airtight, freezer-safe container. For easier portion sizes, pour your sauce into an ice cube tray, freeze until solid, and then transfer the individual cubes into a Ziplock bag.
        • Thawing: To thaw frozen harissa, place it in the fridge overnight or until ready to use.

        How to Use Harissa Paste in Recipes?

        Wondering how to use this spicy harissa sauce in everyday cooking? In this section, you’ll find all my favorite dishes with harissa sauce—sandwich spreads, marinades, salad dressings, and beyond!

        • Marinade: I highly recommend adding this harissa sauce to marinade recipes if you love spicy foods. Try adding a tablespoon (or two) of harissa to my Yogurt Chicken Marinade and Shrimp Marinade to introduce a vibrant heat and depth of flavor that will make your dishes stand out. Also, honey and harissa make a delicious marinade that can be used for chicken or salmon. Want to give it a try? Make my harissa honey chicken and use it in my Copycat CAVA bowls recipe!
        • Soups and stews: Want to add extra complexity and spice to a basic soup recipe? Try using this spicy sauce in place of tomato or chili paste! In particular, I love adding harissa to hearty, full-bodied dishes like Quinoa Stew, Vegan Chili, and Beef Stew.
        • Pasta sauce: If you want to add sumptuous heat to your pasta, harissa is just the thing. For a spicy kick, stir a quarter cup of this condiment into your favorite tomato-based pasta sauce.
        • Spread for sandwiches, pizza, and flatbread: I love using this simple recipe as a harissa spread for easy weekday lunches, like sandwiches and flatbreads. You can even spread it over avocado toast for a delectable balance of rich, piquant flavors.
        • Dip: Add a spoonful of this Mediterranean chili sauce to plain Greek yogurt, and you can spice up any dipping sauce in no time. You can even mix it with Hummus for a creamy, hot classic no one can resist. You can also make it a part of your next mezze platter by serving it with other Middle Eastern dips like my Babaganoush and Muhammara recipe.
        • Roasting vegetables: Because it’s such a flavorful, smooth sauce, hot chili pepper paste is an excellent condiment to drizzle over roasted veggies. I especially love pouring it over a hearty plate of Roasted Butternut Squash or Roasted Eggplant for an extra-bold side.
          Alternatively, you can also spread it over vegetables before roasting like I did in my Roasted Harissa Carrots recipe.
        • Salad Dressing: This harissa hot sauce recipe is a flavorful condiment and a fantastic base for salad dressings. With a few simple ingredients, you can even make a tangy yet hot Harissa Vinaigrette.
        • Grains: Tired of bland grains? You can give a little kick of spice to everything from rice to bulgur to quinoa to couscous when you add harissa to your mix.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        The best way to make homemade harissa is to use these chef-approved pointers. With tips on flavoring, safety, and consistency, this guide will ensure that even beginners can easily make harissa paste.

        • Experiment with different types of dried peppers: Red chili peppers have a wide range in spice levels, with some (especially Mexico chilies) having greater amounts of heat and others (like New Mexico chiles) boasting a milder profile. Therefore, I encourage you to experiment with the blend of chilies to achieve your ideal level of spice.
        • Wear gloves (or wash your hands well): When making this spicy condiment, you must protect yourself from the chilies’ spicy compound, capsaicin. Though flavorful, capsaicin often clings to the skin and can cause a burning sensation when exposed to eyes, airways, and cuts. Wearing gloves is a good idea when working with chili peppers or—if you don’t have any gloves—wash your hands thoroughly afterward.
        • Toast spices: As I mentioned earlier, I used ground spices to save time. However, you can use whole spices and grind them yourself. If you decide to do so, I recommend toasting them in a cast iron skillet for 3-5 minutes before grinding them in a spice grinder or with a mortar and pestle. 
        • Consistency and texture: In its original Tunisian form, harissa has a smooth, condiment-like consistency. However, harissa has since taken on other commercialized forms, like “harissa sauce” (which purportedly has a thinner, sauce-like texture) and “harissa paste” (which is supposed to be thicker and less liquidy). Though these terms technically refer to the same thing, you can still adjust this recipe’s consistency using more or less olive oil, depending on your desired thickness. During our recipe testing, we compared our homemade version to commercial brands (like Trader Joe’s Harissa, NY Shuk, and Mina ) and thought ⅓ to ½ cup of olive oil was a good place to start. 
        • Taste for seasoning: As with any recipe, it’s important to taste your sauce before serving and adjust the seasoning as needed. If your recipe already includes salt, be mindful of this when adding harissa sauce. You may need to reduce the amount of salt in your harissa to prevent over-seasoning your final dish.
        • Gets better the next day: Letting your DIY harissa sauce sit in the fridge overnight is an easy way to let its flavors develop and mix, leading to a much tastier, more robust recipe.
        Store-bought harissa in jars.

        FAQs

        Where is harissa from?

        The origin of harissa lies in Tunisia, though this condiment has since spread to other North African and Middle Eastern countries, such as Morocco, Libya, and Algeria.

        What is a harissa paste substitute?

        If you’re looking for a harissa sauce alternative, I recommend selecting another chili-based sauce, like sriracha, sambal oelek, or chipotle in adobo sauce. These substitutions have similar spicy, aromatic notes, but they also have different flavor profiles. Therefore, when using these substitutions, I’d encourage you to add other spices —like cumin, coriander, and caraway—into your dish to imitate the flavors of harissa. 

        Where can I find harissa paste?

        While making harissa sauce from scratch is superior, you can find this condiment at grocery stores like Trader Joe’s and ALDI—particularly in their “international,” “Mediterranean,” or “ethnic” sections. I like to use brands like NY Shuk and Mina (affiliate link) due to their freshness and depth.

        Is sriracha the same as harissa?

        Though they both boast a similarly smooth, chili-based flavor profile, sriracha isn’t the same as harissa sauce. Sriracha, a Thai chili sauce, is tangier and sweeter, and people often use it in Asian dishes. By contrast, Tunisian harissa boasts a spicier, more concentrated flavor, which many use to enhance the flavor of meat marinades, dips, soups, and more.

        How spicy is harissa?

        Depending on the chilies used, this condiment can range from mild to super-hot. Some versions may be spicier if they use Mexico chilies and spices like cayenne pepper, while others may have a more subtle heat if they use New Mexico chilies. Because of this range, I highly recommend that you make harissa yourself, even starting with homemade harissa powder, so you can adjust the spiciness to your desired level.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Harissa sauce in a jar from the front view.
        Print

        Harissa Sauce Recipe

        Made from a basic mix of fresh ingredients, homemade harissa sauce is a simple recipe that will infuse any dish with spicy, smoky, and subtly tangy flavors. Plus, it not only tastes better but it is also cheaper than its store-bought alternatives.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Mediterranean, Middle Eastern
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 35 minutes
        Total Time 35 minutes
        Servings 1 cup
        Calories 717kcal

        Ingredients

        • 8 dried chilis I used 3 guajillo chili peppers, 3 Ancho chili peppers, and 2 Arbol chili peppers*
        • 1 cup boiling water
        • 1 ¼ teaspoon ground cumin
        • 1 ¼ teaspoon ground coriander
        • 1 teaspoon caraway seeds
        • 2 whole roasted red peppers from jarred – drained
        • 3 garlic cloves
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • 1 teaspoon paprika you can use sweet Spanish paprika or smoked paprika
        • 1 tablespoon tomato paste optional
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
        • cup extra virgin olive oil
        • ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper optional

        Instructions

        • Place the dried chilies in a medium-sized bowl and add the boiling water.
        • Place a weighted bowl* on top to keep the chilies submerged and to rehydrate them. Let them steep for 30 minutes, and then drain.
        • Remove the stems and deseed all the chili peppers. You can remove all of the seeds or keep some for added heat, depending on your preference.
        • Place the chili peppers in the food processor (or blender). Add the ground cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, roasted red pepper, garlic, kosher salt, paprika, tomato paste, lemon juice, olive oil, and cayenne pepper.
        • Pulse until pureed and smooth.
        • Place in an airtight container and refrigerate if not using right away.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 1 cup of harissa. The nutritional values below are for the whole recipe.
        • Dried chilies: Use this recipe as a starting place, but feel free to use different types of dried chilies to make this sauce.
        • Toast spices: I used ground spices to save time. However, you can use whole spices and grind them yourself. If you decide to do so, I recommend toasting an equal amount of whole spice in a cast iron skillet for 3-5 minutes before grinding them in a spice grinder or with a mortar and pestle.
        • Storage: To store your harissa sauce, transfer it to an airtight container or jar and store it in the refrigerator for 2-3 weeks. I also recommend pouring a thin layer of olive oil over the top of the sauce before storage to prolong its shelf life, as this layer will help limit exposure to oxygen and bacteria.
        • Freezing: This red harissa recipe can be frozen for up to one month in an airtight, freezer-safe container. For easier portion sizes, pour your sauce into an ice cube tray, freeze until solid, and then transfer the individual cubes into a Ziplock bag.
        • Thawing: To thaw frozen harissa, place it in the fridge overnight or until ready to use.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 717kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 74g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 53g | Sodium: 2505mg | Potassium: 483mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 2550IU | Vitamin C: 27mg | Calcium: 97mg | Iron: 4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-sauce/feed/ 1
        Harissa Paste from Powder https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-paste-from-powder/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-paste-from-powder/#comments Tue, 09 Jul 2024 22:53:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76561 This simple guide includes everything you need to transform harissa powder into a paste, including how to make it, how…]]>

        This simple guide includes everything you need to transform harissa powder into a paste, including how to make it, how to use it in your daily cooking, how to adjust its spice levels and consistency, and how to select the best ingredients (including storebought powders.)

        Harissa paste made by using harissa powder in a jar.

        With a thick, creamy texture and a bold, spicy flavor, this harissa paste made using harissa powder will surely get you hooked on tons of other harissa recipes. My Harissa Vinaigrette is just the thing to give your salads a delicious kick of heat, while my Harissa Grilled Chicken will be the star of any dinner menu.

        Ingredients You Will Need

        You only need a few key ingredients to turn harissa powder to paste. Below are my go-to’s for making this condiment as robust and flavorful as possible.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Roasted red peppers: To make this recipe, you’ll need two jarred roasted red peppers, with as much juice removed as possible. Since these peppers tend to be milder, they better balance the spicier components of harissa seasoning.
        • Harissa Powder: I prefer making this spice mix from scratch because it gives complete control over its heat levels, as you can select your favorite balance of mild and hot chili peppers. Made with a blend of dried chilis, coriander and cumin seeds, and garlic powder, I find that homemade harissa seasoning is fresher and more flavorful than premade ones. However, if you want to reduce prep time, you can also find different brands at the store. My favorite ones are New York Shuk’s Fiery Harissa or Whole Foods Organic Harissa Seasoning (a slightly milder spice blend). We tested this recipe with both brands and found that it tasted very good.
        • Kosher Salt: I listed only one teaspoon of kosher salt, but you can add more or less depending on the saltiness of your harissa seasoning. You can also use sea salt or table salt based on what you have on hand.
        • Garlic cloves: Because you’ll eventually blend your fresh garlic cloves in a food processor, a rough chop will suffice before adding them to your other ingredients.
        • Tomato paste: This is an optional ingredient, but I enjoy the umami flavors it provides to the recipe.
        • Lemon juice: I recommend using fresh lemon juice in this recipe due to its brighter, more resonant citrus flavors. However, you can use store-bought lemon juice instead if needed.
        • Extra virgin Olive oil: Olive oil is one of the main ingredients in this powder-based harissa paste recipe. Though some recipes might advise using hot water instead, I found that a mild-tasting extra virgin olive oil offers a richer taste and smoother texture.

        How to Make Harissa Paste from Harissa Powder

        It is no secret that harissa paste is a staple ingredient in Tunisian cooking. While you can buy it at the store (or make it from scratch), following my simple, step-by-step instructions will teach you to convert harissa powder to paste in less than ten minutes.

        Steps showing how to make the recipe.
        1. Add the ingredients: Add the roasted red chilies, harissa powder, garlic cloves, tomato paste, lemon juice, and olive oil to your food processor or a bowl large enough to accommodate an immersion blender. 
        2. Blend: Blend the ingredients to your desired consistency.
        3. Enjoy: You can use your harissa paste in your favorite recipe or store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to two weeks.

        Ways to Use It

        Adding authentic North African flair to your favorite meals is easy with this recipe. Whether you’re perfecting a meat marinade or adding heat to your favorite pasta sauce. Below are just a few of my favorite uses for this iconic blend:

        • Marinades: An easy way to give your favorite meats depth and heat is to add harissa paste to your marinade mix—especially yogurt-based marinades, like my Greek Yogurt Chicken. This mix tastes excellent with poultry, beef, and lamb, and it also makes an incredible pair with seafood and fish (such as my Harissa Salmon), given its mild citrus flavor. 
        • Dips and sauces: Want to give a spicy kick to your favorite dips? I love mixing harissa paste with Mediterranean classics, like Baba Ganoush, Tahini Yogurt Sauce, and Hummus—perfect additions to any mezze platter! Or, you can even infuse ketchup with harissa paste for a hot take on this classic condiment.
        • Burgers and sandwiches: If you’re tired of bland lunches, try using this harissa paste as a spicy spread for burgers, weekday sandwiches, and on-the-go wraps. That way, you can enjoy gourmet eats any day of the week.
        • Pasta sauce: A dollop of harissa paste can infuse any basic pasta sauce with deliciously smoky heat. 
        • Soups and stews: If you want to add more fragrant, bold notes to your favorite soup recipes, I highly recommend using harissa paste instead of tomato or chili paste. In particular, this recipe tastes out of this world when added to my Eggplant Beef Stew, Lentil Soup, and Quinoa Chili.
        • Eggs: Start your morning meal with vibrant heat by adding this harissa paste recipe to everything from simple scrambled eggs to a five-star plate of shakshuka.
        • Roasted veggies: With a deep yet tender taste, roasted vegetables expertly balance the savory heat of harissa paste. Roasted carrots, Roasted Eggplant, and Oven-Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes are just a few great ideas for this flavor-packed pairing.
        • Grains and legumes: Mixing harissa paste into a bowl of rice, Bulgur Pilaf, or lentils is one of my favorite ways to add a touch of heat to Middle Eastern cuisine. You can even try making harissa-marinated chickpeas for a side dish that’s as flavorful as it is filling.

        Expert Tips

        The best way to make powder-based harissa paste is by using these chef-approved tips. Below, you’ll discover how to adjust your paste’s consistency, enhance its natural flavors, and more.

        • Texture and consistency: When preparing harissa paste from powder, remember that the mixture’s consistency depends on how long you blend it. The less you blend, the thicker your mix will be, and more blending will result in a thinner, more sauce-like consistency. If your mixture becomes too liquidy, add more harissa powder to thicken it.
        • Freshest spices: It’s no secret that fresh spices have the most potent, delicious flavor. Therefore, I highly encourage you to select the freshest ingredients possible—especially if you make your harissa spice blend from scratch.
        • Order of ingredients: When blending your paste, place the red peppers into the bowl first, followed by the powder. This ordering will lead to a more thorough, even incorporation of the ingredients.

        FAQs

        What does harissa paste taste like?

        Harissa paste—a classic ingredient from Tunisia—boasts a complex balance of heat, smokiness, and earthy fragrance. In addition to its base of dried chiles and warm spices, this spicy condiment also gets a subtle tang from its lemon juice and tomato paste.

        Is harissa paste the same as harissa powder?

        Not quite. Of course, both recipes come from a similar mix of dried chili peppers and ground spices, like cumin, paprika, coriander seeds, and caraway seeds. However, harissa paste has a thick, wet consistency due to its inclusion of other ingredients, like lemon juice and tomato paste. Meanwhile, harissa powder exists in a dry, powder form—more like a seasoning.

        What can I use as a substitute for harissa paste?

        If you don’t have the ingredients to make your own harissa paste, you can try substituting it with another hot chili pepper paste, like sambal oelek, gochujang, or sriracha. Though these mixes have slightly different favorite profiles, they all boast a similarly spicy base, and you can add ingredients like ground cumin, coriander, and caraway to mimic the aromatic warmth of traditional harissa.

        If you make your own Harissa Paste from Powder following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Harissa paste from powder in a jar from the front view.
        Print

        Harissa Paste from Powder Recipe

        This flavor-packed recipe for harissa paste from powder takes less than ten minutes to prepare. With just a few simple ingredients, you can add delectably spicy North African notes to dozens of dishes.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 128kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 whole roasted red peppers jarred, without juice
        • cup Harissa powder homemade or store-bought
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • 3 garlic cloves roughly chopped
        • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
        • cup extra virgin olive oil*

        Instructions

        • In the bowl of a food processor (or a bowl that can accommodate an immersion blender), place the roasted red peppers, harissa powder, garlic cloves, tomato paste, lemon juice and olive oil.
        • Blend to your desired consistency. Taste for seasoning and add more if desired.
        • Store in an airtight jar and refrigerate for up to 2 weeks.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 1 1/2 cups of harissa paste, which is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Olive oil *: I found that ⅓ cup of olive oil was enough to give this recipe a rich taste and smooth, paste-like consistency. However, you can increase this amount to ½ cup if you prefer a thinner mix or a less concentrated spiciness.
        • Storage: To store your harissa paste from powder, transfer it to an airtight container or mason jar and store it in the refrigerator for up to two weeks. I recommend pouring a thin level of olive oil over the top to limit the exposure to oxygen and bacteria before storing.
        • Freezing: You can freeze harissa paste in a freezer-safe airtight container for up to a month. You can also portion it in ice cubes, freeze until solid, and then transfer the individual cubes into freezer bags to use in your daily cooking.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 128kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Sodium: 781mg | Potassium: 115mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 209IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 13mg | Iron: 0.4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-paste-from-powder/feed/ 7
        Harissa Powder https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-powder/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-powder/#comments Tue, 09 Jul 2024 22:40:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76547 If you’re a fan of this spice’s bold, spicy, and deep taste, you’ll fall head over heels for my other…]]>

        If you’re a fan of this spice’s bold, spicy, and deep taste, you’ll fall head over heels for my other harissa recipes. My Homemade Harissa Recipe is an essential condiment for any spice lover, while my Harissa Vinaigrette will transform any weekday salad into a flavor-packed meal.

        Person holding a jar of homemade harissa spice blend in her hand.

        What is Harissa Spice?

        Harissa spice—also referred to as a “harissa spice blend,” “harissa seasoning,” or “harissa powder”—is a spicy, aromatic seasoning made from a mixture of dried chili peppers and other spices, such as cumin, coriander, and caraway seeds.

        This hot seasoning is native to Tunisia, though it’s since spread to other areas in North Africa and the Middle East, including Algeria, Morocco, and Egypt. Because of its vast popularity, harissa powder has developed many uses, including in condiments, dry rubs, and other food seasonings.

        What is in Harissa Powder?

        This authentic spice recipe is easy for anyone with a simple mix of natural spices. I’ve listed my favorite harissa powder ingredients below, including the best chilis to use, classic spices, and tasty add-ins.

        Harissa powder ingredients on a marble backdrop from the top view.
        • Dried chilies: This harissa seasoning recipe works with virtually any dried chili pepper, making it incredibly customizable in taste and heat. My favorite combination includes ancho, guajillo, and de arbol chilies. I usually buy this trio of chile peppers online (affiliate link), but you can also find them in the “Mexican” or “Latin” section of your local grocery store. Additionally, even though my mix primarily uses Mexican dried chilies, you can also cut back on spiciness by adding more New Mexican dried chilies, which tend to have a milder flavor.
          No matter which chilies you use, during our recipe testing, we found that 7-8 chilies of various kinds work best in this recipe.
        • Spices: Cumin seeds, coriander seeds, caraway seeds, and peppercorns are the best warm spices to give this mix added fragrance and earthiness. If you can, I highly recommend buying organic spices.
        • Seasonings: I recommend adding smoked paprika and garlic powder to this harissa blend for greater depth and complexity.
        • Optional add-ins: Nowadays, many commercial harissa spice blends include additional flavorings like rose petals and lemon peel. To achieve a similar floral flavor profile in your homemade blend, add ½ teaspoon of crushed, food-grade rose petals and lemon peel. For extra heat, include a pinch of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes.

        How to Make Harissa Powder

        This authentic, restaurant-worthy harissa powder recipe takes less than 15 minutes to make. Plus, you only need a handful of ingredients, a skillet, and a good food processor (affiliate link).

        Steps showing how to prepare chiles and toast the spices to make the recipe.
        1. Prepare the chilies: Remove the stems and seeds of the ancho, guajillo, and de arbol chili peppers. Then, chop them roughly.
        2. Toast the peppers: Heat the cast iron skillet over medium heat and add the chopped chilies. Stirring constantly to avoid burning, toast them until thoroughly dried (4-6 minutes). To test whether the chilies are ready, see whether they “crack” or “snap” under pressure. When they do, you can remove them from the pan.
        3. Cool: Transfer the toasted chili peppers to a plate to cool, and set them aside.
        4. Toast the seeds: Add the cumin, coriander, coriander seeds, and peppercorns to the heated skillet. Cook them for 1-2 minutes, stirring frequently, then remove them from the pan. Set them aside to cool.
        A collage of images showing how to make harissa spice mix in a food processor.
        1. Process the peppers: Transfer the cooled chili peppers to your food processor bowl fitted with the blade attachment. Pulse the processor 7-10 times until the chilies break down.
        2. Add the toasted seeds: Then, add the toasted seeds and peppercorns to the bowl. Continue processing—being sure to scrape down the processor bowl every so often—until the ingredients reach a powder-like consistency and are fully incorporated. This step should take 1-2 minutes, depending on the brand of your food processor. Once you get your desired consistency, add the smoked paprika and garlic powder and pulse it for another 2-3 times.
        3. Store: Scrape the powder into an airtight jar or container and store it at room temperature for up to six months.

        Ways to Use Harissa Spice Blend

        Because of its bold flavor and broad versatility, harissa spice provides an indispensable taste to dozens of recipes. Below are just a few of my favorite dishes harissa seasoning can be used for.

        • Salad dressing: You can use this harissa powder recipe to make my harissa vinaigrette dressing (famously used when making CAVA Bowls). It is a wonderful way to season and elevate any salad recipe. Or, if you’re in the mood for lighter, zestier options, add a teaspoon to my Yogurt Salad Dressing and Lemon Salad Dressing to introduce the earthy flavors of harissa to your salad dressings.
        • Roasted vegetables: If you’re into roasting vegetables—like carrots, bell peppers, and potatoes—this easy recipe perfectly complements their smoky, tender notes. Simply sprinkle a few teaspoons of harissa powder over veggies before roasting them in the oven.
        • Seasoning for meat and seafood: Harissa spice makes an excellent dry rub for all your favorite recipes, from chicken to beef, fish, and lamb. In particular, you can use this seasoning for classic Middle Eastern dishes, like my Baked Chicken Kabobs, Roasted Turkey Tenderloin, and Grilled Rack of Lamb.
        • Dips: You can quickly transform this seasoning into a crowd-ready dip by adding it to a creamy Mediterranean Hummus or making Harissa Aioli—a delectable accompaniment for burgers, sandwiches, French fries, and more. You can even add harissa powder to ketchup to give it spicy, complex dimensions!
        • Marinades: Besides being a great seasoning, this harissa spice blend recipe makes a deliciously hot, full-bodied marinade when combined with extra virgin olive oil, lemon juice, and other flavorings. Try it in my citrusy Shrimp Marinade, creamy Yogurt Chicken Marinade, or bold Mahi Mahi Marinade to infuse your meat with rich, flavorful notes.
        • Grains and rice: You can give any grain bowl or side dish a kick of heat by sprinkling it with harissa seasoning. I love adding this spice blend to dishes like couscous, rice, and rich pilafs (especially my Wild Rice Pilaf and Chicken Herb Pilaf!).
        • Eggs: If you love to start your mornings with a spicy wake-up call, I highly recommend using harissa powder to season savory breakfast recipes like scrambled eggs and shakshuka.
        • Soups and stews: A teaspoon of harissa powder infuses any soup or stew recipe with deep, aromatic spice. For the tastiest combination, I recommend pairing this recipe with equally hearty, chili-friendly dishes, like Eggplant Beef Stew, Chicken Chili, or—for a lighter variation try it in my Vegan Chili instead of chili powder.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        Easy to make and unbelievably versatile, homemade harissa powder is vital to any chef’s spice rack. These tips ensure you make the freshest, most flavorful seasoning with zero hassle.

        • Wear gloves: Chili peppers are notorious for their spiciness due to their high levels of the compound capsaicin. Though capsaicin is vital to giving chilis their flavor, it may cause a burning sensation after direct contact. Therefore, wearing gloves when working with them is a good idea. If you don’t have any gloves on hand, however, be sure to thoroughly wash your hands after handling your chili peppers.
        • Adjust heat: You can easily adjust your seasoning’s heat levels by changing a few simple factors. For a hotter blend, use a spicier mix of dried chilies, leave the seeds in your chili peppers, or add ½ teaspoon of cayenne pepper. For a milder mix, remove as many seeds from your chilies as possible and try to select chili peppers that land lower on the Scoville Scale—in particular, New Mexico chiles.
        • Adding salt: I did not add salt to my harissa spice blend recipe, as I prefer to adjust the amount of salt according to the recipe I plan to use. This way, I can easily control the amount of salt in my food without the risk of making it overly salty.
        • Spice grinder: I prefer to blend my harissa spices using a food processor. The bowl of a food processor is large enough to pulverize everything in one take, and its strong blades are ideal for turning all spices and dried chilies into powder. However, you can also make this recipe using a spice grinder (affiliate link.)To do so, blend the cooled chili peppers, one tablespoon at a time, until powdered. Then, add the toasted cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, and peppercorns, and grind the mixture until it reaches your preferred consistency (about five seconds). Remember, too, that you might need to grind your ingredients in small batches to ensure they fit in your grinder.

        FAQs

        What is the closest spice to harissa?

        Suppose you don’t have harissa spice but still want the same aromatic, spicy taste. In that case, I recommend blending chili powder, smoked paprika, ground cumin, ground coriander, and garlic powder. Though not identical, this mix strikes a similar balance between fragrant heat and the earthiness of harissa powder. Or, if you need a condiment-like consistency, you can even try sriracha sauce for a store-bought, chili-based substitute.

        Is harissa a spice?

        Not a single spice, “harissa” refers to a hot, fragrant mix of multiple spices and dried chili peppers. You can find this traditional blend in several forms, including a dry seasoning, a paste form, and a creamy sauce.

        Is harissa powder spicy hot?

        In general, yes, harissa powder contains a fair amount of spiciness. However, if desired, you can adjust this heat level by using different combinations of chili peppers and spices to make a milder mix.

        What is the difference between harissa powder and harissa paste?

        Since they both come from a similar mixture of dried chili peppers and spices, harissa powder and harissa paste boast a hot, earthy flavor. However, they have very different consistencies. Powdered harissa is a dry, powdered version of the mix, while harissa paste has a thicker, wetter consistency due to additional ingredients like tomato paste, lemon juice, and olive oil.

        Where to buy harissa powder?

        After trying several store-bought brands, I recommend purchasing either New York Shuk’s Fiery Harissa or Whole Foods Organic Harissa Seasoning (which is a little milder). These premade harissa blends will work in a pinch, though I find my homemade recipe more flavorful and customizable.

        If you make your own Harissa Powder following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Harissa powder in a jar with a spoonfull.
        Print

        Harissa Powder Recipe

        With deep spice and complex flavors, Harissa Powder packs all the hot, bold taste you could want from a seasoning. You can make this simple spice mix in less than 15 minutes using a simple set of natural ingredients.
        Course Seasoning
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 6 minutes
        Total Time 21 minutes
        Servings 5 tablespoons
        Calories 12kcal

        Equipment

        Ingredients

        • 8 dried chili peppers we used a combination of Ancho, Guajillo, and De Arbol chili peppers
        • 1 ½ teaspoons cumin seeds
        • 1 ½ teaspoon coriander seeds
        • 1 teaspoon caraway seeds
        • ½ teaspoon peppercorns
        • 1 teaspoon smoked paprika
        • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt optional*

        Instructions

        • Remove the stems and deseed the chili peppers. Give them a rough chop.
        • Heat a cast iron skillet on medium-high heat. Add the peppers and toast for 4-6 minutes or until thoroughly dried. Stir frequently to avoid burning. To test for doneness, you should feel the chili pepper “crack” or “snap.”
        • Place the toasted peppers on a plate to cool while working on the rest of the ingredients.
        • Add the cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, and peppercorns to the heated skillet and toast, stirring frequently, for 1-2 minutes. Remove from the pan and set aside to cool.
        • Place the cooled chili peppers into the bowl of a food processor (*instructions for making it in a spice grinder are below in the notes section) fitted with the blade attachment. Pulse the processor 7-10 times to break down the dried chilies. Add the toasted cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, peppercorns, and salt if using. Continue to process until they are pulverized and reach a powder consistency, scraping down the processor bowl to incorporate all the ingredients. Depending on your food processor, this takes about 1-2 minutes of processing. Finally, add the smoked paprika and garlic powder and pulse 2-3 times to ensure all spices are fully incorporated.
        • Place the powder in an airtight container and store it in a cool and dark place for six months.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about ⅓ to ½ cup harissa seasoning, depending on the size of your peppers. The nutritional values below are for the full recipe.
        • If using a spice grinder: Add the cooled chili peppers, one tablespoon at a time, to the grinder and pulse to create a powder. Add the toasted cumin, coriander, caraway seeds, and peppercorns. Continue to grind until it reaches powder consistency. Add the smoked paprika and garlic powder if using. Grind for 5 seconds.
        • Mortar and Pestle: If you do not have a food processor or a spice grinder, the good old mortar and pestle would also work.
        • Adding salt: When I make homemade spice blends, I usually use very little or no salt. This way, I can salt my food separately and easily gauge the amount of salt used in my dish. Feel free to omit it or use more as needed.
        • Storage: To store this harissa spice mix recipe, first transfer it to an airtight container. Then, store it in a cool, dry place—such as a pantry or kitchen cabinet—for up to six months.
        • Wear gloves: Chili peppers are usually very hot, even when dry. I would recommend wearing gloves if you have them.
        • Fumes: Proper ventilation is essential when cooking chili peppers. The fumes from these chilies may irritate your eyes, nose, and mouth, so I highly recommend opening windows, turning on your kitchen’s range hood, and/or using portable fans to increase your kitchen’s air circulation.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 12kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.4g | Saturated Fat: 0.04g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 468mg | Potassium: 61mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 420IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 17mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-powder/feed/ 2
        Harissa Vinaigrette https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-vinaigrette/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-vinaigrette/#comments Tue, 09 Jul 2024 22:26:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76802 In this simple guide, I’ll teach you how to make a restaurant-quality harissa vinaigrette dressing, including preparation tips, tasty uses,…]]>

        In this simple guide, I’ll teach you how to make a restaurant-quality harissa vinaigrette dressing, including preparation tips, tasty uses, and storage guides.

        Cava copycat hot harissa vinaigrette in a glass jar with a spoon.

        What is Harissa Dressing Made Of?

        The best way to capture the bright flavors of CAVA’s hot harissa vinaigrette is by using the right ingredients—fresh, flavorful, and already in your pantry!

        Ingredients for the recipe in small bowls from the top view.
        • Olive oil: Though a little more expensive, high-quality extra virgin olive oil is excellent for vinaigrettes due to its richness and depth. (Remember: Olive oil plays a big part in vinaigrette recipes!) Still, any olive oil will work as long as you like its flavor.
        • Lemon juice or vinegar: I recommend using fresh lemon juice due to its bright, citrusy overtones. However, if you want sharper, more acidic notes in your harissa vinaigrette, you can use red wine vinegar or white wine vinegar instead.
        • Harissa: This recipe works with both harissa sauce (or paste) and harissa powder. You can also make harissa paste from powder. Regardless of your choice, I suggest making them from scratch due to their more vibrant, fresh, and customizable flavors. However, you can also purchase store-bought versions for simpler meal prep. In particular, I love brands like NY Shuk, Mina, and Whole Foods, though you should be able to find more harissa products in the “international” or “ethnic” sections of local grocery stores.
        • Honey: Honey is the key to giving harissa salad dressing a beautiful balance of “heat and sweet,” though you may also use maple syrup or agave syrup for a vegan version.
        • Garlic: Be sure to grate or press your fresh garlic before adding it to your recipe. Otherwise, the garlic won’t properly infuse the dressing with its flavors.
        • Seasoning: Kosher salt and ground black pepper are all that’s necessary to bring out the savory tones of this all-natural harissa vinaigrette recipe.

        Optional Add-Ins

        How you customize your harissa salad dressing depends on your brand of harissa. Some store-bought brands—like Trader Joe’s—tend to have a hotter flavor profile, while others—like Whole Foods—are a little milder. 

        In short, taste your harissa sauce and consider your final dish before adjusting your recipe!

        • Spicier: Want to kick up the heat of this CAVA copycat recipe? Try adding a pinch of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes to your mix. Depending on the brand of harissa you are using, you can also add cumin for an added layer of warmth. If you are making it from scratch following our recipe, I do not recommend adding more, but of course, you can give your harissa a taste and decide for yourself.
        • Herbal flavors: If you prefer an earthier, lighter taste in your harissa dressing, try adding a shake of dried oregano or dried mint to your recipe.
        • Greek yogurt: Though not traditional, you can make a creamy harissa dressing by adding Greek yogurt to your recipe. Not only does this ingredient lend the mixture a nice tang, but it’s also a great way to lighten up its flavor profile for those who want a not-too-spicy harissa vinaigrette.

        How to Make Harissa Vinaigrette?

        You can make hot harissa vinaigrette in three simple steps, bringing spicy, Middle Eastern flavors to any meal. And the best part, you ask? It takes less than 5 minutes to make.

        A collage of images showing how to make harissa vinaigrette.
        1. Add the ingredients: Place the olive oil, lemon juice, harissa sauce (or powder), honey, garlic, kosher salt, and black pepper to a mason jar with a tight-fitting lid.
        2. Mix: Cover the jar and shake it for 30 seconds or until emulsified. Taste for seasoning and adjust as necessary.
        3. Serve or store: Refrigerate the vinaigrette or use it immediately in your desired recipe. Be sure to shake the mixture after storage to ensure a well-integrated mixture.

        How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

        • Store: You can store your harissa vinaigrette in an airtight container or glass jar in the refrigerator for up to one week. Remember to shake the mixture well before using it to help reintegrate any separated ingredients.
        • Freeze: For extra-long storage, freeze this recipe in a freezer-safe, airtight container for up to one month. Leave enough room in your chosen container for the vinaigrette to expand.
        • Thaw: To thaw your frozen harissa dressing, put it in the refrigerator overnight.

        How to Use Harissa Vinaigrette?

        Lighter and tangier than traditional harissa, this delicious condiment works pretty much anywhere you want that hot harissa taste. Below are a few of my favorite ways to add a bold flavor to any weekday menu.

        • Salad dressing: No one can resist a classic. Using harissa dressing for salad is a no-brainer, especially since it strikes such a tasty balance with the crispness of leafy green salads. This vinaigrette pairs impeccably with the refreshing cucumber and tomatoes in my Spring Mix Salad. Or, you can balance this spicy condiment with the rich creaminess of my Butter Lettuce Salad or Massaged Kale Salad with Avocado—especially when topped with a crumble of feta cheese.
        • Grain bowls: Want to learn how to make CAVA at home? Grain bowls are a staple of this Mediterranean restaurant chain—a clear reason why I love using this copycat vinaigrette for dishes like my vegan Quinoa Power Bowl and gluten-free Quinoa Sweet Potato Bowl.
        • Sandwiches and wraps: This harissa vinaigrette doesn’t just work in bowls. It’s also a mouthwatering blend for sandwiches and wraps—whether you drizzle it over the spread or use it as a dipping sauce.
        • Roasted vegetables: Equal parts nutritious and flavorful, this easy vinaigrette makes the perfect addition to roasted veggies. Drizzle it over tender dishes like Baked Eggplant Slices, sweet Roasted Maple Carrots, and hearty Air Fried Red Potatoes, and you’ll never have a bland side dish again.
        • Roasted and grilled meats & seafood: You can lend any protein a delicious spice by serving this vinaigrette with dishes, such as my succulent Grilled Salmon, Steak Kabobs in Oven, and Baked Bone-In Chicken Breast. Use this dressing like your other go-to dips and serve it on the side, or use it as a drizzle for a well-infused smokiness.
        • Use it as a marinade: Out of all the CAVA dressing recipes, this is one of my favorites for meat marinades. Simply add ¼ cup of harissa vinaigrette to your favorite marinade recipe (especially my tangy Chicken Marinade with Yogurt, zesty Shrimp Marinade, and savory Turkey Tenderloin Marinade!) and add more as necessary.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        If you want the flavors of the authentic hot harissa vinaigrette, below are a few helpful tips for getting the best flavor, consistency, and use from this five-star dressing.

        • Powder vs. sauce: Though both will work, during our recipe testing, we thought the harissa sauce performed better when making this vinaigrette. Powder tends to sink at the bottom as it sits, while sauce blends better (depending on the brand you use, of course). If your only option is harissa powder, be sure to shake it vigorously before using it in your recipe.
        • Adjust seasoning and sweetness: Because this dressing recipe can be customized in many ways, you must taste it for seasoning. Consider, too, what kind of dish you plan to make, and adjust your dressing’s ingredient ratios to make the best match. For instance, you can make a sweet honey harissa vinaigrette by increasing the amount of honey you use.
        • Shake well before use: Letting your harissa dressing rest for 20 minutes is an easy way to help its flavors infuse and develop. However, as with any vinaigrette, this recipe’s ingredients tend to separate as it sits. Therefore, you must whisk or shake it well before using it.

        FAQs

        What is harissa dressing?

        Harissa dressing is a spicy, light vinaigrette popularized by the Mediterranean restaurant chain CAVA. This dressing gets its primary flavors from harissa—a chili-based condiment that originated in Tunisia. However, it also contains rich, citrusy notes from other ingredients like lemon juice and garlic.

        What is the difference between harissa sauce and harissa vinaigrette?

        Of course, both recipes boast a hot, smoky taste due to their use of chili peppers, spices, and herbs. However, harissa sauce is an ingredient in harissa vinaigrette, with a more concentrated flavor and thicker consistency. The vinaigrette version is a thinner, lighter, and less intense mixture, as it has an olive oil base and other ingredients like lemon juice, vinegar, and honey.

        Other CAVA-Inspired Dressing Recipes

        If you make this hot harissa vinaigrette recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Harissa vinaigrette in a jar with a spoon.
        Print

        Harissa Vinaigrette Recipe

        Hot harissa vinaigrette is the ultimate condiment for anyone craving the spicy and smoky flavors of harissa. In just five minutes and with a handful of ingredients, you can take any dish—grain bowls, veggies, salads, and beyond—to the next level.
        Course Salad Dressing
        Cuisine Mediterranean, Middle Eastern
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 146kcal

        Ingredients

        • ¼ cup olive oil
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice or red wine vinegar
        • 2 tablespoons harissa sauce or 1 tablespoon harissa powder
        • 1 tablespoon honey or maple syrup or agave nectar for a vegan option
        • 1 clove garlic grated or pressed
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground

        Instructions

        • Combine the olive oil, lemon juice, harissa sauce (or powder), honey, garlic, kosher salt, and pepper in a mason jar.
        • Cover and shake until emulsified, about 30 seconds. Adjust seasoning to your desired taste.
        • Use right away or store in the fridge until ready to use. Be sure to shake before serving.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 1/2 cup harissa vinaigrette. I listed 4 servings because you can use it in a salad or grain bowl recipe that serves 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Storage: Place leftovers in a mason jar (or any other airtight container) and keep them in the fridge for up to a week.
        • Freeze: You can freeze this dressing in a freezer-safe container for up to a month. Thaw it in the fridge overnight.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 146kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 0.3g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 392mg | Potassium: 47mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 52IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 5mg | Iron: 0.2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-vinaigrette/feed/ 4
        Mango Avocado Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mango-avocado-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mango-avocado-salad/#respond Sat, 29 Jun 2024 15:28:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=54258 Once you try a bite of this refreshing, vibrant salad, you’ll be adding avocado to all your summer fruit salads.…]]>

        Once you try a bite of this refreshing, vibrant salad, you’ll be adding avocado to all your summer fruit salads. While I think that creamy avocado and ripe mango are a match made in heaven, avocado is also the perfect addition to other fruit salads. Try this Peach Avocado Salad or Watermelon and Avocado Salad for a refreshing twist. Readers also love my Kale Avocado Salad or this Avocado Quinoa Salad for a more savory option. 

        And if you have some leftover mangoes, try our Pineapple Mango Salsa.

        Avocado Mango Salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

        Why You’ll Love This Mango Salad?

        I know you’ll love this mango and avocado salad as much as I do! Here’s why:

        • Quick, easy, and nutrient-dense: Healthy has never been easier! Throw this simple salad together in 15 minutes for your daily dose of essential fatty acids and vitamin-C
        • The ideal accompaniment to grilled favorites: This salad pairs perfectly with fish tacos, grilled seafood, meats, and other main dishes. Or, serve it as a mango salsa with your favorite tortilla chip as a quick appetizer! 
        • Bursting with refreshing summer flavor: Like our other summer salads, this fresh fruity salad is the perfect way to cool off on a hot summer day. 

        Ingredients for Avocado Mango Salad

        To make this mango salad with avocado, you’ll need two sets of simple ingredients. The dressing consists of a few well-loved, familiar pantry items and the salad consists of a handful of fresh produce from your local farmer’s market or grocery store. 

        Avocado mango dressing ingredients from the top view.

        For the chili lime dressing, you will need:

        • Extra virgin olive oil
        • Lime juice and lime zest
        • Fresh garlic cloves: Be sure to mince it finely.
        • Spices & seasonings: Ground cumin, chili powder, and kosher salt.
        • Sweetener: You can use honey or maple syrup interchangeably in this mango avocado salad dressing.
        Mango salad ingredients from the top view.

        To make the recipe for mango salad, gather:

        • Avocados: Use ripe but firm avocados. This way, they won’t get mushy when cut into cubes and incorporated into the salad.
        • Mangoes: I recommend using juicy ripened mangoes for this recipe. I usually buy them a few days before I plan to make it and keep them on the counter to ripen.
        • Red Onion: You need only a small, thinly sliced red onion. For a lighter taste, you can also use green onions.
        • Jalapeno peppers: Deseed and chop your peppers finely. If you prefer your mango salad to be spicy, you can incorporate some of the seeds into the salad. Alternatively, you can also use a red bell pepper.
        • Fresh cilantro: I know that Mango Salad with cilantro might not be everybody’s cup of tea. If that is you, feel free to swap it with other fresh herbs like parsley or mint to pack an aromatic punch. 

        Substitutions and Possible Additions

        • Dressing: If a spicy mango avocado salad isn’t your thing, try this Balsamic Lemon Dressing for a tangy, balsamic vinegar-based salad addition with fresh lemon juice.
        • Nuts & Seeds: For a salty crunch that beautifully balances the sweetness of the mango, try adding a handful of pumpkin seeds or chopped walnuts. 
        • Other produce: Create endless salad varieties with any fresh summer produce you have on hand. Turn this recipe into a Mango Avocado Tomato Salad by tossing in a cup of cherry tomatoes, or throw in a cup of diced English cucumber for some extra crunch. 
        • Salad greens: To turn this into a green salad with mango and avocado, add spring mix, butter lettuce, arugula, or any of your favorite leafy greens. 
        • Cheese: Top it off with 1/2 cup of cotija cheese, feta or even goat cheese for some salty umami flavor.
        • Add in some protein: Looking for a good protein source to make this salad more filling? Try adding a few grilled or baked chicken breasts for a delicious copycat version of the fan-favorite Cheesecake Factory salad with mango and avocado. Or if you have the grill on, top it off with grilled shrimp on top.

        How to Make Mango Salad?

        With a little bit of chopping and a gentle toss of the ingredients, this delicious avo mango salad comes together in the blink of an eye and is sure to impress at any summer gathering. Simply:

        Person showing how to make mango avocado salad in a collage of images.
        1. Make the dressing: Add all ingredients into a mason jar. Screw on the lid tightly and shake until thoroughly combined. 
        2. Assemble the salad: Grab a large bowl and add in your cubed avocado, chunks of fresh mango, sliced red onion, chopped jalapeño (optional), and freshly chopped cilantro. 
        3. Add the dressing: Drizzle the dressing over the salad and toss it gently until just combined. 
        4. Season: Season to taste with salt and black pepper, if necessary. Enjoy!

        How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers

        • Dressing: To make this recipe come together quickly, you can make the dressing a day in advance. Simply combine all ingredients in a mason jar and place in the fridge. 
        • Prep: Avocado is difficult to prep ahead of time because it can quickly turn an unappealing brown color once cut. I recommend chopping up the ripe avocado and the rest of the ingredients as soon as you’re ready to assemble the salad. You can, however, prep the mango and jalapeño in advance, but be sure to store them in an airtight container in the fridge. 
        • Storage: You can store the salad in an airtight container in the fridge and enjoy it for up to two days. 

        What to Serve it With?

        A salad this versatile, refreshing, and vibrant is sure to brighten up your favorite summer main dish. Here are some serving suggestions:

        • Serve it as a great addition to taco night: Looking for ways to amp up your Taco Tuesday? Impress your family by pairing this salad with Brisket Tacos, Flank Steak Tacos, Black Bean Quinoa Tacos, Blackened Mahi Mahi, or your favorite fish tacos. 
        • Pair it with your favorite grilled seafood: A seafood dish isn’t complete without a refreshing salad! Serve the salad on the side with some of my seafood favorites, such as Grilled Salmon, Shrimp Kabobs, or Grilled Mahi Mahi
        • With chips on the side: Serve the salad with tortilla chips, pita chips, or crackers for a refreshing and flavorful dip perfect for entertaining.
        Salad with mango and avocado in a bowl from the front view.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        While this recipe for avocado and mango salad is super simple and easy, follow these helpful tips to achieve maximum results and flavor!

        • Use ripe fruit: Avocados and mangoes have the best texture and flavor when they’re ripe. Also, it is best if you cut them in bite-sized pieces.
        • Prevent Browning: To prevent the avocado from browning, cut it right before incorporating it into the salad and drizzle it with the lime-based dressing immediately. This not only preserves the color but also enhances the flavor.
        • Ensure your prepped fruit is similar in size: Make sure every bite of your salad is consistent by cutting your mango and avocado into equal-sized cubes or chunks. 
        • Toss gently: Avocado tends to turn mushy if over-handled, so be sure to toss your salad gently when combining.

        FAQs

        How do you know if a mango is ripe?

        To tell whether a mango is ripe, use your thumb to apply pressure to the skin gently. If it feels soft or gives slightly, it’s ready! If you’re not quite sure, locate the fruit’s stem and give it a whiff. If it gives off a sweet, fruity aroma, it’s ripe. 

        Is mango skin edible?

        Mango skin is edible, and studies show that the skin contains a variety of health and nutritional benefits. However, keep in mind that eating mango skin may cause allergic reactions or lead to ingesting pesticides or harmful chemicals. The skin is also generally bitter and tough to chew.

        Can you eat this like a mango avocado salsa?

        You sure can. If you prefer it as salsa, I recommend cutting the mango and avocado into smaller cubes so that you can easily scoop them out with a tortilla chip.

        Other Fruit Salads You Might Also Like

        If you loved this mango summer salad, here are some other fruity salad recipes you need to try!

        If you try this delicious Summer Mango Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        mango salad with avocado in a bowl from the top view
        Print

        Mango Avocado Salad Recipe

        This Mango Avocado Salad recipe is made with fresh mango, ripe avocados, and chili lime dressing. Ready in 15 minutes, it is the perfect side dish for the grilling season.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine Mexican/Southwestern
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 15 minutes
        Servings 4 people
        Calories 358kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Chili Lime Vinaigrette:

        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • 1 teaspoon of lime zest
        • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
        • 1 clove garlic minced
        • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
        • ½ teaspoon chili powder
        • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon maple syrup/honey

        For The Salad:

        • 2 ripe avocados cut into cubes
        • 2 ripe mangos cut into 1-inch chunks
        • ½ cup red onion thinly sliced – from a small red onion
        • 1 small jalapeno pepper seeded and chopped (optional)
        • ½ cup chopped fresh cilantro

        Instructions

        • Make the dressing by combining everything in a mason jar. Close the lid tightly and give it a shake until all ingredients are thoroughly mixed.
        • Place the cubed avocados, mango chunks, red onion slices, jalapeno, and cilantro in a salad bowl.
        • Drizzle it with the dressing and give it a toss to combine.
        • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: The finished salad is about 4 cups with 1 cup per serving.
        • Storage: You can store the salad in an airtight container in the fridge and enjoy it for up to two days.
        • Cut them in similar bite-size chunks: For best results, cut avocado and mango cubes in similar sizes.
        • Toss gently: Avocado tends to turn mushy if over-handled, so be sure to toss your salad gently when combining. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 358kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Sodium: 452mg | Potassium: 743mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 1528IU | Vitamin C: 59mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mango-avocado-salad/feed/ 0
        Lemon Tahini Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-tahini-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-tahini-sauce/#comments Wed, 12 Jun 2024 14:53:52 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75894 Rich, smooth, and zesty, this tahini sauce recipe is an easy way to elevate any menu. Looking for more recipes…]]>

        Rich, smooth, and zesty, this tahini sauce recipe is an easy way to elevate any menu. Looking for more recipes with tahini? You’ll love my smoky, savory Baba Ganoush and creamy Hummus—perfect additions to a mezze platter, Mediterranean appetizer, or sandwich spread.

        A spoonful of lemon tahini sauce being drizzled in a jar.

        Lemon Tahini Sauce Ingredients

        This easy tahini sauce recipe requires only five simple ingredients. Below, you’ll discover everything you need to make the creamiest, most vibrant condiment in your cookbook.

        Ingredients for the sauce from the top view.
        • Tahini (aka sesame seed paste): High-quality tahini is essential when making this delicious sauce recipe. You should be able to find premade tahini paste in the Middle Eastern section of your local grocery store, or you can purchase it online (my favorite store-bought tahini is from Soom Foods!). Before using, stir or shake your tahini to avoid unwanted settling, and then store the rest in the refrigerator for up to one week.
        • Lemon juice: I always use fresh lemon juice in this recipe due to its rich, bright taste. However, you can also use store-bought lemon juice, depending on what you have on hand.
        • Garlic: I recommend using finely minced or pressed garlic to ensure its flavors distribute evenly throughout the mixture.
        • Salt
        • Water: Cold water is the key to adjusting this sauce’s consistency.

        Optional Add-Ins

        Turning this simple tahini sauce into a culinary masterpiece is easy with a few optional add-ins. Here are a few that we recommend:

        • Lemon herb tahini sauce: To create a more herbaceous blend, add ½ cups of fresh herbs, such as cilantro or parsley, to your tahini sauce. This variation has an extra-bright flavor and makes an incomparable addition to my vegan Mediterranean Nachos.
        • Seasonings: To make a flavored tahini sauce, add a pinch of other spices. For instance, you can make a turmeric tahini sauce by adding ¼ teaspoon of turmeric powder or play around with different flavors by adding ingredients like cumin, paprika, dill, or black pepper.
        • Sweet tahini cream sauce: Although it’s not a traditional ingredient, you can give this sauce a sweeter finish by adding a tablespoon of honey or maple syrup to the mix.
        • Dijon mustard: Add a teaspoon of Dijon mustard for a nice zing that complements the zesty flavors of this tahini garlic sauce.
        • Olive oil: Tahini paste provides a creamy consistency, but a teaspoon of olive oil can be added to mellow its robust flavor.

        How to Make Tahini Sauce

        There’s no need to stress when learning how to prepare this simple sauce. This iconic Middle Eastern recipe is a cinch, whether you’re a gourmet chef or a kitchen novice.

        A collage of images showing how to prepare tahini sauce.
        1. Mix the ingredients: Place the tahini, lemon juice, garlic, and salt into a small bowl. Whisk the ingredients to the best of your ability, knowing that the mixture will be thick.
        2. Add water: Pour the water into the bowl while still whisking until smooth. You may use more or less water to achieve your desired consistency.
        3. Serve: Taste the mixture for seasoning and add more if necessary. Store it in a mason jar in the refrigerator or use it right away.

        Tahini Sauce Uses

        When deciding what to make with tahini sauce, the options are endless. Below, I’ve listed my favorite uses, from light vegetable sides to hearty main dishes.

        • Dipping sauce: This tahini dip recipe is a must when serving mezze platters and veggie trays. Try serving it alongside a plate of fresh vegetables—like cucumber, carrots, and tomatoes—and you’ll never have to stress over party appetizers again.
        • Shawarma: Since they’re both packed with rich Middle Eastern taste, I love using tahini sauce for shawarma recipes, such as my spiced Chicken Shawarma and succulent Beef Shawarma. You can even use this classic Mediterranean tahini sauce for gyros—the Greek version of shawarma—or transform it into a tahini spread for a flavor-packed wrap or pita pocket. 
        • Grilled meat and fish: This easy recipe pairs beautifully with grilled meat and fish dishes. Try using this tahini sauce for roasted or grilled chicken, lamb, salmon, or your favorite white fish, and prepare for an explosion of earthy, zesty flavors.
        • Drizzle over roasted veggies: Roasted veggies taste out of this world with a drizzle of this lemon tahini recipe. In particular, this sauce makes a delectable addition to savory-sweet dishes like my Baked Butternut Squash Cubes, Roasted Eggplant, Roasted Cauliflower, and Roasted Butternut Squash and Sweet Potatoes.
        • Salads and grain bowls: Another great way to use this creamy sauce is in fresh salads and grain bowls. This sauce works exceptionally well when bringing out the zingy, garden-fresh taste of my Butternut Squash Tahini Salad and Sweet Potato Quinoa Bowl.
        • Falafel: Using sesame tahini sauce for falafel balls is a fantastic option to complement the dish’s herby, nutty taste.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        Learning to make tahini sauce from scratch is easy. However, if you want to make the best tahini sauce, these top-notch tips will ensure your recipe is as creamy, flavorful, and rich as possible.

        • Stir tahini before using: Like other natural seed and nut butters, tahini tends to separate during storage, with its oils rising to the top and its solids sinking to the bottom. Therefore, just like you would do with peanut butter, it’s necessary to stir your tahini before adding it to your recipe.
        • Adjust the sauce’s consistency: One of the best ways to make this lemon garlic tahini sauce as versatile as possible is to adjust its consistency. Add more water to your mixture if you want a thinner tahini drizzle—similar to other creamy salad dressings—or use less liquid for a thicker, creamy tahini sauce.
        • Food processor: If you are making a large batch of this sauce, we recommend using a food processor (or a blender) to achieve the ultimate creamy consistency.
        • Resting time: If you have time, I suggest letting the sauce rest for a few minutes before serving. This way, all the ingredients will have time to mix, develop, and infuse the mixture.
        • Experiment with seasoning and add-ins: With so many uses for this easy lemon tahini sauce, I highly recommend playing around with its flavor and consistency to complement your main dish.

        FAQs

        What is tahini sauce made of?

        Traditional Mediterranean tahini sauce comes together with a few main ingredients: tahini (a creamy paste made from ground sesame seeds), lemon juice, salt, and water. However, there are many variations on this classic Middle Eastern condiment, including those that add extra flavors with fresh garlic, cumin, parsley, cilantro, and more.

        What does tahini sauce taste like?

        Tahini sauce has a deliciously complex flavor profile, making it an ideal condiment for countless dishes. Tangy, savory, earthy, and mildly bitter, this classic Middle Eastern sauce tastes as great alongside shawarma as it does with a bowl of greens.

        What does tahini sauce look like?

        Generally, tahini sesame sauce has a light tan color with a yellowish tint, depending on the amount of lemon juice or garlic added to the mixture. The sauce is also known for its smooth, creamy texture, though its thickness may vary from liquidity to a thicker, dip-like consistency, depending on the amount of water you add.

        Is tahini good for you?

        Though everything is good in moderation, tahini has many health benefits, including improving cardiovascular health, reducing cancer risk, and helping with inflammation.

        Other Sauce Recipes You Might Also Like:

        If you make your own Lemon Tahini Sauce following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        A spoon of lemon tahini sauce drizzling in a jar showing how creamy it is.
        Print

        Lemon Tahini Sauce Recipe

        This Lemon Tahini Sauce is perfect for salads, falafel, shawarma, and more! Ready in 5 minutes, this classic Middle Eastern condiment is creamy, nutty, and delicious.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 183kcal

        Ingredients

        • ½ cup tahini paste stirred well
        • ¼ cup lemon juice
        • 2 cloves garlic minced finely or pressed
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt more as needed
        • ¼ cup cold water more as needed

        Instructions

        • Place tahini, lemon juice, garlic, and salt in a bowl. Whisk (as much as you can) until combined. It will be thick, and that is normal.
        • Pour in the water and continue whisking until it is smooth. You can adjust the consistency by adding more (or less) water.
        • Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 2/3 cup tahini sauce, which is ideal for serving 4-6 people, depending on the dish you plan to use this recipe. The below nutritional values are per serving for 4 people.
        • Adjust consistency and seasoning: Use this recipe as a starting point and adjust consistency based on your preference or the recipe you plan on pairing it with. You can make it thinner by adding more water and vice versa.
        • Storing, freezing, and thawing the leftover sauce: Garlic lemon tahini sauce is the perfect condiment for anyone who enjoys no-fuss meal prep. Here is how I store leftovers:
          • Storing: Transfer the prepared tahini sauce to an airtight container or tightly sealed mason jar and store it in the refrigerator for up to one week. Keep in mind that this sauce tends to separate and thicken during storage, so you might have to whisk a little cold water into the mixture before serving.
          • Freezing: Technically, you can freeze tahini sauce, although extreme temperatures might mess with its consistency. Still, you can freeze this recipe by pouring it into an airtight container and freezing it for up to one month. Or, for easier portioning, you can place the garlic lemon tahini sauce into the compartments of an ice cube tray, freeze until solid, then transfer the individual cubes into a freezer-safe Ziploc bag.
          • Thawing: Place your frozen tahini sauce in the refrigerator overnight to thaw. Because separation is inevitable during freezing, remember to stir it well to regain its creamy, well-incorporated texture before serving.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 183kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Sodium: 302mg | Potassium: 159mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 21IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 47mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-tahini-sauce/feed/ 1
        Yogurt Chia Pudding https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-chia-pudding/ https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-chia-pudding/#comments Mon, 20 May 2024 12:33:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75466 Making chia seed pudding with yogurt is one of my favorite bedtime rituals. It gives me the satisfaction of having…]]>

        Making chia seed pudding with yogurt is one of my favorite bedtime rituals. It gives me the satisfaction of having a healthy breakfast ready in the morning with plenty of protein, fiber, and healthy fats wrapped up in one. It’s the perfect breakfast that does double duty as a healthy snack or healthy dessert.

        For more breakfast recipes, make my Yogurt Parfait for additional protein or Chia Seed Oatmeal, a personal favorite. If you are not a fan of the texture of chia seeds, try Steel Cut Overnight Oats instead.

        Chia seed yogurt breakfast in a jar garnished with fruit.

        Ingredients for Chia Yogurt Pudding

        This chia seeds and yogurt pudding recipe is made with simple ingredients you probably already have in your pantry and fridge. You will need the following:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Yogurt: I love the consistency of plain full fat yogurt, but you can also use plain Greek yogurt for a thicker consistency. You can also use low-fat yogurt, fat-free yogurt or vegan yogurt such as almond milk or coconut yogurt. If you are a fan of sweetened yogurts, my Homemade Vanilla Yogurt would also be a great option.
        • Milk: Use your favorite plant-based milk like Unsweetened Almond Milk, coconut milk, oat milk, or soy milk. You can also make a chia pudding with yogurt, no milk, by using water. Or, use regular dairy milk if desired.
        • Sweetener: I used pure maple syrup, but you can use your preferred sweetener of choice, such as honey, brown sugar, or coconut sugar. If you choose a sugar-free version, skip the sweetener or use monk fruit maple syrup instead.
        • Chia Seeds: I recommend using organic black chia seeds that you can find in most grocery stores and online (affiliate link). Other national brands include Navitas, Kirkland, Whole Foods 365, and Bob’s Red Mill.
        • Vanilla Extract: Optional, but it adds a lovely, delicious flavor.
        • Toppings: There are plenty of variations when it comes to toppings, so get as creative as you like. Some of my favorite toppings are fresh berries, such as my Blueberry Puree, mango, bananas, nuts and seeds, chocolate chips, granola like my chunky homemade granola, a spoonful of nut butter, such as almond butter or peanut butter, or a pinch of ground cinnamon.

        How to Make Chia Seed Pudding with Yogurt?

        Here are the step-by-step instructions and photos to make this yogurt chia seed pudding recipe:

        A collage of images showing how to make yogurt chia pudding.
        1. Mix yogurt mixture: In a medium bowl, whisk together yogurt, almond milk, maple syrup, and vanilla extract until smooth.
        2. Add chia seeds to yogurt: Stir in chia seeds with a rubber spatula and give it a good stir.
        3. Soak: Cover with plastic wrap. Set in the refrigerator for at least 4 hours or overnight.
        4. Finish with toppings: When ready to serve, scoop into bowls and enjoy with your favorite toppings, such as fresh fruit, nuts, seeds, and granola. Serve cold.
        Low calorie high protein chia pudding in a jar topped off with fruit.

        FAQs

        Can you put chia seeds in yogurt?

        Yes, chia seeds and yogurt is a delicious high-protein, high-fiber breakfast or snack. The perfect ratio of chia seeds to yogurt is ¼ cup chia seeds (4 tablespoons of chia seeds) to 1 cup yogurt + 1 cup liquid.

        Can you eat dry chia seeds in yogurt?

        Yes, you can. However, they are easier to digest (and more enjoyable to eat) when they are soaked as they expand and gain a more gel-like consistency.

        How long to soak chia seeds in yogurt?

        When adding chia seeds to yogurt, soak for at least 4 hours, or overnight. 

        What are the health benefits of eating chia seeds with yogurt?

        Chia seeds with yogurt are a nutrient powerhouse, packed with omega-3 fatty acids, protein, fiber, vitamins, minerals, antioxidants, and gut-healthy probiotics. This, as a result, can help improve heart health, lower cholesterol, aid in weight loss, and promote gut health. To reap the most benefits from this recipe (especially if you are on a weight loss journey), it is best to keep the amount of sugar to a minimum.

        If you make this Chia Yogurt Pudding recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Chia seed yogurt recipe garnished with fresh strawberries and blackberries.
        Print

        Yogurt Chia Pudding Recipe

        Yogurt chia pudding is a protein-packed (8 grams of protein per serving), fiber-rich make-ahead breakfast that comes together in minutes. Easy to customize and filling, it’s perfect for busy mornings.
        Course Breakfast
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Resting Time 4 hours
        Total Time 4 hours 5 minutes
        Servings 2 servings
        Calories 255kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 cup plain yogurt
        • 1 cup almond milk or any non-dairy milk
        • 2 tablespoons maple syrup optional
        • ¼ cup chia seeds
        • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract optional

        Optional Add-ins/Toppings:

        • 1 cup fruit strawberries, blackberries, and bananas
        • 1/2 cup nuts or seeds

        Instructions

        • Whisk together yogurt, almond milk, maple syrup, and vanilla extract in a medium-sized bowl.
        • Add chia seeds to yogurt mixture, wait for 5 minutes and give it another mix. We do this because chia seeds tend to stick together when mixed with liquid. Doing so helps break up any lingering clumps of chia seeds.
        • Cover with stretch film, and refrigerate for at least 4 hours or overnight.
        • When ready to serve, ladle into bowls and top each bowl with fresh berries and nuts. Serve while still cold.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 3 cups of chia seed yogurt pudding that is ideal for 2 generous servings. The below nutritional values are per serving, but they do not include the optional toppings.
        • Yogurt: While I prefer whole milk yogurt, you can use low-fat yogurt as well. Greek yogurt can also be used, but you might need to add a bit more liquid to thin it out. Finally, vegan yogurt can also be used.
        • Adjust consistency: In my experience, the ratio of 1 cup of yogurt + 1 cup of milk to ¼ cup of chia seed provides the best pudding-like texture. As always, you can adjust the quantities to suit your taste. More seeds will equal a thicker chia pudding.
        • Make it your own: This is a delicious base recipe for chia pudding in which you add your toppings of choice. Have fun with different flavors like almond extract, unsweetened cocoa powder, protein powder, or matcha powder; swirl in your favorite fruit jam like strawberry or raspberry, or add texture and crunch with coconut flakes, hemp seeds, almonds, cashews, and more.
        • Make Ahead / Meal Prep: Make a big batch at the beginning of the week, portion it into individual containers (or mason jars), and your overnight chia pudding with yogurt is ready to enjoy throughout the week.
        • Storage: Store chia pudding covered with plastic wrap or in an airtight container or mason jar in the fridge for up to 5 days.
        • Reuse: The mixture will thicken the longer it sits. Add a splash of milk or water to thin it out to your desired consistency.
        • This recipe is adapted from Giada’s Chia Seed Pudding recipe.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 255kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 16mg | Sodium: 224mg | Potassium: 324mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 133IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 454mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-chia-pudding/feed/ 70
        Ayran – Turkish Salty Yogurt Drink https://foolproofliving.com/ayran-turkish-yogurt-drink/ https://foolproofliving.com/ayran-turkish-yogurt-drink/#comments Wed, 15 May 2024 20:46:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75384 What is Ayran? If you have visited Turkey or been to a Turkish restaurant, you have probably heard about the…]]>

        What is Ayran?

        If you have visited Turkey or been to a Turkish restaurant, you have probably heard about the popular Turkish yoghurt drink, ayran. It is one of the most popular drinks we serve with any spicy meal, whether kabob or vegetables. Made up of only three ingredients: yogurt, water, and salt, a serving of Turkish ayran is considered one of the best ways to treat yourself on a hot summer day.

        A glass of froth ayran in a glass from the front view.

        While it originated from Turkey, many Balkan, Central Asia, Middle East, and Mediterranean countries, such as Greece, Bulgaria, Armenia, Iran, Lebanon, and Iraq, also serve this salted yogurt drink with minor variations. For example, the Iranian version of ayran, called doogh, is often served with fresh mint, while the Arabs make a similar version and call it laban. The Greek version, ariani, is also very similar to ayran.

        If you are familiar with Indian lassi, you might recognize the similarity in the texture of both drinks. However, unlike ayran, lassi is usually served sweet, often flavored with sugar, honey, or fresh fruit. 

        Ayran Ingredients

        The good news is that this Turkish yogurt drink recipe uses only 3 simple ingredients you probably already have on hand. You will need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Plain Yogurt: I recommend using plain whole milk yogurt with no added sugars. You can also use low-fat or no-fat yogurt, but low-fat yogurt may not achieve the traditional creamy consistency. On the other hand, you can use plain Greek yogurt (also known as strained yogurt), but since it is thicker, you will need to use more water to adjust its consistency.
        • Cold Water: To keep this Mediterranean yogurt drink super refreshing, using cold water is essential. Some recipes suggest using ice, but I don’t recommend it as it can dilute the drink, affecting its consistency and texture.
        • Salt: You can use kosher, table, or sea salt. 

        Optional Add-Ins & Substitutions:

        • Mint: During the summer months, I usually add a few leaves of chopped fresh mint to my ayran recipe. You can, however, also use dried mint if that is all you have.
        • Sparkling water: Growing up, we never added sparkling water to ayran, but with carbonated drinks becoming more popular, I see many people making this yogurt drink with sparkling water instead of regular water. This simple substitution for water can make it more palatable for people who enjoy carbonated beverages and are looking for a unique twist on the classic Ayran Turkish drink recipe.
        • Cucumber: Again, it’s not traditional, but I’ve seen a few slices of cucumber added as a garnish to make it look appetizing and reiterate that it is a salty drink.

        How To Make Turkish Ayran?

        The best part about making this Turkish yogurt recipe is that it takes no more than 5 minutes. I prefer a whisk, but you can also use an electric blender. Whipping it up in a blender is especially handy if serving it to a crowd or making a large batch. Below are the steps to make it both ways:

        A collage of images showing how to make ayran drink.
        1. Ensure a smooth texture: Place yogurt in a large bowl or measuring cup and whisk until it is smooth and free of lumps. 
        2. Whisk: Add water and salt to the bowl and whisk vigorously until combined. Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary. Alternatively, you can put all of the ingredients in a blender and blend until fully combined.
        3. Chill: Tightly cover your yogurt milk drink in a glass bottle with a lid (or stretch film). Store in the fridge until ready to serve or for up to 2 days.
        4. Garnish & serve: Give it a good shake before pouring it into glasses, and garnish with fresh mint leaves if desired.

        What To Serve with Ayran?

        This Middle Eastern yogurt drink pairs wonderfully with several dishes, especially those with bold flavors and spices. Whether you’re having a meaty feast, a vegetarian delight, or a simple snack, ayran enhances the flavors and provides a refreshing balance to any dish it’s served with. Here are some delicious options to serve alongside this refreshing yogurt drink:

        • Kabobs: Whether you serve Shish Taouk, Chicken Shawarma, Doner Kebab, or Oven-Baked Beef Kabobs, ayran is the perfect accompaniment, providing a cooling and balancing effect.
        • Meat dishes: Popular Turkish dishes like Turkish Stuffed Eggplant (aka Karniyarik), Turkish Kofta Meatballs, Roast Rack of Lamb, Turkish Pasta, or lahmacun pair beautifully with this ayran yoghurt drink. The cold and refreshing drink cut through the richness of these hearty meat dishes (and spicy foods in general), enhancing the overall flavors.
        • Vegetarian Dishes: This drinkable yogurt drink pairs well with vegetarian dishes like Bulgur Wheat Pilaf, Spinach Borek, and Turkish Tabbouleh. Its tangy flavors complement the savoriness of these dishes, adding a refreshing touch to your meal.
        • Snack: If you want to transport yourself to Turkey within seconds, you need to do what Turks do: Serve ayran with simit (also known as Turkish bagel) for a simple yet satisfying snack. The chewy, sesame-coated bread and the cool, salty yogurt drink are delightful at any time of the day.
        Middle eastern yogurt drink served in glasses and in a glass jar.

        FAQs

        What does ayran taste like?

        Ayran has a refreshing, tangy flavor with a slight saltiness. The yogurt gives it a creamy texture, while the added water makes it light and easy to drink. 

        Are ayran and kefir the same thing?

        No, ayran and kefir are not the same things. Kefir is a fermented milk drink made using kefir grains, which contain a mix of bacteria and yeast, while ayran is made by mixing yogurt, water, and salt. They both have a tangy taste, but kefir offers a slightly effervescent texture due to the fermentation process.

        What are the benefits of drinking ayran?

        The traditional Turkish drink offers several health benefits. Since it is yogurt-based beverage, it is high in protein and a great source of essential nutrients, including calcium, potassium, and vitamin B12. Additionally, its salt content can help replenish electrolytes lost through sweat, making it particularly beneficial during hot weather or after physical activity. Lastly, the yogurt in ayran provides probiotics, improving gut health and aiding digestion.

        Other Must-Try Turkish Recipes

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        A glass of Ayran Turkish yogurt drink from the front view.
        Print

        Ayran Recipe – Turkish Yogurt Drink

        Enjoy the deliciously refreshing Ayran, a Turkish salted yogurt drink made from yogurt, water, and a pinch of salt. Serve it as an accompaniment to your favorite kabobs and meat dishes, or treat yourself to a healthy midday snack to cool off on a hot day.
        Course Non Alcoholic Drink
        Cuisine Turkish
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 75kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 cups whole milk plain yogurt unsweetened
        • 1 cup cold water
        • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

        Optional Add-Ins

        • A few leaves fresh mint chopped or dried mint

        Instructions

        • Place yogurt in a bowl and whisk until smooth and no lumps remain.
        • Add water and salt to the bowl and whisk vigorously until combined and the texture is creamy and smooth.
        • Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary.
        • If preferred, add in some chopped mint for flavor. Pour into a glass jar, cover tightly with a lid, and chill until ready to serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 4-5 cups of ayran, ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional information below is per serving.
        • Yogurt: While I highly recommend using whole milk yogurt, you can also use low- or nonfat yogurt, though it won’t be as creamy. Greek yogurt can also be used, but you should use more water (about 1/2 to 3/4 cup) to get the right consistency. 
        • Storage: This yogurt drink will keep fresh in the fridge for up to 2-3 days as long as it is kept in an airtight container (such as a glass jar with a tight-fitting lid). Be sure to shake well before serving.
        • Foam on top: The ayran served in most kebab restaurants has a layer of foam on top, filled with visible air bubbles. Many Turkish people consider frothy ayran a sign of freshness and consider it the best part of the drink. When making it at home, the way to achieve bubbles on top is to whisk or shake it vigorously.
        • Adjust consistency and taste: The ideal yogurt-to-water ratio is 2 to 1. In other words, to make 4 servings of this yogurt drink, I use 2 cups of yogurt and 1 cup of water. However, you can adjust the consistency to your preference by adding more or less of each ingredient. The same goes for the amount of salt you use.
        • Serve it chilled: This drink is best served cold. For the best results, make a batch and store it in a glass jar in the fridge. You can also put the ingredients in a cocktail shaker with a few ice cubes, shake it vigorously, and strain it into a glass. Be sure to strain out the ice to avoid diluting the drink.
        • Keep it in the fridge: Since ayran is a dairy-based drink, it should be stored in the fridge (At or below 40°F (4°C)) to prevent bacterial growth and spoilage.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 75kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 16mg | Sodium: 205mg | Potassium: 190mg | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 121IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 150mg | Iron: 0.1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/ayran-turkish-yogurt-drink/feed/ 1
        Shawarma Spice Blend Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/shawarma-spice-blend/ https://foolproofliving.com/shawarma-spice-blend/#comments Fri, 10 May 2024 16:35:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75203 What is Shawarma? Shawarma is among the most popular meat dishes in Middle Eastern and Mediterranean cuisine and is known…]]>

        What is Shawarma?

        Shawarma is among the most popular meat dishes in Middle Eastern and Mediterranean cuisine and is known for its earthy, warm, and savory flavors. To make traditional shawarma, chefs cook a large cut of marinated meat—usually chicken, lamb, beef, or turkey—on a vertical rotisserie rod (also known as a vertical spit), which slowly rotates to cook the protein incrementally. When the outer layer is ready, the chefs will slice off thin slices of meat, which they then add to the final dish.

        Shawarma spice mix in a jar with a spoon.

        One of the most iconic ways to serve shawarma is in a kind of Mediterranean “wrap” or “pita pocket.” In other words, people often begin with a piece of pita bread, lavash, or any other flatbread. They then spread the grain with a layer of cool, tangy Yogurt Tahini Sauce and top it with a combination of shawarma meat, tomatoes, cucumber, salad greens, and pickles to ensure it has tons of flavor. People often eat this dish with a side of creamy Hummus, garlic sauce, or another herby grain, like Tabbouleh.

        Though “shawarma” usually refers to the meat in this dish, the meat usually carries the complex, sweet-yet-spicy taste of the shawarma seasoning blend used during the seasoning/marination process. Because of the mix’s robust taste, many use this seasoning mixture for other uses, from veggie seasoning to flavoring their grains.

        What is in Shawarma Seasoning?

        Diverse and flavorful, shawarma seasoning ingredients use all-natural spices to achieve its fresh, complex taste. Better yet, you can probably find all these ingredients in your spice cabinet, making this mixture a must-have in any kitchen.

        A photo of spices showing what is in shawarma spice.
        • Ground cumin
        • Ground coriander
        • Paprika: We used mild-tasting paprika, but smoked paprika can also be used.
        • Garlic powder
        • Black pepper
        • Ground turmeric
        • Ground cloves
        • Ground cinnamon
        • Ground nutmeg
        • Ground cardamom

        Optional Add-Ins

        Though we didn’t use it in our original recipe, these additional shawarma seasoning ingredients are a great way to add deliciously smoky, herbaceous undertones to your final dish. Feel free to use ½ teaspoon of each spice, taste it, and add more if necessary.

        • Dried oregano
        • Cayenne pepper
        • Chili powder
        • Sumac

        How to Make Shawarma Spice?

        It couldn’t be simpler to make this easy diy shawarma spice blend. In fact, you can whip up this five-star mix in less than five minutes!

        A collage of images showing how to make shawarma spice.
        1. Combine the mix of spices: Add the ground cumin, ground coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, turmeric, ground cloves, ground cinnamon, ground nutmeg, and ground cardamom to a small mixing bowl. Whisk the ingredients together until thoroughly combined.
        2. Use and store: Use the spice blend in your identified recipe. Or, if you’re planning to use it later, store it in an airtight container or jar in a cool, dry place for up to six months.

        How to Use Shawarma Spice Mix?

        One of my favorite things about this authentic shawarma seasoning recipe is how many ways you can use it—any day of the week! Use this five-minute rub to make my chicken shawarma seasoning, or add it to your go-to sides for an unforgettable spread.

        • Use it to marinate meat or as a dry rub: You can effortlessly elevate any favorite protein—chicken (like my Chicken Shawarma recipe), beef, lamb, turkey, or fish—by infusing your meat with the warm and savory flavor of this delicious spice blend. If you want a dry rub, sprinkle an even layer of the shawarma mix over every side of your meat. Or, for a marinade, combine the homemade shawarma spice mix with oil and lemon juice and let your meat rest in it for a few hours—or even overnight!
        • Roasting or grilling vegetables: If you can’t get enough of the iconic shawarma flavor but aren’t in the mood for meat, I have great news: This tasty seasoning is also a must-have for dozens of other cooked veggies, including cauliflower, eggplant, potatoes, and mushrooms.
        • Legumes and grains: Another great way to use this shawarma spice mix recipe is to sprinkle it over your favorite grain and legume recipes. I particularly love adding this flavorful addition to roasted chickpeas and using it as a seasoning for my hearty and tender Bulgur Pilaf.

        FAQs

        It doesn’t matter whether you’re making this authentic shawarma seasoning for the first time or have made it one hundred times before. This handy FAQ will answer all your questions, whether they’re about spice substitutes or general taste profiles.

        What is a good shawarma spice blend substitute?

        If you’re not in the mood to make this homemade shawarma spice but still want to achieve classic Middle Eastern flavors, you’re in luck! My fresh and herby Mediterranean Spice Mix and earthy Baharat Spice Blend both make excellent substitutes.

        What does shawarma taste like?

        Generally, a shawarma seasoning mix recipe strikes a complex, savory balance of warm, aromatic, and slightly spicy flavors.

        Is shawarma spicy?

        Like other Mediterranean homemade spice blends, shawarma spice is only mildly spicy, often stemming from its warmer, more peppery ingredients. However, if you want to reduce the level of spiciness in your mix, you may consider reducing the amount of the “spicier” ingredients, like paprika and cloves.

        Recipes To Use Shawarma Seasoning

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make your own homemade shawarma seasoning following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Shawarma spice mix in a jar with a spoon.
        Print

        Shawarma Spice Blend Recipe

        Make this homemade shawarma spice blend recipe and add it to chicken, beef, lamb, fish, or vegetables to incorporate the aromatic flavors of the Middle East and Mediterranean in your daily cooking.
        Course Seasoning
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 4 tablespoons
        Calories 14kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
        • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
        • 1 teaspoon paprika
        • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
        • 1 teaspoon black pepper
        • 1 teaspoon ground turmeric
        • ½ teaspoon ground cloves
        • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
        • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
        • ½ teaspoon ground cardamom

        Instructions

        • Place ground cumin, coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, turmeric, cloves, cinnamon, nutmeg, and cardamom in a small airtight jar.
        • Mix until thoroughly combined.
        • You can use it immediately or cover it tightly with the lid and store it in a dark, dry, and cool place for up to 6 months.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 3 ½ tablespoons to  4 tablespoons of Shawarma seasoning. The nutritional values below are for the whole recipe.
        • Multiply the recipe: Making large batches of this shawarma mixture is a great way to ensure you always have it on hand whenever your recipe calls for it. Therefore, please feel free to multiply this spice recipe and store the extra mixture for later use.
        • Addition of salt: Though some recipes may include salt among their shawarma spices, I prefer to omit this ingredient. Saltiness is hard to adjust in recipes—especially depending on your base—so I prefer adding salt according to the recipe I use.
        • Use the freshest spices: It’s no secret that fresh spices have a brighter, more potent flavor than old or dried spices. Therefore, I highly encourage you to ensure your pre-ground seasonings are as fresh and flavorful as possible before adding them to your shawarma seasoning mix. Or—if possible—you may also grind your whole spices with a spice grinder for extra flavor.
        • Experiment with the amount used: Depending on your desired recipe and the serving size of your dish, you might want to use more or less of this shawarma spice mix. Our rule of thumb is to use two tablespoons per pound of meat, but you may add more or less if you prefer a stronger or milder flavor. (Keep in mind that if you make this recipe as written, you’ll come out with 3.5-4 tablespoons of seasoning, which is ideal for two pounds of meat.)
        • Toast your spices (if you have the time): While it may sound like an extra step, toasting your spices before grinding will take this spice blend to the next level. To do so, add the whole spices to a dry skillet and toast, stirring often, over medium-low heat for about 4-5 minutes.  Then, you can use your spice grinder to grind them to a fine powder. Remember that following our recipe, you can use an equal amount of any whole spice, but the amount may be slightly less or more than its version made with ground spices.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 14kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.5g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 3mg | Potassium: 62mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 257IU | Vitamin C: 0.4mg | Calcium: 19mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/shawarma-spice-blend/feed/ 3
        Raw Carrot Salad https://foolproofliving.com/raw-carrot-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/raw-carrot-salad/#comments Thu, 18 Apr 2024 17:31:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=74840 The original raw carrot salad became virtually famous based on the teachings of Dr. Ray Peat. According to Dr. Peat’s…]]>

        The original raw carrot salad became virtually famous based on the teachings of Dr. Ray Peat. According to Dr. Peat’s research, raw carrots contain a unique fiber that, when mixed with a touch of healthy fats (like coconut oil) and vinegar, can bind to excess estrogen and safely eliminate it from the body. This is good for hormone balance and gut health. And with this raw carrot salad recipe, it’s so easy to incorporate this health trend into your diet.

        If you are wondering what to do with grated carrots, check out a few of our other raw carrot recipes, including Kale and Apple Slaw and Yogurt Coleslaw.

        A bowl of shaved raw carrot salad in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients

        The good news is that this vegan carrot salad uses just a handful of ingredients you probably already have on hand:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Carrots: If possible, use organic carrots, as these will provide the highest nutritional content and a good source of fiber. You will need about 3 large carrots (or 10 oz total). I simply cut off the ends, remove the outer layer, and slice them lengthwise with a vegetable peeler. You can also slice your carrots with a julienne peeler, grate them on a box grater, or use the large grating attachment on your food processor.
        • Fresh herbs: I love a ton of fresh parsley in this carrot vinegar salad, but you can also try any of your favorite soft herbs, such as fresh cilantro, mint, or dill.
        • Oil: I use extra-virgin olive oil, but you can also use coconut oil or avocado oil.
        • Vinegar: I love the slightly sweet tang of apple cider vinegar, but other options include rice vinegar, white wine vinegar, or red wine vinegar. The flavor profile will change based on what type of vinegar you use.
        • Sweetener: I like to use maple syrup to keep it vegan, but a touch of honey or agave could also work.
        • Seasonings: Go for a simple blend of ground cumin, sea salt, and black pepper.
        • Nuts and Seeds: I like a final sprinkle of sesame seeds, which I find adds a subtle crunch and nutty flavor. Other options include sunflower seeds, sliced almonds, or pumpkin seeds (raw pepitas).

        Optional Add-Ins

        • Lemon juice or lime juice: A squeeze of fresh citrus juice is an easy way to brighten up this peeled carrot salad recipe. You can use this addition in place of the vinegar or in addition to vinegar.
        • Dijon mustard: To give the salad a little kick, add a very small amount, maybe about ½ teaspoons.
        • Soy sauce: To give this carrot salad an Asian twist, you can use soy sauce instead of salt.
        • Green onions: If you can’t imagine a salad without onions, a small amount of (¼ cup) chopped scallions would be a great addition.

        How to Make Raw Carrot Salad?

        This healthy carrot salad comes together in a few easy steps. Here’s how I like to make it:

        A collage of images showing how to make raw carrot salad.
        1. Shred carrots: Cut off the ends of your carrots, then peel the outer skin with a vegetable peeler. Then, continue to slice them into carrot ribbons as evenly as possible. Transfer the sliced carrots to a large bowl.
        2. Make the dressing: Add the olive oil, apple cider vinegar, maple syrup, cumin, salt, and ground black pepper to a small bowl or mason jar. Whisk or shake until combined.
        3. Toss: Drizzle the dressing over the shaved carrots and give it a gentle toss.
        4. Garnish: If using, sprinkle with chopped fresh parsley and sesame seeds. Serve cold or at room temperature.

        How to Make Ahead and Store?

        After testing the carrot salad with vinegar several times, we found the salad was better the next day, making it a great make-ahead recipe. Here are my best make-ahead and storage tips for this raw carrot recipe:

        • Make Ahead: Prepare the salad up to 1 day in advance and store it in an airtight container in the fridge. This gives a chance for all the flavors to marry together.
        • Storage: The dressed carrot salad will keep for up to 3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. Give it a good toss just before serving.
        Person sprinkling fresh carrot salad with sesame seeds.

        Serving Suggestions

        According to dieticians, it is best to eat this cold carrot salad on an empty stomach to reap its benefits, which is why I usually eat it as a light lunch. That being said, it makes a great side dish with any of the following:

        Aysegul’s Recipe Tips

        If you look at the recipe below, you’ll see that this shaved carrot salad recipe is easy to make with minimal ingredients. However, we learned a few tips as we were testing this recipe.

        • Best way to slice carrots: I prefer to shred carrots lengthwise using a vegetable peeler to make this simple carrot salad. However, you can also use a julienne peeler for a more French-style salad, the large holes of a box grater, or the shredding blade on your food processor to achieve different textures.
        • Let it rest before serving: The natural sweetness of the carrots and dressing tastes better the longer they have a chance to mingle together, so I recommend making this grated carrot salad for at least a few hours, or up to two days, ahead of time.
        • Taste for seasoning: Start with the recommended amount of salt, pepper, and cumin, and then add more to your liking. I added a good dose of salt right before serving.

        FAQs

        How do you cut carrots for raw carrot salad?

        First, cut off the ends, then peel away the outer skin. Then, slice evenly but thinly with a vegetable peeler, julienne peeler, large holes of a box grater, or the grating attachment on your food processor.

        What are the benefits of raw carrot salad?

        According to Dr. Ray Peat, the benefits of eating raw carrot salad regularly include improved digestive health and optimal liver and thyroid function. The fiber in raw carrots promotes bowel regularity and enhances digestion. Additionally, by aiding in the removal of excess estrogens and endotoxins, consuming this salad regularly helps reduce the burden on the liver, thereby supporting both liver and thyroid health.

        If you make this Raw Carrot Salad recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a wonderful way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Raw carrot salad in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Raw Carrot Salad Recipe

        Here's a Raw Carrot Salad that you can make in under 10 minutes. Vegan and gluten-free, this healthy salad is perfect for a light lunch or side dish with any of your main dishes.
        Course Lunch, Dinner
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 72kcal

        Ingredients

        • 3 medium-sized carrots washed, ends trimmed (10 oz/287 g)
        • ½ cup parsley roughly chopped (can substitute with cilantro or mint)
        • 1 tablespoon olive oil or coconut oil
        • 2 tablespoon apple cider vinegar or rice vinegar
        • 1 tablespoon maple syrup
        • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
        • 1 teaspoon sea salt or kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • 1 teaspoon sesame seeds optional

        Instructions

        • Using a vegetable peeler, peel the outer skin of your carrots. Then continue to to grate them into ribbons. Transfer them to a large salad bowl.
        • Add the parsley to the bowl.
        • Prepare the dressing: Place the olive oil, apple cider vinegar, maple syrup, cumin, salt, and ground black pepper in a mason jar. Put the lid on and shake. Set aside.
        • Drizzle the shaved carrots with the dressing and give it a gentle toss using tongs.
        • Sprinkle with sesame seeds, if using. Serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 3-4 cups of carrot salad, which is ideal for 4 servings as a side dish and 2 servings as a light meal. The nutritional values below are per serving (of 4.)
        • Slicing carrots: While I shave the carrots into ribbons, you can shred it using a box grater or a food processor.
        • Let it rest: If you have the time, let the salad rest in the fridge for a few hours before serving. Resting time allows the flavors to meld together and make it even more delicious.
        • Storage: You can store leftovers in the fridge for up to 3 days.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 72kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 619mg | Potassium: 213mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 8279IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/raw-carrot-salad/feed/ 3
        Kale Brussel Sprout Salad https://foolproofliving.com/brussels-sprout-kale-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/brussels-sprout-kale-salad/#comments Tue, 16 Apr 2024 17:34:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15238 Transform raw Brussels sprouts into one of your new favorite fall salads—alongside my Kale Waldorf Salad and Apple Kale Slaw.…]]>

        Transform raw Brussels sprouts into one of your new favorite fall salads—alongside my Kale Waldorf Salad and Apple Kale Slaw.

        You can serve restaurant-quality eats for any weeknight dinner, green side dish for thanksgiving, or quick lunch with this crowd-pleasing dish. Inspired by the classic brussel sprout and kale salad recipe featured by popular sites like Bon Appetit, Whole Foods, NY Times, and Epicurious, my recipe will delight your tastebuds whether you’re a beginner or an expert chef.

        A kale Brussel sprout salad in a bowl with spoons from the top view.

        Ingredients

        This kale Brussel sprouts salad comes together in three sets of basic ingredients:

        ingredients for a kale salad with Brussels sprouts from the top view.
        • For the salad ingredients, you’ll need:
          • Tuscan Kale: Because of its mild flavor and popularity in grocery stores, lacinato kale is my go-to for this easy recipe. If you’d like to try other Types of Kale, curly kale has a sharp, peppery flavor that will work great in your kale Brussel salad.
          • Brussels Sprouts: You can shred brussels sprouts like I do it here or buy packaged and already shaved sprouts from the store.
          • Grated Parmesan Cheese: I love the salty and umami flavors of parmesan cheese, but Pecorino Romano goat cheese, blue cheese, and feta cheese would also work.
          • Dried or fresh fruit: I used dried cranberries, but pomegranate seeds, fresh apples, raisins, and craisins also make the perfect additions to this simple kale and Brussels sprouts salad.
        • To make the dressing, gather:
          • Olive oil
          • Fresh lemon juice
          • Vinegar: I used apple cider vinegar, but balsamic vinegar or white wine vinegar would also work. If you are a fan of Cracker Barrel’s brussel sprout and kale salad recipe you can use my Dijon Maple Vinaigrette instead.
          • Dijon mustard
          • Fresh minced garlic cloves
          • Onion: I used a minced shallot, but you can use red onions as well.
          • Kosher salt and black pepper. 
        • For the nuts: I suggest using sliced almonds, chopped walnuts, or chopped pecans. Alternatively, you can use candied nuts like candied pecans! You could also swap out the nuts for seeds, like pumpkin seeds or sunflower seeds, to accommodate nut allergies.

        Variations & Optional Add-Ins

        Take this shaved brussel sprout and kale salad to the next level with countless tasty additions.

        • For meat lovers: Turn your veggie-packed side into a healthy meal by adding a nutritious protein. Top your salad with Turkey Bacon for a kick of crispy bacon flavor, or add Baked Chicken Breasts for a succulent addition.
        • Serve it warm: If you prefer a warm kale and Brussel sprout salad, you can sautee the vegetables in a large skillet until they are lightly cooked. Simply heat a tablespoon of oil in a large skillet, add the chopped kale and sautee until lightly warmed. Transfer it to a bowl and follow the same steps for the Brussel sprouts.

        How to Make this Recipe?

        Kale brussel sprout cranberry salad is among my favorite easy salad recipes to whip up on busy weeknights and special occasions alike. You can even hone your veggie prep by checking out my foolproof guide on How to Cut Kale.

        A person showing how to make a kale salad with dressing from the top view.
        1. Prepare the kale: Wash and rinse the kale leaves under cold water, and dry them in a salad spinner. Then, use a sharp knife to remove the stems and thinly slice kale leaves. Place them in a large bowl.
        2. Shave the Brussels sprouts: Rinse the Brussel sprouts under cold water using a colander, dry them, and remove their outermost leaves. Then, place them in a food processor fitted with a slicing blade. Switch on the machine and feed the Brussels sprouts into the tube. Once shaved, transfer the Brussels sprouts from the food processor into the salad bowl with the kale. 
        3. Make the lemon vinaigrette: Whisk together the olive oil, lemon juice, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, garlic, shallot, salt, and black pepper in a small bowl.
        4. Drizzle the vegetables: Gently pour the dressing over the kale and Brussel sprouts. Toss the mixture such that each leaf has an even coating of the dressing. This even layer will help soften the kale, but if you want, you can also massage kale and sprouts gently to ensure they are fully mixed with the dressing. Set the vegetables aside and let them rest.
        A person showing how to assemble a kale salad with toasted almonds from the top view.
        1. Toast the almonds: Place the almonds in a small skillet over medium heat. Toast the nuts for 4-5 minutes, frequently stirring, until they turn fragrant and lightly golden brown. Alternatively, you can toast them in a preheated 350-degree F. oven on a baking sheet for 5-7 minutes, turning once during the process.
        2. Add the toppings: Top the shaved brussel sprout salad with Parmesan cheese, toasted almonds, and cranberries if using. Toss the mixture until evenly combined, then serve.

        How to Make Ahead and Store

        This Lemony brussel sprout salad is as easy to make ahead and store as it is to prepare (hello, easy kale storage!). Here’s how I do it:

        • Make ahead: To make this kale Brussels sprouts salad ahead of time, prepare each component (i.e., salad, dressing, and toppings) one day in advance. Begin by washing, chopping, and shaving the kale and Brussel sprouts, and store them in an airtight container in the fridge. Then, mix and cover dressing and store it in a separate airtight container, such as a mason jar, in the refrigerator. Toast the almonds and store them at room temperature. Lastly, shred the Parmesan cheese and store it in the fridge. Combine the ingredients just before serving.
        • Store: To store your salad with Brussel sprouts, place it in an airtight container in the fridge. If you have not yet added the dressing, the veggies will stay fresh for 3-4 days. However, if you have already added the dressing, your salad mixture will last up to two days. You may also extend your salad’s storage time by storing each salad component separately and dressing individual servings as needed.

        What to Serve with this Salad

        With so many tantalizing flavors, this Brussel sprout and kale recipe makes the ultimate side dish for dozens of tasty mains. Here are just a few delicious recipes to try with your new favorite salad:

        • Meat Dishes: My favorite way to serve this kale Brussels sprouts salad is with a savory, meaty main. Ground Turkey Meatloaf is a flavorful classic even picky eaters love, while Baked Chicken Parmesan and Chicken Fricassee will perfectly complement your light salad with rich and succulent flavor.
        • Vegetarian Dinners: Fill your plate with nutritious and eco-conscious foods by pairing your brussel sprout salad with tasty vegetarian recipes. Quinoa Chili and Mexican Quinoa will balance your kale salad with hearty spice, and Stuffed Acorn Squash is a festive, gluten-free option everyone can enjoy.
        A salad with kale and Brussel sprouts in a bowl from the side view.

        FAQs

        Can brussel sprouts be eaten raw in a salad?

        Absolutely! Just be sure to shred your raw brussel sprouts before adding them to your recipe.

        Do you rinse off brussel sprouts before cooking?

        Yes, I recommend rinsing your brussels sprouts under cold water before cooking with them. I also recommend removing each sprout’s dark, outermost leaves to ensure maximum freshness.

        Similar Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Kale Brussels Sprout Salad recipe or any other salad recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        A bowl of brussels sprouts and kale salad recipe from the top view
        Print

        Kale Brussels Sprout Salad Recipe

        This nutrient-dense Kale Brussel Sprout Salad is packed with hearty greens, toasted almonds, cheese, and sweet cranberries, all tossed in a tangy homemade Dijon dressing. Enjoy it for a light meal or serve it as a fall-inspired side dish.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 438kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Salad:

        • 1 bunch Tuscan Kale or Curly Kale ~1 lb
        • 1 pound Brussels sprouts finely chopped – I used my food processor
        • 1 cup grated Parmesan cheese
        • ½ cup dried cranberries or pomegranate seeds optional

        For The Dressing:

        • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • ¼ cup lemon juice
        • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar
        • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 clove garlic minced
        • ½ small shallot minced (about 2 tablespoons) or red onion
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        For The Nuts:

        • 1 cup sliced or whole almonds or chopped walnuts or pecans

        Instructions

        • Prep the kale: Wash and rinse the kale leaves under cold water. Dry in a salad spinner. Remove the leaves from the center ribs and chop thinly. Place it in a large salad bowl.
        • Shave Brussel sprouts*: Place Brussel sprouts in a food processor fitted with the shredding blade. Turn the machine on and feed brussels sprouts into the tube and let the machine do all the work for you. Transfer the now-shaved Brussels sprouts into the bowl with kale.
        • Make the dressing by whisking together olive oil, lemon juice, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, garlic, shallot, and salt and pepper in a small bowl.
        • Drizzle the vegetables with the dressing and give it a toss to make sure all the leaves are evenly coated with the dressing. Set aside and let it rest.
        • Place almonds in a small empty skillet over medium heat. Toast for 4-5 minutes, keeping a very close eye on and stirring frequently, until fragrant and lightly browned. Chop them up into large bite-size pieces.
        • To assemble, sprinkle the brussel sprout and kale salad with toasted almonds, parmesan cheese, and cranberries (or pomegranate arils), if using. Toss to combine and serve.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 8-7 cups of salad that is ideal for serving 6 adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • When it comes to shredding brussels sprouts, you have two other options:
          • Use a sharp pairing knife and slice one by one as thinly as you can. This takes around 10-15 minutes for a pound of raw brussels sprouts.
          • Use a mandolin. This method produces evenly sliced Brussels spouts and takes about 8-10 minutes to shred a pound of brussels sprouts. If you need advice on a good mandoline, I just purchased this one (affiliate link), and I love it.
        • To make ahead: To make this salad ahead of time, prepare each component (i.e., salad, dressing, and toppings) one day in advance. Assemble it right before serving.
        • To Store: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container for up to 2 days. You may also extend your salad’s storage time by storing each salad component separately and dressing individual servings as needed.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 438kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 22g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 535mg | Potassium: 537mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 901IU | Vitamin C: 70mg | Calcium: 253mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/brussels-sprout-kale-salad/feed/ 28
        Mint Sauce for Lamb https://foolproofliving.com/mint-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/mint-sauce/#comments Wed, 03 Apr 2024 20:39:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=74652 If you’re looking for a creamier condiment to brighten your menu, you can check out my Mint Yogurt Sauce and…]]>

        If you’re looking for a creamier condiment to brighten your menu, you can check out my Mint Yogurt Sauce and Chimichurri with Mint to strike the perfect balance between tangy, cool, and luscious flavors.

        Mint sauce for lamb in a small jar with a spoon.

        Ingredients You’ll Need

        One of the best parts about making mint sauce for lamb is how few ingredients you need to get the freshest, most vibrant taste. In fact, you likely already have these simple ingredients in your kitchen, making this recipe a must whether you’re preparing for a special occasion or a quick weeknight dinner.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Fresh mint: I highly suggest using fresh mint leaves or common garden mint for this mint sauce recipe. However, you should be able to find fresh mint at your local grocery store. If you are growing your own mint, then peppermint or spearmint varieties would both work. 
        • Sugar: There are many ways to add a touch of sweetness to this iconic condiment. Classic mint sauce recipes for lamb use granulated sugar, but you can also use a cane, coconut, or brown sugar if you’re looking for an alternative, pantry-ready option. Or, if you’d prefer a thicker, more complex sweetness, you can also use honey instead of raw sugar. 
        • Kosher salt: A pinch of salt is an excellent addition to this recipe, balancing its sweetness while bringing out its bright mint taste.
        • Vinegar: Adding an acidic component to this lamb mint sauce is critical to enlivening it with savory, tart notes. The original British mint sauce calls for distilled malt vinegar, but you can use white wine vinegar (which I used) or apple cider vinegar if you don’t have any malt vinegar on hand.
        • Boiling water

        How to Make Mint Sauce from Mint Leaves?

        Quick, simple, and hassle-free, this fresh mint sauce recipe is a cinch to make, regardless of your skill level. These step-by-step instructions will guarantee you can serve a fresh, tangy, and savory sauce in less than five minutes.

        Steps showing how to make mint sauce for lamb.
        1. Prepare the mint leaves: Remove the fresh mint leaves from their stems, chop them finely, then transfer them to a bowl. Or, you can put it together in a lidded heat-resistant jar as well.
        2. Add flavorings: Add the sugar, Kosher salt, and white wine vinegar to the chopped mint leaves, then stir the ingredients until thoroughly blended.
        3. Add the water: Slowly pour the boiling water over the other ingredients, then stir the mixture to combine.
        4. Cool: Set the jar aside and let it cool for a minimum of 30 minutes. 
        5. Serve: Serve the cooled fresh mint sauce alongside the rest of your menu. Or, if you plan to use the condiment later, cover and refrigerate it until ready to use.

        How to Store and Freeze?

        Once you learn how to make mint sauce for lamb, you’ll want to use it alongside all your favorite recipes. These pro storage tips will ensure your leftover sauce stays as fresh as possible, whether you want to enjoy it later in the week or use it for long-term meal prep.

        • Storage: After transferring it to an airtight container, you can store it in the refrigerator for 2-3 days. However, remember that the sauce will turn a darker green the longer it sits since the fresh mint loses its bright color during storage. Therefore, even if its taste doesn’t diminish, the sauce may not have the same bright green color as when you first prepared it.
        • Freeze: The best way to freeze this easy mint sauce is in individual portions, ensuring effortless use later on. To do so, I recommend pouring the sauce into an ice cube tray and freezing it until solid. Then, remove the cubes from the tray and place them in a freezer-safe container, such as a Ziplock bag, with as much air removed as possible. Replace the container in the freezer, and you can use each individual serving whenever your menu calls for a serving of bright, cool sauce.

        Other Ways to Use Mint Sauce

        No one can deny that mint sauce with lamb is one of the most classic flavor combinations, from a succulent roast dinner to a smoky Grilled Rack of Lamb or Boneless Leg of Lamb Roast

        Mint lamb sauce served with lamb chops as a condiment.

        However, if you have extra sauce or want to try out a new menu, there are dozens of other mouthwatering pairings to try, a few of which I’ve detailed below:

        • Incorporate it into salad dressings: This mint sauce makes a fantastic base for salad dressing recipes. Simply mix a tablespoon or two of this sauce with a bit of lemon juice and olive oil, and you’ll have a zesty, light dressing perfect for a bed of leafy greens.
        • Add it to yogurt: If you’re like me, you love making a quick, gourmet-level dip you can use for all your favorite snacks. You can quickly transform this recipe into a mint dipping sauce by mixing 1-2 tablespoons into a serving of Greek yogurt and serving it with fresh veggies, pita bread, or as part of a mezze platter. 
        • Use it as a marinade for other meats, like chicken or fish: Want to add a brilliantly bright, herby flavor to your meats? Add a bit of this mint sauce to your marinade recipe, and its vibrant notes will beautifully compliment your main dish’s savory, succulent base.
        • Spread over spring vegetables: You can enhance any veggie side by adding a dollop of this minty spread to your plate. In particular, mint sauce makes a great accompaniment for fresh or blanched peas and green beans (especially my Air Fryer Green Beans!), as well as heartier veggies such as roasted potatoes.

        Expert Tips

        Any chef—beginner or professional—can easily make this homemade lamb mint sauce. These tips will ensure you come out with the tastiest sauce possible, including expert suggestions for chopping, flavor adjustment, serving, and more.

        • Mint stems: Since this recipe requires so much mint (you’ll need 1 large bunch), I encourage you to consider your herb’s freshness when deciding whether to use only the leaves or include the stems. Young, freshly picked stems—like the kind you grow in your home garden—are OK to use in this recipe. However, older stems—the kind you might find at your local grocery store—tend to have a harder, woodsier taste, which might negatively impact the overall flavor of your recipe. No matter which type of minty herb you use, it’s essential that you finely chop it to ensure the leaves fully release and evenly distribute their flavors into the sauce.
        • Food processor: You may have seen that other mint sauce recipes ask you to use a food processor or blender to cut up your mint leaves more thoroughly and blend them with the other ingredients. However, though this is technically an option, you can achieve an ideal fineness by chopping your herbs with a sharp knife. Furthermore, processing your mint may bruise the delicate mint leaves, leaving you with a sauce that has a slightly bitter taste rather than the fresh, vibrant flavor that finely hand-chopped mint leaves can offer.
        • Taste and adjust: The best mint sauce for lamb is one that you adjust according to your personal preference. That’s why I highly encourage you to use this recipe as a base, taste it before serving, and add more seasoning as necessary. I should also note that I find most jarred mint sauces to be too sweet for my taste, so I use a minimal amount of added sugar compared to other recipes. Therefore, if you prefer a sweeter profile, you may add more sweeteners to achieve your ideal balance of sweet and acidic flavors.
        • Let it rest: If you have the time, this homemade mint sauce recipe should rest for 30 minutes before serving. This resting time ensures that the ingredients have time to develop and deepen their flavors.
        • Adjust consistency: Depending on how you plan to use your mint lamb sauce recipe, you might want to adjust its consistency. As written, this recipe will result in a thicker sauce—more like a mint paste—which is ideal for serving with lamb dishes due to their rich meat flavor. However, if you’re looking for a thinner consistency, as you might when making a salad dressing or a saucy drizzle, all you need to do is add more water or vinegar to your mixture.
        • Serve it at room temperature: Though I recommend storing it in the refrigerator, it has the best taste and consistency when served at room temperature. Therefore, if you’ve stored it in the fridge beforehand, I suggest taking it out at least 30 minutes before adding it to your dinner table.

        FAQs

        What is mint sauce?

        Mint sauce is a bright, vibrant, herb-based condiment often served with lamb dishes. In addition to fresh mint leaves, this thick sauce usually includes other ingredients, like sugar, vinegar, water, salt, and pepper, to enhance its flavor. Many store this mixture in a small jar, which you can likely find at your local grocery store.

        Is mint jelly the same as mint sauce?

        Though mint jelly and mint sauce are common accompaniments for lamb dishes, they’re not the same. Mint jelly has a more gelatinous texture due to its inclusion of pectin, and it tends to be sweeter because of its higher concentration of sugar—especially American mint jelly. By comparison, mint sauce is more herbaceous, spreadable, and tart. Because of its fresh mint base, it boasts a more potent mint flavor, and its use of vinegar and sugar creates a more vibrant flavor profile than mint jelly.

        Why is mint sauce served with lamb?

        Lamb and mint sauce is such an iconic pairing because the refreshing, minty taste of the sauce often helps balance the richness of lamb—especially back in the day, when lamb had a more pronounced gamey flavor. Together, lamb and mint sauce create a savory, fresh, and succulent base that’s as delicious as it is good for digestion.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this mint sauce recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It will be a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

        Mint sauce for lamb in a jar with a spoon.
        Print

        Mint Sauce for Lamb Recipe

        Easy, fresh, tasty, and homemade mint sauce perfect for roast lamb. All you need are just a few simple ingredients and 5 minutes of your time to make it.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine American Vegan
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Resting time 30 minutes
        Total Time 35 minutes
        Servings 0.5 cup
        Calories 104kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 cups fresh mint rinsed, from 1 large bunch (~ 2 cups (34 grams) packed leaves)
        • 1 tablespoon granulated sugar or cane, coconut, brown sugar, or honey
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • 2 tablespoons white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
        • 3 tablespoons boiling water

        Instructions

        • Remove the fresh mint leaves from their stems*. Finely chop the mint leaves and transfer them to a heat-resistant jar with a lid.
        • Add sugar, kosher salt, and white wine vinegar. Give it a quick stir.
        • Slowly pour in the boiling water and stir to combine.
        • Set it aside and let it cool for at least 30 minutes before serving. If not using right away, cover and refrigerate.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes ½ cup of mint sauce, ideal for serving with two racks of lamb. The nutritional information below is for the full recipe.
        • Mint stems*:  You are welcome to use the stems of freshly picked mint, but I wouldn’t recommend using the stems of store-bought mint as they tend to be woodsy.
        • Adjust the sweetness and consistency: I find most jarred versions of this mint lamb sauce to be too sweet, so this recipe is minimally sweetened. However, you can add more sugar if you prefer. The same goes for the consistency. If you find it too thick, feel free to add more boiling water, 1 teaspoon at a time, until it reaches your desired consistency.
        • Making Ahead and Storage Instructions: You can make this sauce a day in advance and store it in the fridge for up to 2-3 days. Keep in mind, though, that it will lose its bright green color and vibrancy as it sits.
        • Freezing: You can make a large batch of this mint sauce and freeze it using an ice cube tray. Place 1 tablespoon of the mint sauce in each cube and freeze. After they are frozen, remove the cubes from the tray and place them in a storage container in your freezer. You can have the perfect portion anytime you need mint sauce in your favorite recipe. Check out the blog post for other recipe ideas to use your sauce in.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 104kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 0.02g | Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 2335mg | Potassium: 24mg | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin C: 0.3mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 0.3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mint-sauce/feed/ 3
        Mint Yogurt Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/mint-yogurt-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/mint-yogurt-sauce/#comments Tue, 02 Apr 2024 14:29:04 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=74568 If you can’t resist the tangy, deliciousness of Greek yogurt recipes, you are not alone. While this minty condiment is…]]>

        If you can’t resist the tangy, deliciousness of Greek yogurt recipes, you are not alone. While this minty condiment is a no-brainer when you want a yogurt and mint sauce for lamb, there are many other creamy yogurt recipes to enjoy! My Greek Yogurt Dressing will immediately enliven any salad with light, zesty flavors. Or, you can give your meal an authentic Mediterranean spin with the earthy, creamy, and herby notes of my Tzatziki Sauce or Yogurt Tahini Sauce.

        Want to serve a crowd? My Yogurt Ranch Dip is the ultimate solution for party spreads, whether you want to serve chips, veggies, or any other fan-favorite finger foods!

        A small bowl with mint yogurt sauce for lamb from the top view.

        Ingredients

        This mint yogurt sauce recipe requires only six simple ingredients to transform your weeknight menu into a gourmet spread. In fact, you can probably find these ingredients in your pantry already!

        Ingredients for the recipe with text on the image from the top view.
        • Greek yogurt: I recommend using plain, full fat yogurt to give this dip the richest, creamiest flavor. However, you can also use low- or non-fat yogurt if you prefer a lighter alternative and don’t mind a thinner sauce.
        • Fresh mint leaves: Use widely available supermarket fresh mint for this recipe. I recommend removing the leaves from the stems and chopping them up finely. If you are growing your own mint, both spearmint and peppermint leaves would work. 
        • Lemon juice: Fresh lemon juice is my go-to for this yogurt mint sauce, as it has a brighter, deeper citrus flavor than bottled lemon juice. 
        • Fresh garlic cloves: The best way to infuse this mint yogurt recipe with robust, savory flavor is to use finely chopped or pressed fresh garlic. However, if you don’t have fresh garlic handy, one teaspoon of garlic powder will give your sauce similarly bold notes while also blending nicely into your mixture.
        • Kosher salt & black pepper

        Optional Add-Ins & Substitutions

        • Olive oil: If desired, you can drizzle your mint dip with olive oil or mix olive oil with your other ingredients to achieve a richer, more full-bodied blend—just like I do in my Creamy Yogurt Dill Sauce!
        • Spices & dried herbs: Because this sauce is so versatile, I encourage you to customize its seasonings based on the menu you’d like to serve. Ground cumin, cayenne pepper, red pepper flakes, and dried mint are all impeccable additions if you want to lend this condiment nutty, smoky, or spicy undertones.
        • Water: If you want to turn this creamy dip into a thinner mint yoghurt dressing, all you need to do is add a little bit of water to your mixture. Just be sure to taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Then, add your mint yogurt dressing to your favorite salads for the perfect side dish, light lunch, or veggie-packed meal.
        • Vegan yogurt: If you follow a vegan diet, you can still enjoy this mint sauce recipe by substituting the dairy-based Greek yogurt for plain vegan coconut yogurt or almond milk yogurt—as long as it’s unsweetened.

        How to Make Mint Yogurt Sauce?

        Anyone can make this minted yogurt sauce in just five minutes—with only two steps! Below, you’ll find out how to make a refreshingly light, creamy condiment in no time.

        A collage of images showing how to make mint and yogurt sauce.
        1. Combine the ingredients: Add the yogurt, chopped mint, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and black pepper to a small bowl. Whisk the ingredients until they’re thoroughly combined and smooth.
        2. Season and serve: Taste the mint sauce for seasoning, and add more if necessary. When you reach your ideal balance of flavor, your sauce is ready to enjoy!

        How to Store & Freeze?

        This effortless recipe is excellent for easy storage, whether you want to make it ahead of time, use it throughout the week, or save it for future meal prep.

        • Storage: First, transfer this mint yogurt sauce into a tight-fitting jar or airtight container to keep it fresh. Then, store it in the refrigerator for up to five days, being sure to shake or whisk the mixture before using it.
        • Freeze: Technically, you can freeze this sauce for later use. However, yogurt tends to separate when it thaws, so be sure to whisk it before serving it. Furthermore, if you want to store this condiment for individual servings, you can pour it into an ice cube tray and use each frozen “cube” as needed.

        How to Use Mint Sauce With Yogurt?

        This hassle-free recipe is just what you need to compliment your menu with light, minty flavors. Below are some ideas to get you started:

        • Meat dishes 
          • With lamb: In the mood for a classic? Lamb with yogurt mint sauce perfectly balances this succulent, grassy meat with bright, fresh flavors. For example, this mint yogurt sauce makes an exquisite pair with my Roasted Rack of Lamb, Grilled Lamb Rack, and even individual lamb chops if you want a smaller portion size. Or, if you’re in need of a quick lamb dinner, my Pressure Cooker Lambs Shanks make an excellent pairing with this sauce. 
          • Chicken: People often use this Greek sauce for lamb, but it also makes a delectable condiment for countless other Mediterranean meat dishes. Succulent and tender, my Shish Taouk and Oven Chicken Kabobs expertly balance the delicate freshness of my mint dip with their smoky taste. Otherwise, you can drizzle this creamy sauce recipe over a Pita Chicken Wrap or pita sandwiches for a protein-filled meal you can enjoy at picnics, barbecues, and on-the-go meals.
          • Beef: Savory, filling, and flavorful, my Kofte Meatballs and Oven Beef Kabobs are also delicious paired with this mint yogurt dipping sauce. Pour a helping of this light condiment over your hearty beef dish, or serve it on the side for a restaurant-ready menu that comes together in no time.
        • Dipping sauce: One of my favorite ways to use this versatile sauce is as a minted yogurt dip. It makes a delicious dipping sauce with roasted or grilled vegetables or as a part of a mezze platter with other dips like Hummus and Muhammara, of course, with pita bread on the side.
        • Dressing for salad: Because of its light, cool taste, this condiment makes a fantastic mint yogurt salad dressing—especially when you add a little water to thin out its base. Pair this tasty dressing with my Cucumber Greek Yogurt Salad for a refreshingly crisp side everyone can enjoy, or pour it over my Chicken Salad With Greek Yogurt for a hearty yet fresh dish that will delight any potluck.
        • Sandwiches and burgers: Mint yogurt dip isn’t only delicious alongside gourmet mains; it’s also a tasty topping for your favorite sandwich recipes! Spread this sauce on my Steak Sandwich for a juicy, hand-held meal. Or, if you’re in the mood for a vegetarian option, whip up a Bulgur Burger or Falafel Sandwich and top it with mint yogurt sauce for a Middle Eastern dish your dinner guests will love.
        • Vegetable dishes: If you’re looking for a deliciously nutritious dish, try spooning or drizzling this yoghurt and mint sauce over your favorite veggie sides. This light and creamy condiment perfectly accompanies my tender Sauteed Eggplant, or you can drizzle it over my Sauteed Mushrooms and Asparagus or Air-Fried Asparagus for a savory, flavorful side you can customize for any menu.

        Expert Tips

        It is no secret that this is a super simple recipe. However, during our recipe testing, we learned a few things that are worth noting to help you succeed on your first try:

        • Chop mint finely: The key to getting the freshest, most evenly distributed flavor is to chop your mint as finely as possible. Some versions of this recipe use a food processor to achieve a super-fine consistency, but I found this unnecessary. As long as you have a chopping board and a sharp knife, you should be able to get a similarly fine cut in your fresh mint.
        • Stir well: Because this lamb yogurt sauce uses fresh, wet, and dry ingredients, you must stir it thoroughly before serving. Doing so will help avoid clumpiness, give you a super-smooth texture, and ensure a more even distribution of flavor.
        • Experiment with seasonings according to your recipe: Whether you use this Greek yogurt sauce for lamb, chicken, beef kebabs, or any other dish, I recommend playing around with your seasonings and fresh herbs to best complement your menu. Some of my favorite additions are fresh dill, fresh parsley, and fresh cilantro—all of which offer uniquely refreshing, earthy, and grassy notes.
        • Adjust consistency: To make it thicker, add a little more yogurt to the sauce. However, if you prefer a thinner consistency—as you might for a salad dressing or drizzly topping—add a little bit of water to your mixture.
        • Let it rest: If you have the time, I highly recommend letting this mint sauce rest for 30 minutes in the fridge before using it. This resting time will allow the ingredients to more thoroughly infuse the sauce, leading to a deeper, more complex flavor profile.

        FAQs

        Want to know more about this tantalizingly cool sauce? Below, you’ll find answers to all your questions, from alternative preparation methods to consistency adjustments.

        How is this yogurt mint sauce different than Indian mint sauce served at Indian restaurants?

        True, both yogurt mint sauce and Indian mint sauce are yogurt-based sauces that use fresh mint to get their iconic cool taste. However, the Indian version—a popular condiment at Indian restaurants—includes additional ingredients, such as fresh cilantro, lemon juice (or lime juice), green chilies, cumin, sugar, and salt, to achieve a brighter, more herbaceous base.

        How do you thicken mint yogurt sauce?

        Try adding more yogurt to your mixture to thicken your yogurt and mint sauce. Conversely, if you want to thin out your sauce, add a bit of water to your bowl.

        How to make mint yoghurt with mint sauce?

        A great way to cut down on extra prep time when making this yogurt mint sauce recipe is to begin with English mint sauce (either from the store or homemade). Then, add 2-3 tablespoons of this pre-made sauce to your Greek yogurt, stir, and enjoy!

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Mint Yogurt Sauce recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It will be a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

        Yogurt mint sauce in a small bowl with spatula in it.
        Print

        Mint Yogurt Sauce Recipe

        Yogurt mint sauce is a quick, easy, and flavorful condiment to serve with lamb, chicken, beef, or simple roasted vegetables. While we are making it as a sauce here, by making small adjustments you can easily turn it into a dip or dressing as well.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 1 cup
        Calories 154kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 cup plain full fat Greek yogurt
        • ½ cup fresh mint leaves loosely packed and finely chopped
        • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
        • 2 garlic cloves minced or pressed through a garlic press
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt plus more to taste
        • 1/8 teaspoon black pepper

        Instructions

        • Place yogurt, mint, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and black pepper in a small mixinf bowl and whisk until fully combined.
        • Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary.
        • You can use it right away or store it in a jar with a tight-fitting lid and refrigerate it for up to 5 days.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes one cup of sauce. You can easily multiply the recipe based on what you are serving it with. The nutritional values below are for the whole recipe.
        • Fresh mint: I used store-bought fresh mint, but if you are growing your own, you can use peppermint or spearmint to make this recipe.
        • Storing leftovers: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. Be sure to give it a good whisk and taste for seasoning before serving.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 154kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 10mg | Sodium: 1243mg | Potassium: 469mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 968IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 291mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mint-yogurt-sauce/feed/ 4
        Horseradish Yogurt Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/horseradish-yogurt-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/horseradish-yogurt-sauce/#comments Wed, 31 Jan 2024 18:58:17 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=73362 If you love yogurt-based sauces, be sure to make Yogurt and Dill Sauce, Tzatziki, and Tahini Yogurt Sauce, too. Ingredients…]]>

        If you love yogurt-based sauces, be sure to make Yogurt and Dill Sauce, Tzatziki, and Tahini Yogurt Sauce, too.

        A bowl of horseradish yogurt sauce from the top view.

        Ingredients

        This Greek yogurt horseradish sauce recipe is made with only 8 ingredients, most of which are probably already in your pantry and fridge. Gather together:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Horseradish: Most grocery stores sell “prepared horseradish” or “horseradish grated in vinegar” in glass jars in the condiment aisle (Gold’s (affiliate link) is a popular brand). If you are lucky enough to spot a fresh horseradish root in the grocery store (prime time season is late autumn and early spring), feel free to peel and grate it fresh at home. Just note that fresh horseradish is much stronger than jarred, so start with 1 tablespoon and work your way up from there.
        • Plain Greek yogurt: Full-fat Greek yogurt will offer the creamiest texture. The rich, creamy texture also balances the spicy notes of the horseradish and gives it a nice cooling bite. If you can’t find Greek yogurt, Icelandic Skyr is the next best choice.
        • Mayonnaise: Mayo adds another layer of creaminess and a tangy flavor. If you prefer to make yogurt horseradish sauce without mayo, simply omit it and adjust the seasonings to your liking.
        • Apple cider vinegar: Apple cider vinegar gives it that special pop and slightly sweet flavor. White wine vinegar is a great substitute.
        • Dijon mustard: Dijon mustard enhances the natural spiciness in the horseradish.
        • Seasonings: Keep it simple with Kosher salt and black pepper to allow the horseradish to shine.
        • Chives: Fresh chives, or scallions, give it an extra bite and an almost herbal finish at the end.

        Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

        • Garlic cloves: Grate a fresh garlic clove or smash some roasted garlic so that it blends right into the sauce.
        • Crushed red pepper flakes: For a little extra spice, a dash or two of red pepper flakes would be especially nice.
        • Lemon juice: If you don’t have any apple cider vinegar or prefer not to use vinegar, try fresh lemon juice instead.
        • Sweetener: Two teaspoons of sweetener, such as granulated sugar, brown sugar, or honey, will tame the spiciness and balance the flavors. Add more if you prefer a sweeter flavor.
        • Fresh herbs: Horseradish sauce with dill or parsley would be another great option. I prefer fresh dill or parsley, but dried versions can also be used.

        How to Make This Recipe?

        A super flavorful, punchy, spicy horseradish sauce with Greek yogurt is ready in less than 5 minutes. With only two easy steps, you’ll wonder why you never made this healthy horseradish sauce in the first place. Here’s how I like to do it:

        A collage of images showing how to make yogurt horseradish sauce recipe.
        1. Make horseradish sauce: In a small bowl, whisk together prepared horseradish, Greek yogurt,  mayonnaise, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, salt, and pepper until smooth and combined.
        2. Add chives: Gently stir in the chives or scallions, if using.

        How to Store and Freeze?

        Horseradish sauce with yogurt can be made well ahead of time and even stored in the freezer. To ensure this creamy sauce keeps as long as possible, simply:

        • Storage: Transfer the yogurt horseradish sauce to an airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to 1 week. Give it a good stir just before serving.
        • Freeze: Store in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. For meal prep and portion control, flash-freeze the sauce in a silicone ice cube tray for 1-2 hours. Then, pop them out and transfer them to a freezer-safe plastic bag. Each cube is good for one serving.

        Serving Suggestions

        Whether you want a yogurt sauce for steak or an exceptional accompaniment to lamb, pork, chicken, or seafood, this horseradish sauce with yogurt will hit the spot. It also pairs well with vegetables and potatoes, too. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

        • Beef: You can’t get any more classic than horseradish sauce and beef. The spicy, tangy, cooling sauce compliments the fatty, umami-like textures and flavors of beef. Serve a dollop with any cut of steak, such as Filet Mignon or NY Strip, or serve it with Sunday roasts, like Standing Rib Roast or Instant Pot Pot Roast.
        • Pork and lamb: Just as horseradish compliments beef, it also compliments other types of meat, including pork and lamb. Give Pork Chops that much more zippy bite, or serve it alongside the robust flavors of Lamb Chops.
        • Sandwich spread: Don’t stop with weeknight dinners. Jazz up your lunch and spread it on sandwiches of all types, like a roast beef sandwich, turkey, chicken, and of course, leftover prime rib sandwich.
        • Seafood: The delicate, flaky texture of Grilled Sockeye Salmon and Baked Sockeye Salmon go so well with the bold richness of horseradish cream sauce.
        • Vegetables: Give any of your favorite roasted veggies a healthy, creamy kick (with some added protein from the Greek yogurt) by serving it as a drizzle or a dip. I love serving it with my Air Fryer Beets, which makes a great side to serve with meat dishes.
        • Potatoes: The flavors of horseradish, chives, and yogurt pair so beautifully with baked or roasted potatoes, like Air Fryer Fingerling Potatoes and Air Fryer Red Potatoes it will make your taste buds tingle.

        Expert Tips

        • Adjust the seasoning: Taste as you go and adjust the horseradish and seasonings to your taste. Keep in mind that the horseradish will get stronger the longer it stays in the fridge.
        • Bring to cool room temperature: Cover and place in the refrigerator until ready to serve. For best results, remove from the fridge 30 minutes before serving.
        • Give it a good stir before serving: Some of the liquid naturally floats to the top, so make sure to stir it to bring all the ingredients back together.
        • Thin to your desired consistency: If the sauce is too thick, thin it out with a tablespoon of water.

        FAQs

        What is creamy horseradish sauce made of?

        This version of horseradish sauce with yogurt is made with prepared horseradish, Greek yogurt, mayonnaise, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, salt, pepper, and either chives or scallions.

        What goes well with horseradish sauce?

        Horseradish sauce is classically paired with roasted meats, like Prime Rib and Pot Roast, but is exceptional with pork, lamb, chicken, vegetables, and potatoes.

        What is the difference between horseradish and horseradish sauce?

        Horseradish is simply the ingredient itself, a root vegetable with a long white root and green leaves. Horseradish sauce adds a creamy component to the mix, such as sour cream, Greek yogurt, and/or mayonnaise.

        Other Greek Yogurt Sauce/Dip Recipes You Might Also Like:

        If you try this Horseradish Yogurt Sauce recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        A bowl of horseradish yogurt sauce with a spoonful from the top view.
        Print

        Horseradish Yogurt Sauce Recipe

        Horseradish Yogurt Sauce is a lighter alternative to the classic condiment we all love. Made with Greek yogurt, it is still super creamy and tangy with fewer calories. It is the perfect accompaniment to meat (especially Prime Rib), fish and vegetable dishes.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 30kcal

        Ingredients

        • 3 tablespoons prepared horseradish
        • ½ cup Greek yogurt full fat
        • 1 tablespoon mayonnaise
        • 1 teaspoon apple cider vinegar
        • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • 1 tablespoon chives or scallions, chopped (Optional)

        Instructions

        • In a medium bowl, whisk together the prepared horseradish, Greek yogurt, mayonnaise, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, salt and pepper until fully combined.
        • Gently stir in the chopped chives or scallions if desired. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
        • Refrigerate until ready to serve then remove from the fridge 30 minutes before serving.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 3/4 cup horseradish yogurt sauce, which is ideal for 6-7 servings. The calorie information below is per serving.
        • Storage: Transfer it to an airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to a week. Give it a good stir just before serving.
        • Freeze: Store it in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. Alternatively, for meal prep and portion control, flash-freeze the sauce in an ice cube tray for 1-2 hours. Then, pop them out and transfer them to a freezer-safe plastic bag. Each cube is good for one serving.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 30kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.04g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.04g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 254mg | Potassium: 46mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 24IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 24mg | Iron: 0.1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/horseradish-yogurt-sauce/feed/ 2
        Horseradish Sauce For Prime Rib https://foolproofliving.com/horseradish-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/horseradish-sauce/#respond Wed, 24 Jan 2024 23:18:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=73287 Horseradish Sauce Ingredients You only need seven simple ingredients to make this horseradish sauce.  Below, you’ll find everything you need,…]]>
        Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

        Like many people, I have a handful of go-to recipes I rotate through at Christmas. It’s usually a toss-up between prime rib, beef tenderloin, or a cozy pot roast.

        No matter which one ends up on the table, this creamy horseradish sauce is the one thing I always make to serve alongside it.

        It’s the kind of sauce you’d expect at a steakhouse, but once you make it yourself, you’ll see how easy it is.

        The best part is that it doesn’t stop at Christmas dinner. The next day, I use it as a spread for sandwiches, which feels like a little bonus.

        Horseradish Sauce Ingredients

        You only need seven simple ingredients to make this horseradish sauce. 

        Below, you’ll find everything you need, along with a few substitution ideas and optional add-ins to customize it to your taste:

        Sour cream and horseradish sauce ingredients from the top view.

        Prepared horseradish: Often labeled as “prepared horseradish” or “grated horseradish in vinegar,” it is usually found in the refrigerated section of the grocery store in a small jar. 

        It’s made by grating fresh horseradish root and preserving it in vinegar, which tames its strong flavor.

        If you grow horseradish at home or want to make it with fresh horseradish, you can make this recipe from scratch. Just keep in mind that homemade horseradish tends to be much stronger, so you may have to adjust your recipe accordingly.

        Sour cream: I like to use sour cream for its gentle tang and creamy texture, which helps balance the sharpness of the horseradish. I recommend using full-fat sour cream, as it gives the sauce a smoother texture.

        Mayonnaise (optional): This adds a bit of extra creaminess and mild tang to the sauce. It is optional, so you can leave it out if you prefer a lighter horseradish sauce or want to keep the flavors more straightforward.

        Dijon mustard (optional): Most horseradish sauce recipes don’t include Dijon mustard, but I love that a small amount (1 teaspoon) adds an extra layer of complexity to the sauce. However, you can omit it if you prefer.

        Apple cider vinegar: This is a great way to balance the richness of this sauce. However, white wine vinegar, lemon juice, or champagne vinegar would also work. 

        Chives: Chives add a mild onion note and a bit of freshness to the sauce. If you don’t have chives on hand, you can use scallions.

        Seasonings: A simple mix of salt and black pepper is all you need to bring out the horseradish’s natural flavors.

        Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

        Greek yogurt: If you prefer to make a horseradish sauce recipe without sour cream, you can use ½ cup of Greek yogurt for a lighter sauce. Or better yet, try my horseradish yogurt sauce for a recipe that uses no mayo or sour cream.

        Crème fraîche: If you like a richer finish, ½ cup of crème fraîche is another great substitute for sour cream.

        Heavy cream: For a milder, less tangy version, you can replace the sour cream with heavy cream.

        Worcestershire sauce: If you want a bit more depth, add up to ½ teaspoon to the sauce.

        Sweetener: To make it slightly sweeter (similar to Arby’s-style sauce), stir in 1-2 teaspoons of sugar or honey to taste.

        Prepared Horseradish vs Fresh Horseradish: What Works Best for Sauce

        If you’re wondering whether to use prepared horseradish or fresh horseradish root, here’s a quick breakdown:

        Prepared horseradish is grated horseradish root preserved in vinegar. It’s what’s most commonly used in horseradish sauce recipes and is typically sold in small jars in the refrigerated section near the condiments or produce.

        I prefer using prepared horseradish here because you’ll get consistent heat and flavor, and let’s face it, it is quick and easy.

        Fresh horseradish would also work, but keep in mind that it is significantly stronger than the prepared horseradish you’d buy at the store. So, start with 1 tablespoon of freshly grated horseradish, taste, and adjust as needed.

        Freshly grated horseradish can quickly overpower the sauce, so a little goes a long way.

        How to Make Horseradish Sauce

        If you’ve never made horseradish prime rib sauce at home, you’ll be happy to know it comes together quickly and requires no special equipment.

        I’ve tested this ratio many times, and whisking everything by hand gives you the smoothest, most balanced sauce.

        A collage of images showing how to make this recipe.

        Step 1 – Whisk the base ingredients: Add the prepared horseradish, sour cream, mayo, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, salt, and black pepper to a medium bowl. 

        Whisk until the mixture is completely smooth and well combined. Take a quick taste and adjust the seasoning if needed. The sauce should be creamy with a noticeable but balanced horseradish kick.

        Step 2 – Fold in the chives (optional): If using, gently stir in the chopped chives or scallions. This adds a subtle onion note and a bit of freshness without overpowering the sauce.

        Serve right away, or refrigerate until ready to use.

        Homemade Horseradish Sauce in a bowl.

        Expert Tips for the Best Horseradish Sauce

        While this is a simple sauce, a few small adjustments can make a big difference in both its taste and how well it pairs with your meal.

        Here’s what I’ve learned through years of making this recipe:

        • Adjust based on what you’re serving: One of the benefits of making horseradish cream sauce at home is its ease of customization. If you want to make it steakhouse-style and serve it with rich dishes like roast beef or prime rib, increase the prepared horseradish to 4 tablespoons for a bit more kick. For sandwiches, burgers, or roasted vegetables, I recommend using 2-3 tablespoons to keep the sauce milder so it doesn’t overpower the other ingredients.
        • Taste before serving: Always give the sauce a final taste and adjust the seasoning as needed. This is especially important if the sauce has been refrigerated, as flavors can mellow slightly over time.
        • Let it rest if you can: While this sauce is ready to use in about 5 minutes, letting it sit in the refrigerator for at least 30 minutes makes a big difference, as it helps the flavors come together. 
        • Stir before serving: Because this sauce contains both dairy and vinegar, some separation is normal. A quick stir before serving ensures an even texture and balanced flavor.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Spoonful of horseradish sauce in a bowl.
        Print

        Horseradish Sauce for Prime Rib Recipe

        This homemade horseradish sauce is perfect for steak, prime rib, roast beef, and beef tenderloin. Made with just a few basic pantry ingredients, it can be served as a creamy sauce to various meat dishes (beef, pork, chicken), as a spread for sandwiches, or as a dipping sauce for veggies.
        Course Condiment, Sauce
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 58kcal

        Ingredients

        • 3 tablespoons prepared horseradish aka jarred horseradish
        • ½ cup sour cream full-fat
        • 1 tablespoon mayonnaise full fat
        • 1 teaspoon apple cider vinegar
        • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • 1 tablespoon chives or scallions chopped – optional

        Instructions

        • In a medium-size bowl, whisk together the prepared horseradish, sour cream, mayonnaise, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, salt, and pepper until fully combined.
        • Gently stir in the chopped chives, if desired. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 3/4 cup horseradish sauce, which is ideal for 6-7 servings. The calorie information below is per serving.
        • Prepared Horseradish: Also known as jarred horseradish, you can buy prepared horseradish from your grocery store. You can make this recipe using grated fresh horseradish, but if you go in that direction, I would recommend starting with 1 tablespoon of it (and increasing it from there), as the fresh variety has a more potent flavor.
        • Make Ahead: You can make this recipe 2 days ahead and keep it in the fridge in an airtight container. Just be sure to give it a good stir before serving.
        • Storage: Place in an airtight container (or a mason jar) and refrigerate for up to 7 days.
        • Freezing: Place it in resealable freezer-safe bags or ice cube trays (in smaller portions) and freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge a few hours before you are ready to serve it.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 58kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 11mg | Sodium: 254mg | Potassium: 47mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 142IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 0.1mg

        Make Ahead, Storage, and Freezing

        This horseradish sauce is easy to make ahead and stores well, making holiday prep a little easier. Here’s how I do it:

        How to make ahead & store: Transfer your prepared horseradish sauce to an airtight container or a mason jar. It will stay fresh in the refrigerator for up to a week.

        I recommend stirring the mixture before serving, as the ingredients tend to separate.

        How to freeze: While some people recommend against freezing dairy-based sauces due to separation, I have found that a quick 30-second whisk after thawing re-emulsifies the sauce well. For easy portioning, freeze the sauce in an ice cube tray. Once frozen, remove the frozen cubes from the mold and transfer them to a freezer bag. They should keep well for up to 3 months.

        FAQs

        What does horseradish sauce taste like?

        Horseradish sauce has a creamy, tangy base with a noticeable sharpness from the horseradish. The heat is present but balanced by the dairy.

        Why is horseradish sauce served with prime rib?

        Prime rib is rich and well-marbled, and horseradish sauce helps cut through that richness. The sharpness of the horseradish and the creaminess of the sauce create contrast, which keeps each bite from tasting too heavy.

        Can I make horseradish sauce without mayonnaise?

        Yes. The mayonnaise in this recipe is optional; I use it mainly for added tangy flavors. You can leave it out and still end up with a well-balanced horseradish sauce.

        How long does horseradish sauce last in the fridge?

        When stored in an airtight container, it will keep well in the refrigerator for up to one week. Give it a quick stir before serving, as it might separate.

        Does horseradish sauce get stronger over time?

        Not really. It can mellow slightly as it rests, which is why I recommend giving it a good stir, tasting before serving, and adjusting if needed.

        What to Serve Horseradish Sauce With

        This creamy horseradish sauce pairs well with a wide range of dishes, from classic beef recipes to more unexpected uses.

        Here are a few of my favorite ways to enjoy it:

        Classic Pairings

        Horseradish sauce is a natural match for beef, and it’s especially popular as a prime rib dipping sauce, since its sharpness balances the richness of classic holiday meat dishes. Here are a few of the classic ways I like to serve it:

        Everyday Pairings

        • Sandwiches and burgers: Use it as a spread for a leftover Prime Rib Sandwich or add it into burgers, like my Bacon Avocado Burger, for extra creaminess.
        • Roasted or grilled vegetables: Serve this creamy horseradish recipe as a dip or topping for roasted vegetables or a baked potato for an easy, elevated side dish.
        • Crudité: This creamy sauce makes a great spicy dip to serve as a part of crudité platters, meat, or cheese boards.

        Less Traditional Ideas

        • Seafood: Horseradish sauce for salmon pairs surprisingly well with richer seafood dishes, such as Baked Sockeye Salmon or Grilled Sockeye Salmon.
        • Bloody Marys: Stir in a small dollop to add a little extra depth and spice.
        Person mixing creamed horseradish with a whisk.
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/horseradish-sauce/feed/ 0
        Bread Dipping Oil https://foolproofliving.com/olive-oil-bread-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/olive-oil-bread-dip/#comments Sun, 31 Dec 2023 05:01:49 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=25983 So, you know how you go to your favorite Italian restaurant, and as soon as you sit down, you can’t…]]>

        So, you know how you go to your favorite Italian restaurant, and as soon as you sit down, you can’t wait for the olive oil dipping sauce and crusty bread to be placed on your table. It’s restaurant-style at its best (I’m looking at you, Carrabba’s Italian Grill, Bertucci’s, California Pizza Kitchen, Olive Garden, Maggino’s, and Macaroni Grill!) That is this recipe!

        With the right mix of bread dipping seasoning and the best olive oil you can find, you can make restaurant-style food in your home kitchen. It serves as the perfect appetizer for those get-togethers with family and friends. Who knew bread and olive oil could taste so good?!

        Person holding bread dipped in oil.

        Ingredients You Will Need

        You need a handful of basic ingredients to make this olive oil dip for bread. The good news is that the recipe itself is so forgiving that if you are missing an ingredient or two, you can easily substitute it with another ingredient. Below is what you’ll need, including the best oil for bread dipping:

        Olive oil dipping spices and herbs from the top view.
        • Fresh or Dried Herbs: You will need fresh or dried basil, oregano, thyme, and rosemary to make this olive oil dip. If you decide to use dried herbs, I recommend using half the amount as they tend to be stronger. You can find the correct measurements in the recipe card below.
        • Seasoning and Spices: I know it may seem a bit basic, but the salt and pepper you use make all the difference. If you can, avoid table salt and pre-ground black pepper. Use flaky sea salt or kosher salt and freshly cracked black pepper for the best flavor. However, if you do not mind your olive oil bread dip being a little bit spicy, you can also add a pinch of red pepper flakes (or red chili flakes) for some heat.
        • Olive Oil: There are so many olive oils on supermarket shelves these days, and it’s hard to know which one is the best olive oil for dipping bread. A general rule of thumb is to purchase cold-pressed extra virgin olive oil from one supplier or country. These are the fruitiest and most flavorful. Avoid olive oil blends or refined versions. 
        • Garlic: Garlic is a big flavor provider and enhancer in this olive dipping oil recipe. When mixed with spices (or fresh herbs), it infuses oil with additional Mediterranean flavors. However, it is also such a delicate ingredient. Use this list as a guide depending on how strong you want the garlic flavor when whipping up your own garlic bread cheese dip.
          • Minced Fresh Garlic cloves: Using fresh minced garlic will provide a strong garlic flavor. I recommend using this version right before you are going to serve. 
          • Oven Roasted Garlic – Roasted garlic olive oil dip is my absolute favorite! When you roast garlic, it brings out a natural, caramel sweetness that is simply divine. Once the garlic cloves are roasted, you should be able to easily mash them with a fork and mix them in. Use the moment you are going to serve. 
          • Garlic Powder – A good substitute if you want to make olive oil dip ahead. Use 1 teaspoon of garlic powder to replace the fresh.
        • Cheese: Grated Parmesan cheese is a classic ingredient in any restaurant-style Italian dipping oil, but it is an optional ingredient here. You can omit using it if you want to make it vegan or dairy-free. If you do not have Parmesan cheese, you can also use grated Pecorino Romano, cubed feta, or those small mozzarella balls for fresh, cheesy flavor.
        • Acid: Acid gives it a fresh flavor and a nice tang and balances the richness of the olive oil, so don’t skip it! My favorite is freshly squeezed lemon juice. But you can make an olive oil and balsamic vinegar bread dip with a splash of balsamic vinegar as well. If you decide to go with balsamic vinegar, simply use a tablespoon of balsamic in place of freshly squeezed lemon juice.

        Optional Ingredients and Substitutions:

        • Olives: While it is not a traditional ingredient, a handful of chopped green or black (such as Kalamata) olives would take this Italian olive oil bread dip up a notch, especially if you are a fan of olives.
        • Italian Seasoning: For those times I am short on time, I keep a jar of homemade Italian seasoning in my pantry so that I can make this in minutes. Below is my go-to Italian seasoning recipe:
          • 1 tablespoon dried basil
          • 1 tablespoon dried oregano
          • ½ tablespoon dried rosemary
          • ½ tablespoon dried thyme
          • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
          • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
        • Shallots: Thinly sliced shallots would be a great substitute for garlic if preferred.
        • Other spices: While the combination of basil, oregano, rosemary, and thyme is often used in Italian restaurants, you can also use other olive oil dipping spices such as paprika, dried dill, dried sage, parsley, and even fennel seeds whenever you want to switch it up.

        How to Make Olive Oil Bread Dip?

        This olive oil dipping sauce for bread comes together quickly and easily. Below are the steps:

        A woman is pouring olive oil to make Italian Bread Dipping oil
        1. Mix the herbs and spices: To make it, mix together dried or fresh rosemary, basil, oregano, thyme, and red pepper flakes (if using) in a shallow bowl. 
        2. Add the olive oil: Pour in the olive oil and lemon juice (or balsamic vinegar). Add in the garlic and parmesan cheese.
        3. Add the spices: Season lightly with salt and pepper. Stir it well to make sure that everything is fully mixed.
        4. Rest (Optional): If you have the time, let it rest in the fridge for an hour for the flavors to meld together nicely. 
        5. Serve: Place the bowl of seasoned oil on a large plate with sliced bread around it. Serve!

        What Kind of Bread Do You Dip in Olive Oil Bread Dip?

        When it comes to choosing the best bread for dipping in oil, you have so many options. While any fresh bread would work, below are a few suggestions:

        Garlic bread dipping sauce in a bowl with bread on the side.
        • Italian bread: The classic Italian breads like fresh focaccia and ciabatta would be wonderful to dip into this homemade bread dipping oil.
        • French Bread: With its crispy crust and chewy interior, French baguette is a wonderful option. It also has a long and thin shape, which makes it ideal to slice and dip. Alternatively, if you prefer a soft bread for dipping, you can serve it with storebought or homemade brioche
        • Sourdough Bread: The tangy flavors of sourdough pair beautifully with this garlic bread dip. Plus, its dense texture holds the oil well.
        • Homemade bread: If you do have the time, I highly recommend making my No Knead Bread or Rustic Olive Bread (my personal favorite bread to serve it with.) They are both wonderfully crusty with a hearty texture and robust flavor.
        • Garlic Bread: The rich and savory flavor of garlic bread compliments the taste of herb and oil bread dip. If you need a good recipe, try my Air Fryer Garlic Bread.
        • Pita Bread: Widely used in Mediterranean and Middle Eastern cuisine, pita’s soft and slightly chewy texture is a good choice for dipping.

        How To Make Ahead and Store This Dipping Oil?

        While making this Italian dipping sauce takes no more than 5 minutes, with a few adjustments, you can make it ahead and store it for serving later. Here is how I do it: 

        • Make Ahead: If you prefer to make this bread dipping oil a few days ahead, I recommend using dried herbs and spices instead of fresh herbs. Also, it is best to use garlic powder instead of fresh garlic, as when raw garlic sits in oil for an extended period of time, food-borne illness can occur. To make ahead, mix all the ingredients (except cheese) in a jar with a tight-fitting lid and store it at room temperature. Finally, I would add the parmesan cheese right before serving.
        • Storage: If you are making this olive oil dipping recipe with fresh herbs and fresh garlic, it is best to consume it on the day it is made or store it in an airtight container for an additional day or so. However, if you are using dried herbs and garlic powder, you can store the oil mixture for up to 5 days in an airtight container in the fridge.

        Expert Tips:

        There is a reason why this recipe went viral on social media. It is not only super easy to make but also ready in minutes. 

        With that being said, during our recipe testing, we learned a few lessons that I’d like to share so that you can have the best olive oil garlic dip for bread on your first try:

        • Adding Salt: While we listed salt as an ingredient, it is best to taste the mixture first before adding it, especially if you are using Parmesan cheese since it can already be quite salty.
        • Let it rest: If you have the time, let it rest in the fridge for an hour or so. Doing so helps the flavors to meld together.
        • Serve at room temperature: Olive oil tends to become cloudy and thicken when refrigerated. Therefore to maintain its ideal, fluid consistency and make it easier (and more pleasant) to dip, I recommend serving this bread oil dip at room temperature. 
        • Warm the bread: If you have the time, serve your dipping oil with warm bread as they do in fancy Italian restaurants.
        • Serving children: This easy bread dip is perfect to serve to family and friends, especially during the holiday season. To adjust the recipe for children, omit the red pepper flakes and use less of the overpowering dried herbs like rosemary and thyme. 
        • Dip it “well”: If you let the bread sit in the oil for a good minute or so, it absorbs even more of its delicious flavor.
        • Serving suggestions: While you can serve this bread and olive oil appetizer by themselves, for a special occasion, you can also make it a part of your meat and cheese platter. And if you want to amp up your weeknight dinner, try drizzling it on fish before roasting it in the oven.
        • Salad Dressing: I am pretty sure that you won’t have leftovers, but if you do, this olive oil bread dip makes a great salad dressing.
        Person drizzling olive oil spread for bread into a jar.

        FAQs

        What kind of oil do you dip bread in?

        The most commonly used and recommended oil for bread dipping is extra virgin olive oil (EVOO). A good olive oil for bread dipping is one that uses olives from a single origin. EVOO is preferred for its fruity and peppery flavors that pair well with various types of bread. However, while it is not common, you can also use commercially sold infused olive oils, avocado oil, or walnut oil to make this dipping oil for bread.

        How to season olive oil for dipping bread?

        Seasoning olive oil for dipping bread involves infusing it with a variety of flavors. In most cases, olive oil is infused with a combination of dried or fresh herbs (such as thyme, basil, rosemary, and oregano), spices and seasonings (like red pepper flakes, salt, and black pepper) and acid (like lemon juice, red wine or balsamic vinegar.)

        How long does bread dipping oil last?

        If you make a version of this recipe using dried herbs and seasonings, you can store it for a long time, potentially up to a month. However, if you use fresh ingredients such as fresh garlic and Parmesan cheese, it should be used within 5 days.

        Why dip bread in olive oil?

        Dipping bread in olive oil is a practice enjoyed in Mediterranean cultures, often a part of the dining experience, reflecting the region’s culinary heritage where olive oil is harvested and produced locally. Additionally, olive oil adds a rich flavor to the bread. The fruity and peppery flavors of oil paired with bread create a delightful experience.

        If you try this bread dip recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Bread dipped in olive oil dipping sauce in a person's hand.
        Print

        Bread Dipping Oil Recipe

        Homemade Bread dipping oil just like they do in your favorite Italian restaurant! Made with extra virgin olive oil, dried spices (or fresh herbs), lemon juice, and parmesan cheese, this Italian-restaurant-style olive oil bread dip is guaranteed to impress.
        Course Appetizer
        Cuisine Italian
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 329kcal

        Ingredients

        • ½ tablespoon dried basil
        • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
        • ½ teaspoon dried oregano
        • ¼ teaspoon dried rosemary
        • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
        • 1 cup extra virgin olive oil
        • 3 cloves fresh garlic minced or one teaspoon of garlic powder
        • ½ teaspoon lemon juice or balsamic vinegar
        • 2 tablespoons parmesan cheese shredded (optional)
        • 1/4 teaspoon kosher salt*
        • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper

        Instructions

        • Place dried basil, thyme, oregano, rosemary, and red pepper flakes in a bowl. Pour in the olive oil. Give it a mix.
        • Add in the garlic, lemon juice, and parmesan cheese. Stir to combine and serve with crusty bread on the side.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This bread dip oli recipe makes a cup of dipping oil, which is ideal for 6 servings when served as an appetizer with bread on the side. The calorie information below is per serving.
        • Fresh herbs: If you are growing your own herbs, you can use fresh herbs instead of dried herbs following the measurements below. Be sure to chop them before using in the recipe.
          • 1 tablespoon fresh basil
          • 1 teaspoon fresh oregano
          • 1/2 teaspoon fresh thyme
          • 1/4 teaspoon fresh rosemary
        • Storage: If you are making this recipe using dried herbs, you can store the oil mixture for up to 5 days in an airtight container in the fridge. If using fresh herbs and fresh garlic, I would recommend storing it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days.
        • Adding Salt: While we listed salt as an ingredient, it is best to taste the mixture first before adding it, especially if you are using Parmesan cheese since it can already be quite salty.
        • Let it rest: If you have the time, let it rest in the fridge for an hour or so. Doing so helps the flavors to meld together.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 329kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 26g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 126mg | Potassium: 23mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 47IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 35mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/olive-oil-bread-dip/feed/ 63
        Prime Rib Seasoning https://foolproofliving.com/prime-rib-seasoning/ https://foolproofliving.com/prime-rib-seasoning/#comments Sat, 23 Dec 2023 13:40:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=72734 Prime Rib Seasoning Ingredients Before you start mixing your seasoning, here’s a quick look at what goes into this seasoning…]]>
        Aysegul

        Prime rib is one of those cuts I only cook a few times a year, usually for Christmas dinner or Easter lunch. Let’s be real, it is a very expensive piece of meat, so there isn’t much room for mistakes.

        For years, I relied on store-bought seasonings, but most were either too sweet or had long ingredient lists that took over instead of supporting the meat.

        So I started testing my own blend using basic ingredients I already had on hand. I kept adjusting the ratio until the herbs added gentle warmth, the garlic complemented the meat, and the salt brought everything together. I think these 5 ingredients are more than enough, but I also included optional add-ins in case you want to make it your own.

        Whether you season the roast a day or two ahead or prepare everything the same day, this has become the mix I reach for. And you can stir it together faster than it takes to find a seasoning at the store.

        Another bonus? As the meat cooks, this blend seasons the pan drippings perfectly, giving you a head start on a rich Prime Rib Au Jus you can make in minutes.

        Prime Rib Seasoning Ingredients

        Before you start mixing your seasoning, here’s a quick look at what goes into this seasoning for prime rib roast and a few easy substitutions if you need them:

        Ingredients for prime rib rub from the top view.

        Kosher salt: I prefer Diamond Crystal because its larger flakes make it easier to control the seasoning. If you are using Morton Kosher Salt, use half the amount since the grains are denser and saltier.

        Pro tip: If you are dry-brining your roast ahead of time (meaning you are pre-salting your meat 24-48 hours prior to cooking), omit the salt from this rub. Adding it twice would over-season the meat.

        Black pepper: While both work, I highly recommend using coarse black pepper over fine black pepper, which will give you that classic steakhouse crust and holds up well during long roasting times.

        Rosemary: I usually use dried rosemary for convenience, but fresh works too. If you use fresh rosemary, use twice as much as dried. Regardless of which one you use, be sure to chop it finely so you don’t end up with needle-like pieces.

        Thyme: Similar to rosemary, I opted for dried thyme, but if you have fresh thyme, that would work too. If using fresh, double the amount.

        Garlic powder: I opted for garlic powder as it can handle high heat, whereas fresh garlic tends to burn and turn bitter during high-heat roasting.

        Optional Prime Rib Seasoning Variations

        My approach to this prime rib seasoning recipe is to keep it simple, as it already has a naturally rich flavor. However, you can experiment with different spices and seasonings to achieve a different flavor profile.

        If you decide to use one (or more) of the prime rib spices below, I recommend starting with a small amount (no more than ½ teaspoon to a teaspoon) and adding more as needed so you don’t overseason your meat.

        • Onion powder: Onion powder is a bold addition that can immediately satisfy anyone who loves a robust flavor profile. 
        • Paprika: Paprika adds a warm, subtle smokiness to the rub. You can use regular or smoked paprika, whichever you prefer.
        • Red pepper flakes: If you want a little heat, add a pinch. It gives the rub a subtle kick without overpowering the meat.
        • Brown sugar: A small amount of brown sugar helps with caramelization, helping create that dark, crisp crust.Though please keep in mind that a little bit of sugar goes a long way.
        • Oil: If you choose to make a wet rub, I recommend using an oil with a high smoking point, such as avocado oil, olive oil, or ghee, to avoid burning. I would recommend using 4-5 tablespoons of oil for a 7-pound prime rib.
        • Dijon mustard: Even a small amount of Dijon adds a light tang and helps the seasoning stick to the roast. It gives the beef a subtle sharpness without overpowering the other flavors.

        When To Season Your Prime Rib? Dry Brining vs Immediate Seasoning

        Before we get to the instructions, I want to clarify something crucial regarding when you plan to season your roast, as this determines how you mix the spices. The best time to season prime rib depends on how much time you have. 

        However, both methods would work whether you are roasting, reverse searing, or smoking your prime rib.

        You have two options:

        Option 1: Dry Brining (Plan Ahead) – Recommended: 

        This is when you salt your meat 24-48 hours before cooking (which I use in my Reverse Sear Prime Rib recipe). I prefer this method because salting such a large cut early helps draw out moisture, dries the surface, and gives the salt enough time to permeate deep into the meat. To me, this is the secret to a perfectly seasoned prime rib.

        How to do it: If you go this route, do not add salt to the seasoning mix below. Instead, salt your meat now and let it rest in the fridge for 24 to 48 hours. Mix the remaining ingredients and apply them to the rested meat right before cooking.

        Option 2: Immediate Seasoning (Cook Today): 

        This is when you are short on time, and you plan to cook your prime rib today. 
        How to do it: Simply add the salt to the spice mix as written below and season your meat generously right before cooking.

        How to Make Prime Rib Seasoning

        Once you decide on your timing, putting it together takes a few minutes. Think of this prime rib seasoning blend as your base mix for any standing rib roast you make.

        The steps are simple, but a few small details make a big difference in how evenly the seasoning sticks and how your crust turns out. Here is how I make it:

        A collage of images showing how to make prime rib seasoning.

        Step 1 – Mix all dry ingredients: Start by adding the kosher salt (if immediately seasoning), black pepper, rosemary, thyme, and garlic powder to a small bowl. Try to break up any lumps that you see. I like using a spoon or a small whisk.

        Pro Tip: If you are using fresh, finely chopped herbs instead of dried, rub them gently between your fingers as you add them. This helps release their natural oils and gives the rub more aroma.

        Step 2 – Rub onto roast or store for later: At this point, you can go in two directions:

        1. Using it right away: Pat your prime rib dry with paper towels so the surface is not wet. This helps the rub stick better and gives you a nicer crust. Before seasoning, let the roast sit at room temperature for 45 to 60 minutes to help it cook more evenly from edge to edge.
          How To Do It: Sprinkle the seasoning all over the roast, including the sides and any crevices, and use your hands to gently press it in. Once it’s seasoned, place it on a roasting pan with a rack and proceed with your preferred cooking method. 
        2. Saving it for later: If you are prepping ahead, transfer the seasoning to a small jar with a tight-fitting lid. Store it in a cool, dry place. It will keep well for several weeks, which makes it easy to have the seasonings you need for your next prime rib roast ready, whether you are making it for the holidays or a special dinner.
          How To Do It: Before you cook, give the jar a quick shake in case any of the spices have settled. Then use it just as you would a store-bought seasoning.
        Seasoned prime rib from the front view.

        How Much Prime Rib Seasoning You Need (Per Pound Guide)

        The amount of seasoning you need depends on the size of your roast. A good rule of thumb is to use about ½ to 1 tablespoon of seasoning per pound of meat. However, if your roast has a thicker fat cap, I recommend leaning towards the higher end of the range.

        My recipe here makes 4 tablespoons of seasoning, for reference.

        Here is a quick table you can follow when measuring out your rub:

        Roast WeightSeasoning Needed
        5 lb / 2.26kg3 Tbsp
        6–7 lb / 2.72kg – 3.18kg4 Tbsp
        8–10 lb /3.63kg – 4.54kg5–6 Tbsp

        Expert Tips for Best Results

        Having been making this recipe for several years now, I’ve learned a couple of tricks that make a big difference in how your seasoning sticks, how your crust turns out, and how evenly your roast cooks.

        Dry the roast well: Before you season it, pat it dry with paper towels. A dry surface helps the rub cling to the meat and gives you a better crust. If the roast is a little wet, the seasoning can slide off.

        Know the best time to salt your meat: Some recipes call for a dry brine 24 to 48 hours ahead, while others season right before cooking. Know which method you will be following to prevent over-salting the meat.

        Evenly distribute it on all sides: Make sure you coat every part of the roast, including the fat cap and the sides. Since prime rib is thick, seasoning only the top will not give you the full flavor you want in each slice.

        Homemade prime rib rub seasoning sprinkled over meat.
        Print

        Prime Rib Seasoning Recipe

        Quick and easy to make, this prime rib seasoning is the perfect coating for your prime rib. Thanks to this spice mix, you end up with the perfect crust and super flavorful pan drippings.
        Course Condiment
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 4 tablespoons
        Calories 10kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 tablespoons of kosher salt*
        • 1 tablespoon black pepper coarsely ground
        • 1 ½ teaspoons dried thyme or 1 tablespoon fresh thyme (chopped)
        • 1 ½ teaspoons dried rosemary or 1 tablespoon fresh rosemary (chopped)
        • 2 teaspoons garlic powder

        Instructions

        • Mix together the salt*, black pepper, dried thyme, dried rosemary, and garlic powder in a small bowl. Mix until combined.
        • Spread the spice mixture evenly on your seasoned prime rib before cooking. Alternatively, you can store the mixture in a jar and store it until you are ready to use it.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 4 tablespoons of prime rib seasoning (including the salt), enough for a 7-pound prime rib roast. You can multiply the recipe if you are cooking a larger roast.
        • Kosher Salt: We used Diamond kosher salt in this recipe. If you are using Morton kosher salt, please use half the amount. 
        • Read your prime rib recipe fully before preparing this spice mix: Before making and using this spice mixture, be sure to check the recipe you are using, as some prime rib recipes (such as our Reverse Sear Prime Rib recipe) suggest dry brining the meat 24 hours before cooking and letting it sit in the fridge. If that is the case, use the salt for dry-brining your meat, and then spread the rest of the mixture over it right before cooking.
        • Make it a wet rub: If you choose to make a wet rub, I recommend using an oil with a high smoking point, such as avocado oil, olive oil, or ghee, to avoid burning. I would recommend using 4-5 tablespoons of oil for a 7-pound prime rib. Additionally, you can add a teaspoon (or two) of Dijon mustard for a tangy flavor.
        • Storage: This spice mix will store well in a small jar for up to 2 months if you use dried herbs. If you use fresh herbs, it should be used within 2-3 days of making it.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 10kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 0.1g | Saturated Fat: 0.04g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.02g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.02g | Sodium: 3490mg | Potassium: 42mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 24IU | Vitamin C: 0.2mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg

        How to Store Prime Rib Seasoning

        Having rib roast seasoning ready to go is one of the easiest ways to stay ahead during the holidays or prep for a simple weeknight roast. How you store it depends on whether you made a dry mix or a wet version:

        • Storing a dry rub: If you made the seasoning with only dry ingredients, place it in an airtight glass jar and keep it in a cool, dark spot in your pantry. It will stay fresh for up to 2 months.
          Dry spices last longer because there is no moisture to cause clumping or reduce their flavor. 
        • Storing a wet rub: If you used fresh herbs (or mixed any of the optional seasonings with liquid), treat it like any other fresh marinade. Store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator and use it within 2 to 3 days.
          A wet rub has more moisture, so the flavor changes quicker and they do not keep as long.

        Other Ways to Use This Seasoning

        The beautiful thing about this homemade blend is that it is not only the best seasoning for a standing rib roast dinner, but it is also versatile. You can use it in everything from bread dips to veggies, taking all your favorite dishes to the next level in just minutes. Here are some of my other favorite ways to use it:

        • In other meat cuts: Though I love using this rub to make seasoned prime rib, it also makes a great addition to pork, chicken, turkey, and other beef recipes, such as traditional steak or my Reverse Sear Beef Tenderloin.
        • Sprinkle over vegetables: This recipe also makes for a delicious seasoning blend for vegetables, whether you follow a vegetarian diet or want easy veggie side dishes to complete your dinner menu.
        • Turn it into a marinade: Add a little oil to the seasoning mix, and it quickly becomes a simple marinade that adds even more richness to any kind of meat.
        • Make it a bread dip: Mix the seasoning with olive oil and a little shredded parmesan, and you get the easiest appetizer ever. If you want a more complete version with additional herbs and garlic, check out my Bread Dipping Oil Recipe.
        • Make herb butter: Mixing this seasoning into softened butter is one of the easiest ways to add rich, savory flavor to anything you are cooking. Stir it into plain butter, or use it with my Roasted Garlic Butter for even more depth. It spreads beautifully on warm bread, steaks, or roasted veggies.
        Person mixing the ingredients in a bowl.

        FAQs

        Should I season the prime rib the night before?

        Yes, if your recipe calls for it. Seasoning the roast with salt the night before (or even 24 to 48 hours ahead) helps draw out excess moisture and gives the salt time to work its way into the meat. This is the best way to get deeper, more even seasoning. Add the rest of the rub right before cooking.

        Can I use fresh herbs?

        Yes, fresh herbs work really well in this seasoning mix. But since they are milder, use twice as many dried herbs.

        Should I put butter on prime rib before seasoning?

        It depends on the cooking method and the recipe you are using, but most of the time, no. Many prime rib recipes rely on high heat at some point, and butter can burn quickly in that environment. If you want to use oil for flavor, choose one that can handle higher heat. A neutral, high-smoke-point oil like ghee (clarified butter) or vegetable oil works better than butter.

        Should I season the fat cap?

        You absolutely should. The fat cap is a key part of the roast, and seasoning it will ensure that every slice is perfectly seasoned.

        Can I use this on boneless and bone-in roasts?

        Yes. This seasoning works for both bone-in and boneless prime rib. Bone-in roasts take a little longer to cook, but the rub performs the same on either cut.

        Complete Your Prime Rib Dinner

        Congratulations, you made the best prime rib seasoning on the internet. Now, it is time to turn it into dinner. Here are the rest of the recipes you’ll need for a showstopping dinner:

        • How to cook it? My go-to recipe is this Reverse Sear Prime Rib. It is a two-step cooking method that starts in a low-temperature oven, brings it to your desired doneness, and then finishes in a high-heat oven. I use this seasoning for this recipe, and it works wonderfully.
        • The dipping sauce: Don’t let those herb-crusted pan drippings go to waste. Use them to make my 10-minute Prime Rib Au Jus recipe for the perfect dipping sauce.
        • What to serve it with? You can’t have prime rib without horseradish sauce. Yes, you can buy it online, but making Horseradish Sauce at Home is really easy. Alternatively, if you prefer a lightened-up version, my Horseradish Yogurt Sauce might be what you need.
        • Got leftovers? Don’t let a single bite go to waste and make my Leftover Prime Rib Sandwich.

        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/prime-rib-seasoning/feed/ 1
        Mediterranean Hummus Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/ https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/#comments Tue, 05 Sep 2023 00:39:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2804 While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that…]]>

        While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that just brings me back to my roots. Simple, straightforward, and with just a few pantry staples, homemade hummus is only a few steps away.

        A bowl of hummus garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

        Hummus Ingredients

        A traditional hummus recipe requires just a handful of ingredients. Since hummus is the Arabic word for chickpeas, it’s no wonder this is the main ingredient. Below is what you’ll need:

        Ingredients for basic hummus recipe.
        • Chickpeas: Although you can cook your own chickpeas (more on this below), I find using canned chickpeas is easier and does not require any advanced planning. We will need one can of chickpeas (also known as garbanzo beans) rinsed and drained.
        • Lemon Juice: Fresh lemon juice will provide a fresh pop of citrus.
        • Water: A bit of water helps with consistency. For best results, use ice-cold water.
        • Tahini Paste: A high-quality tahini (sesame paste) makes all the difference and gives this easy hummus recipe that special nutty flavor. I love super creamy Soom tahini (affiliate link) or Seed + Mill (affiliate link.)
        • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: Use good quality olive oil for the best flavor.
        • Garlic Cloves: I use raw garlic when making this hummus recipe from scratch. However, if you want to take things up a notch (and are not a fan of the pungent garlic flavor), you can use Roasted Garlic, or, quicker, Air Fried Garlic as well. 
        • Seasonings: Cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt add Mediterranean flavor and warmth.
        • Fresh Herbs: Upon serving, a final sprinkle of fresh herbs like parsley is all you need. 

        Substitutions and Optional Garnish Ideas

        While you can serve this DIY hummus simply as is, I find extra garnishes and Mediterranean additions compliment the classic characteristics of hummus and give it depth of flavor. Some favorites you can try include:

        • Chickpeas: If you would prefer to make hummus from dried chickpeas, I recommend trying Ottolenghi’s method of cooking chickpeas. Place 1 ⅓ cups dry chickpeas in a bowl, cover with cool water, add 1 teaspoon baking soda, cover and soak overnight. The next day, drain, rinse, and cook in a pot of water for 40 minutes to an hour, or until softened. And if you prefer it to be quicker, you can cook chickpeas in a pressure cooker as well.
        • Olive Oil: Create a deep crevice into the bowl of hummus with a large spoon and finish with a generous drizzle of olive oil.
        • Pine Nuts + Olives: Add crunch and fruitiness by finishing with toasted pine nuts and chopped Kalamata olives or green olives.
        • Hummus Seasoning: Finish with an array of spices and herbs, such as my Mediterranean Seasoning or Baharat Spice Blend, bright and tangy sumac, or dried oregano.
        • Greek: Garnish with chopped sun-dried tomatoes, crumbled feta cheese, chopped red onion, and a drizzle of olive oil.

        How to Make Hummus From Scratch?

        If you are ever looking for a step-by-step hummus recipe, you have come to the right place. Making your own hummus will always be better than store-bought hummus and might even be faster than taking a trip to the grocery store. Here’s how I like to do it:

        Step by step photos showing how to make hummus recipe.
        1. Prep ingredients: Combine the lemon juice and water in a small bowl. Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
        2. Mix Tahini: In another small bowl, whisk together the tahini and olive oil until shiny and smooth.
        3. Blend chickpeas: In the bowl of a food processor with the steel blade or a high-powered blender, add the remaining chickpeas and process for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice/water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until the mixture begins to form into a paste, about 1 minute.
        Person showing how to make creamy hummus in a collage of images.
        1. Add tahini: With the food processor running, slowly add the tahini paste mixture through the tube and process until creamy, about 30-40 seconds. Be sure to stop the machine a few times and scrape down the sides.
        2. Serve: Transfer the hummus to a large bowl. Using the back of a spoon, create a deep crevice in the center. Finish with reserved chickpeas, a drizzle of olive oil, and chopped fresh parsley, and enjoy.

        How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

        Easy homemade hummus can be made ahead and stored in both the fridge and freezer. To do so, simply:

        • Make Ahead: Prepare this homemade hummus recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
        • Store: Leftovers of this chickpea hummus recipe can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
        • Freeze: Store in a freezer-safe airtight container, with a little space at the top (to count for expansion), for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge.

        How to Serve

        This basic hummus recipe can be served in a number of different ways. Go the more traditional route or think outside of the box by serving as:

        • Mezze Platter: The adoration for hummus is a social activity that is meant to be enjoyed amongst the company, and no mezze plate would be complete without it. Enjoy it alongside Baba Ganoush and Middle Eastern Red Pepper Dip for an authentic experience.
        • Grilled Meat: Make it a part of a filling meal by serving your garbanzo bean hummus alongside Mediterranean Chicken, Chicken Kabobs, Grilled Lamb, or beef kabobs.
        • Appetizer / Dip: Cut up fresh veggies like raw celery sticks, English cucumber, carrots, bell peppers, or radishes and dip right into Mediterranean hummus bowls. And if you want to take it up a notch, drizzle it with a spoonful of skhug sauce for that authentic Middle Eastern taste.
        • Spread: Use it as a sandwich spread to make your lunch that much more enjoyable, or add it to your favorite grain bowls.
        • Pita / Bread: Give it a casual approach with toasted pita bread, pita chips, crackers, Air Fried Garlic Bread, Olive Bread, or No Knead Artisan Bread.
        Greek hummus in a bowl garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

        Expert Tips

        While the recipe for this authentic hummus recipe is pretty simple and straightforward, below are a few tips to ensure you get perfect results on your first try:

        • Should I remove the skins of chickpeas? I am sure you’ve seen a lot of recipes suggesting removing the chickpea skins. While I get why they recommend doing so, I personally do not have the time or patience to do so. And I guarantee you that this recipe is just as creamy and delicious without removing the skin. 
        • Use high-quality tahini: The quality of your tahini makes a huge difference here. For optimal taste and texture, use a brand of tahini that uses the buttery white Humera sesame seeds from Ethiopia. It should also be soft and creamy. If the tahini bottle has been sitting in the fridge for a while, be sure to give it a good stir before using it.
        • Use an ice cube: This is an optional step, but it really works. To achieve an extra smooth and creamy hummus, add 1-2 ice cubes near the end of processing.
        • No food processor? Use a blender. However, please keep in mind that if you have a high-speed blender like Vitamix (affiliate link), you might have to stop the machine and scrape the sides a few times.
        • Serve at room temperature: Fun fact – restaurant hummus is never refrigerated and is made fresh each morning. While I refrigerate my batch of homemade hummus to get ahead, I always serve it at room temperature.

        FAQs

        What is the secret to the creamiest hummus?

        The creamiest hummus is made from soft chickpeas and a high-powered food processor or blender. Adding 1-2 ice cubes at the end of the processing time would also help.

        Can you have hummus on a Mediterranean diet?

        Yes, hummus is a staple of the Mediterranean diet and is celebrated for being plant-based and full of protein, dietary fiber, and healthy fats.

        What is the main ingredient in hummus?

        The main ingredient in hummus is chickpeas, sometimes referred to as garbanzo beans.

        How much tahini for hummus?

        This is more about personal preference and cultural influence, but I use ⅓ cup tahini for every 1 (14-15 oz) can of chickpeas.

        Other Mediterranean Recipes You Might Enjoy:

        It is no secret that I love making and sharing Turkish recipes on the blog. Below are other Mediterranean classics that I know you’ll like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Mediterranean Hummus Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Authentic hummus in a bowl drizzled with olive oil.
        Print

        Mediterranean Hummus Recipe

        A restaurant style yet Homemade Mediterranean Hummus recipe. This recipe makes the creamiest and most delicious hummus that you can make in minutes. Top it off with pine nuts, chopped olives, and a drizzle of oil for extra deliciousness.
        Course Appetizer
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 6 people
        Calories 139kcal

        Ingredients

        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
        • 1/4 cup water
        • 1/3 cup tahini paste
        • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
        • 1 can chickpeas (14 oz.) drained and rinsed
        • 2 small cloves garlic minced
        • 1/4 teaspoon cumin
        • Pinch of cayenne pepper
        • Pinch of black pepper
        • 1/2 teaspoon salt
        • 2 tablespoons Italian parsley finely chopped

        Instructions

        • In a small bowl, combine the lemon juice and water.
        • In a separate bowl (or a measuring cup), whisk together the tahini paste and olive oil until thoroughly incorporated.
        • Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
        • Place the rest of the chickpeas in a food processor and process them for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice and water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until mixed, scraping down the bowl as necessary, 50-60 seconds.
        • While the food processor is running, slowly (in a steady stream), pour the tahini paste and olive oil mixture from the tube, and process until smooth and creamy (or it reaches your desired consistency,) for 30-40 seconds.
        • Transfer the hummus to a plate and sprinkle it with chopped parsley and reserved chickpeas. If preferred, drizzle it with olive oil. Serve it with fresh pita, pita chips or toasted bread on the side.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ½ cups of hummus, which is ideal for 6 servings when served as an appetizer. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply the recipe. The nutrition information below is for one serving.
        • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
        • Store: Leftover hummus can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 139kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 242mg | Potassium: 86mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 132IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/feed/ 15
        1905 Salad https://foolproofliving.com/1905-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/1905-salad/#comments Thu, 31 Aug 2023 19:24:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=70366 Viral salads are all the craze these days, much like the La Scala Salad (aka Kardashian Salad) and Jen Aniston…]]>

        Viral salads are all the craze these days, much like the La Scala Salad (aka Kardashian Salad) and Jen Aniston Salad. And this Columbia 1905 salad recipe has so much rich history, it’s no wonder it has taken the internet by storm.

        Columbia restaurant salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

        What is 1905 Salad?

        The 1905 salad was invented by a waiter named Tony Noriega at the Columbia Restaurant (one of the most iconic restaurants in America) in the heart of the Ybor City neighborhood of the Tampa Bay area in Florida. He was working late at the restaurant one night and used some leftovers in the fridge to create what the restaurant now serves tableside (with some minor adjustments made to the original).

        Contrary to its name, it was actually created in the 1940s and was later adapted by Columbia and added to the menu in the 1970s as an answer to the salad bar. The name of the salad, ‘1905’, was created to celebrate the year the restaurant was founded as Florida’s oldest restaurant.

        Since then, the unique flavors of the 1905 salad have been considered a culinary representation of the Cuban and Spanish heritage of Ybor City and the Tampa Bay area. Because of its Cuban/Spanish origin, the salad goes by many names, including the 1905 Columbia Salad, Cuban 1905 Salad, Florida Salad, Tampa Salad, or Tony Salad.

        Ingredients

        The beauty of the 1905 Columbia salad recipe is that it relies on simple, yet delicious, ingredients. Yet there are details in both the dressing and salad that are important to point out. I highly recommend sticking to the below ingredients to make the original 1905 Columbia salad recipe, but I also offer plenty of substitutions to give it your own unique flavor.

        Columbia Restaurant Salad Dressing

        This Columbia 1905 salad dressing has become so popular over the years, that it is now sold as a salad dressing in grocery stores like Publix and even online stores like Amazon. While you can always buy a bottle, making it at home is so easy. Here’s what you will need:

        1905 salad dressing recipe ingredients with text on the image.
        • Garlic: Freshly minced garlic cloves will provide the best flavor. In this case, I would not substitute it with garlic powder.
        • Dried Oregano: I used dried oregano, but you can use 1 sprig of fresh oregano for a stronger, floral flavor.
        • Worcestershire Sauce: This is the secret ingredient that gives the salad dressing that special umami flavor. Pick up a bottle of the popular Lea and Perrins Worcestershire Sauce (affiliate link) for authentic flavor.
        • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: The original recipe calls for extra-virgin Spanish olive oil, but you can use whichever olive oil you have on hand.
        • White Wine Vinegar: White wine vinegar provides a nice bit of acidity.
        • Fresh Lemon Juice: Use freshly squeezed lemon juice, which would be the juice of about 1 lemon.
        • Kosher Salt + Black Pepper

        Salad Ingredients

        • Iceberg Lettuce: We need 7-8 cups of crisp lettuce, which you can get from about one large head of iceberg lettuce. The key is to slice, rinse, and then dry it really well. If you have a salad spinner, this is the time to use it.
        • Tomatoes: Ripe, juicy tomatoes are key, but any kind will do. My favorites are heirloom, beefsteak, tomatoes on the vine, cherry, or Roma tomatoes.
        • Ham Slices: We need about 4-5 slices of deli ham. Slice them into thin, julienne slices (matchstick strips) when you get home.
        • Swiss Cheese: The same goes for the Swiss cheese. We need about 5 slices, also sliced into julienne.
        • Green Olives: Use pitted green olives, roughly chopped, or even pimento-stuffed green Spanish olives if you want to take it up a notch.
        • Pecorino Romano: The original recipe uses Romano cheese, which is Pecorino Romano sold here in the United States. Pick up a box of finely grated cheese or grate a whole block at home.

        Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

        While I highly recommend sticking to the original 1905 salad recipe, I wanted to make sure I provided you with a few substitutions and optional additions. 

        • Salad Greens: A good substitute for iceberg lettuce would be romaine lettuce. Just be sure to slice it as thinly as you can.
        • Celery Stalks: Add some thinly sliced celery stalks for extra crunch.
        • Black Olives: Swap out the green olives for milder black olives instead.
        • Ham Substitutions: If you are not a fan of ham, you can use thinly sliced, deli-style chicken, turkey breast, salami, or pepperoni, or try some Grilled Shrimp instead.
        • Cheese: If you don’t have Pecorino Romano, finely grated Parmesan cheese will also work.
        • Croutons: Whether store-bought or Homemade Croutons, add a handful to the top for some extra crunch.
        • Hard-Boiled Eggs: Slice or dice some hard-boiled eggs for extra protein.
        • Onion: Toss in some thinly sliced red onion or green onions for an extra savory bite.
        • Make it Vegetarian: Omit the ham and use some Baked Tofu instead, or simply add more Swiss and green olives to compensate for the lack of meaty flavor.

        How to Make 1905 Salad Recipe?

        The recipe for the 1905 salad follows the same basic steps as any other salad: First, whip up the salad dressing, prepare the salad ingredients, and then toss them all together. Here’s how to do it in a few easy steps:

        A collage of images showing how to make Columbia restaurant salad recipe.
        1. Make the 1905 Salad Dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together the garlic, dried oregano, and Worcestershire sauce. Slowly add the olive oil while whisking constantly to form an emulsion. Stir in vinegar, lemon juice, salt, and pepper, while still whisking until smooth.
        2. Assemble the Salad: In a large salad bowl, combine lettuce, tomatoes, ham, Swiss cheese, and green olives.
        3. Toss: Toss salad ingredients with the dressing. Sprinkle with Romano cheese, taste for seasoning, and add more, if desired. Serve and enjoy!

        How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

        The Columbia Salad can be made ahead and even stored for later if done properly. Here are my best storage tips:

        • Make Ahead: Columbia restaurant actually recommends making the dressing 1-2 days in advance, but I find it lasts up to 3 days if stored in an airtight container or mason jar in the refrigerator.
        • Storage: The dressed salad will only keep fresh for 1 day. Please be aware that as it sits, it releases all of its juices. If you plan to store the salad for longer or know you will have leftovers, refrain from tossing the salad with the dressing until the day you are going to serve. Store the prepared salad ingredients in a large airtight container with a paper towel to absorb excess moisture for 2-3 days.

        What to Serve With the 1905 Salad?

        This is a hearty salad all on its own, so it can be served simply with bread and butter. The Columbia Restaurant serves it with a Cuban sandwich from the menu. Here at home, I love to serve it as a side salad with any of the following:

        1905 Columbia salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

        Expert Tips

        • Authentic flavors: The reason this salad became so famous is because it is so well-balanced. I highly recommend sticking to the original recipe to bring out all those Spanish flavors. This may mean a quick trip to the store, but I promise it is worth it.
        • Take your time when making the dressing: It’s interesting to note, that The Columbia restaurant actually adds the Worcestershire sauce and lemon juice at the end so that you can taste more of the savory, bright components. But I find the ingredients marry together well when mixed into one. The key is to emulsify the dressing so that the olive oil is mixed well with the Worcestershire sauce, vinegar, and lemon juice. To do so, slowly drizzle in the olive oil and give it one more good whisk just before tossing.
        • Assembly: The salad at the Columbia restaurant is prepared tableside for all guests who order it. If you really want to stick to history, serve this salad tableside for all your family members and friends, and for extra flair.
        • Salt: I intentionally included less salt in the salad dressing since this salad contains many salty ingredients, like ham, Swiss, salty green olives, and grated cheese. Be sure to taste test once you mix the dressing with the salad. The exact measurements will be based on your personal preference.
        • Mix at the last minute: Drizzle with the dressing just before serving to keep the iceberg lettuce crisp and crunchy and the rest of the ingredients fresh.
        • Presentation: Each ingredient brings its own color, taste, and texture, so have fun with the presentation, especially if serving this salad to a crowd. For extra bonus points, serve in a chilled salad bowl to keep it super cold.

        FAQs

        Why is it called 1905 salad?

        Although the 1905 salad was technically invented in the 1940s, it is named after the year the Columbia restaurant was founded.

        Who invented the 1905 salad?

        The 1905 salad was invented by waiter Tony Noriega, who pulled leftovers from the fridge one night after work to create this famous salad.

        How many calories are in a 1905 Columbia Salad?

        One serving of the 1905 Columbia Salad is 306 calories. This will vary based on the amount of Romano cheese you add at the end.

        Other Meal-Worthy Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

        If you try this 1905 Salad recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        1905 Salad from Columbia restaurant in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        1905 Salad Recipe

        Be a part of the viral sensation and make the famous 1905 salad right at home! Made with the iconic Columbia Restaurant’s garlic salad dressing, sweet ham, and creamy cheese, it is an easy salad you can make in 15 minutes.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine Cuban
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 15 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 306kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Salad Dressing:

        • 4 garlic cloves minced
        • 2 teaspoons dried oregano
        • 2 tablespoons Worcestershire Sauce
        • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • 3 tablespoons white wine vinegar
        • 4 tablespoons lemon juice
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt plus more to taste
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For The Salad:

        • 1 head iceberg lettuce sliced and rinsed (~7-8 cups)
        • 1 large ripe tomato sliced
        • ½ cup ham slices* julienned – about ¼ lb or 5 slices of ham
        • ½ cup Swiss cheese julienned – 5-6 slices
        • ½ cup green olives pitted and chopped
        • ¼ cup Pecorino Romano grated or grated Parmesan cheese

        Instructions

        • To make the dressing, whisk garlic, dried oregano, and Worcestershire sauce in a bowl. Gradually add the olive oil while whisking constantly to form an emulsion. Stir in vinegar, lemon juice, salt and pepper. Whisk until thoroughly combined.
        • To assemble the Columbia restaurant salad, place iceberg lettuce, sliced tomatoes, julienned ham and Swiss cheese, and green olives in a large bowl.
        • Drizzle the salad with the dressing. Give it a toss until combined. Sprinkle it with Romano cheese.
        • Taste for seasoning, add more if necessary, and serve.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe yields a large bowl of salad (about 7-8 cups), which is ideal for 6 servings as a side dish.
        • Ham: The original recipe uses baked ham. If you have some on hand, go ahead and use it. Otherwise, deli-style ham slices are a good substitution. You can also use deli-style chicken/turkey breast or even shrimp.
        • A word on salt: I intentionally included less salt in the salad dressing since this salad contains many salty ingredients, like ham, Swiss cheese, salty green olives, and Romano cheese. Be sure to give it a taste right after mixing it and adjust it according to your taste buds.
        • Store: This salad is best on the day it is made. However, leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for one day. Please be aware that it gets watery as it sits, so it is best to give it a good mix before serving.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 306kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 17g | Cholesterol: 25mg | Sodium: 756mg | Potassium: 346mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 857IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 173mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/1905-salad/feed/ 2
        Cherry Tomato Salsa https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/#comments Tue, 01 Aug 2023 21:11:43 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69426 Whether you are growing them in your garden or getting them from your local farmer’s market, if you are blessed…]]>

        Whether you are growing them in your garden or getting them from your local farmer’s market, if you are blessed with an abundance of cherry tomatoes, be sure to also try our Tomato Mozzarella Salad. It is a colorful, crisp, and light dish that uses juicy cherry tomatoes to bring out its garden-fresh taste. Alternatively, you can whip up my Black Eyed Peas Salad for a delicious bean salad that allows the cherry tomatoes to shine.

        A bowl of cherry tomato salsa with chips on the side.

        Ingredients

        This cherry tomato salsa recipe only uses the most flavorful, simple ingredients to get its signature freshness. To make this tasty mix, you’ll need the following:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top level with text on each ingredient.
        • Cherry tomatoes: I prefer fresh cherry tomatoes or grape tomatoes in this recipe due to their bright, tart flavor. With very minimal difference between the two varieties, both types of tomatoes would work here. Additionally, you can make this simple recipe using any other tomato—heirloom, Roma, colorful cherry tomatoes, or beyond.
        • Onion: I use roughly-chopped white onions in my version, but you can also use red onion for a mild salsa. You can also use green onions (or a combination of both!) if you prefer a less intense flavor profile.
        • Fresh Garlic Cloves
        • Jalapeno: Jalapeno is a spicy, garden-fresh ingredient perfect for adding heat and color to this homemade salsa. If you prefer it to be less spicy, be sure to remove the seeds from your jalapeno prior to chopping.
        • Cilantro: Lemony and bright, chopped cilantro leaves is a classic ingredient in this recipe. However, if you’re not a fan of cilantro, you may either omit the ingredient or substitute it with other fresh herbs, such as parsley, oregano, or mint.
        • Lime juice: Fresh lime juice is best when making your salsa due to its brilliant, citrusy flavor. While it is not traditional, lemon juice can also be used. If you don’t have any limes (or lemons) on hand, you may also use bottled lime juice in this recipe.
        • Seasonings: Only salt and ground black pepper are necessary to give this fresh salsa recipe its rich taste. For a warmer, nuttier profile, you may also add a pinch of ground cumin.
        • Olive oil: You’ll need olive oil only if you are for making roasted cherry tomato salsa. 

        How to Make Salsa with Cherry Tomatoes?

        Making salsa with cherry tomatoes is a great way to add bright tomato flavor to your favorite recipes. These simple instructions will teach you how to make salsa in two ways: by hand and in the food processor.

        Make it by Hand

        Whether it’s your first recipe or your hundredth, preparing fresh cherry tomato salsa—also known as salsa fresca—is an easy way to add light, zesty flavor to your table. Plus, it only takes 10 minutes!

        Person showing how to make homemade cherry tomato salsa in a collage of photos.
        1. Prepare the tomatoes: Place a colander in another bowl and set the two aside. Then, use a sharp knife to cut the cherry tomatoes into smaller pieces and add them to the colander. Let their juices drain while you prepare the remaining ingredients.
        2. Combine the ingredients: Transfer the cut tomatoes to a medium bowl once drained. Add the chopped onion, garlic, jalapeno, and cilantro.
        3. Add the lime: Drizzle the mixture with lime juice, and sprinkle it with salt and pepper.
        4. Mix and serve: Stir the ingredients until thoroughly combined. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. When ready, serve the salsa fresca with chips or on the side of your main dish.

        In the Food Processor or Blender

        When serving a crowd, the last thing you want to do is spend hours in the kitchen prepping your ingredients. With this simple method, you can make salsa from cherry tomatoes with little prep time.

        Person showing how to make grape tomato salsa in a food processor.
        1. Blend the veggies: Add the onion, garlic, and jalapeno to the bowl of your food processor. Pulse the ingredients 6-7 times to give them a rough chop.
        2. Add the tomatoes: Place the cherry tomatoes in the food processor, along with the other ingredients, and process the mixture for 10-15 seconds, depending on your preferred texture.
        3. Drain: Place a colander over a bowl, and pour the mixture into the colander. Use the back of a spatula to remove as much excess liquid as possible.
        4. Add seasonings: Transfer the drained veggies into a medium-sized bowl. Add the lime juice, salt, and pepper, and stir until combined.

        What if I Want to Roast Tomatoes?

        Roasted cherry tomato salsa adds irresistibly smoky, rich undertones to traditional pico de gallo recipes. Below, I’ll show you how to make a delicious roasted salsa that comes together in no time.

        1. Heat the oven: Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F.
        2. Prep the tomatoes: Arrange the cherry tomatoes on a baking sheet, and drizzle them evenly with a tablespoon of olive oil.
        3. Bake the tomatoes: Roast the tomatoes in the preheated oven for 10-12 minutes, flipping them halfway through the cooking process. Cook until the tomatoes slightly burst. For a fire-roasted cherry tomatoes version, turn on the broiler for the last 2-3 minutes of the cooking time.
        4. Cool the tomatoes: Let the roasted tomatoes rest and cool for 15 minutes. Then, transfer them to a cutting board and chop them to your desired size.
        5. Drain the tomatoes: Place the roasted tomatoes in a colander, and set the colander in another bowl. Once the excess liquid drains away, transfer the tomatoes to a medium bowl.
        6. Add the remaining ingredients: Add the chopped onion, jalapeño, cilantro, lime juice, salt, and pepper to the chopped tomatoes. Stir until combined.
        7. Taste and serve: Taste the mixture for seasoning, adding more if preferred, then serve.
        A bowl of salsa with cherry tomatoes from the top view.

        How to Store the Leftovers?

        It’s best to serve homemade salsa with cherry tomatoes the day of, as this condiment tends to get watery as it sits. Therefore, I recommend serving it as-is and draining any excess liquid before plating your sauce.

        However, if you need to store your leftover salsa, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. If necessary, add freshness to the mixture by draining it and adding more tomatoes and extra seasoning.

        How to Serve?

        Pico de gallo with cherry tomatoes is one of the most versatile condiments in my recipe book. Zesty and fresh, this salsa makes a delicious pair with everything from tacos to shrimp.

        • Chips: No one can resist a classic—especially one as simple as this! Serve up your salsa alongside your favorite tortilla chips for the ultimate crowd-ready appetizer, snack, or side dish.
        • Grilled or roasted meat and seafood: If you love grilled meats’ succulent, savory taste, these salsa-friendly recipes are for you! Serve your homemade salsa atop a tender fillet of Grilled Sockeye Salmon or marinated Shrimp Kabobs for a five-star meal perfect for the summer months. You can also add a helping of salsa with my Baked Chicken Kabobs if you’re looking for a tender, healthy meal you can make all year round.
        • Tacos: Want to make an authentic, party-ready Mexican menu with your grape tomato salsa? My Beef Brisket Tacos are packed with savory richness, while my Black Bean Quinoa Tacos recipe is a vegan-friendly and oh-so-delicious alternative.
        • Quinoa or burrito bowls: Few weeknight dinners are as hearty or flavor-packed as a traditional burrito bowl. My Mexican Quinoa (and Instant Pot Mexican Quinoa!) load your favorite fresh, Mexican ingredients into every serving. Or, for a meal better than Chipotle, whip up a Homemade Burrito Bowl that will satisfy your cravings and save money.
        • Eggs: My favorite way to serve a hearty, flavor-packed breakfast is with a side of this light homemade salsa recipe. I love adding this iconic salsa recipe to Mexican breakfast staples like Huevos Rancheros and Mexican Breakfast Casserole.
        • Soups and Chilis: Take your soup game to the next level by adding a dollop of this cherry tomato mixture. This salsa pairs beautifully with soups like Mexican Street Corn Soup and Chicken Tomatillo Soup. It also adds a robust tomato finish to hearty chili recipes like my Quinoa Chili and Easy Chicken Chili.
        • Nachos: No nacho recipe is complete without a helping of salsa. This classic salsa recipe makes a great topping for savory fan favorites like Chicken Nachos and Beef Nachos.

        Expert Tips

        This salsa recipe with cherry tomatoes is easy for any chef to prepare in a snap. These pro tips will ensure that your sauce comes out effortlessly delectable regardless of your experience level.

        • Don’t skip on draining: To keep your salsa from becoming too watery, it’s essential to let your chopped tomatoes rest and drain before adding them to your salsa mixture. Also, be sure to add the seasoning and lime (or lemon) juice only after you drain the mixture, which will result in a perfectly seasoned salsa.
        • Let it rest: While it is an optional step, if you do have the time, I highly recommend making your salsa a few hours in advance and letting it sit in the fridge. The resting time allows the flavors to marinate and develop into a restaurant-quality salsa recipe.
        • Adjust the texture: Salsas come in dozens of different textures, from chunky to pureed. Because the fineness of your chopping doesn’t affect the overall taste of your condiment, feel free to chop your ingredients according to your preference. I recommend a small chop or a food processor for a saucier texture. For a chunkier salsa, cut your ingredients into larger pieces.
        • Taste for seasoning: Any salsa—whether it’s a cherry tomato pico de gallo or an heirloom tomato salsa—needs salt to bring out the ingredients’ natural flavors. Don’t skimp on salt and pepper when seasoning your salsa to ensure your recipe is as flavorful, fresh, and complex as possible.

        FAQs

        Can you make salsa out of cherry tomatoes?

        Yes! Cherry tomatoes have a bright, tart flavor that exquisitely balances the flavors of other salsa ingredients. Plus, their size makes them easy to chop to your desired thickness, resulting in a perfectly tailored mixture.

        Do you need to peel cherry tomatoes for salsa?

        When you use cherry tomatoes for salsa, there’s no need to peel your tomatoes before adding them to your blend. Cherry tomatoes have a thin skin, which won’t affect the overall texture of your condiment once mixed.

        Can I freeze cherry tomato salsa?

        Though you technically can freeze this salsa recipe, I don’t recommend it. Freezer salsa with cherry tomatoes may become mushy and watery, and it tends to lose its flavor the longer it remains in storage. However, if you freeze your salsa, place it in an airtight container before storage and thaw it in the refrigerator overnight or until it reaches your desired consistency. I also suggest draining out any excess liquid and tasting for seasoning before serving.

        Can I use this recipe for cherry tomato salsa for canning

        Unfortunately, this salsa recipe won’t work for canning. Canning requires that you boil your ingredients (and jars) before transferring them to mason jars, and this recipe only uses fresh and/or roasted ingredients.

        Other Fresh Tomato Recipes You Might Also Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Cherry Tomato Salsa recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        A bowl of salsa from cherry tomatoes with chips on the side.
        Print

        Cherry Tomato Salsa Recipe

        This Homemade Cherry Tomato Salsa is the ultimate Mexican party food! This easy recipe is wonderful with chips on the side or to serve as a topping with nachos, tacos, soups, stews & more.
        Course Appetizer
        Cuisine Mexican
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 0 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 36kcal

        Ingredients

        • 3 cups cherry tomatoes
        • ½ cup onion roughly chopped
        • 2 cloves garlic roughly chopped
        • 1 jalapeno seeded and roughly chopped
        • ½ cup cilantro chopped
        • 4 tablespoons lime juice
        • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground pepper

        Instructions

        Make it by Hand:

        • Place a colander in a bowl and set it aside. Cut up the tomatoes into smaller pieces and place them in the colander. Let the juices drain while you are working on the rest of the ingredients.
        • Drain tomatoes and then transfer them to a medium-sized bowl. Add in the chopped onion, garlic, jalapeno, and cilantro.
        • Drizzle it with lime juice and sprinkle with salt and pepper.
        • Stir to combine. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Serve it with chips on the side.

        Food processor version:

        • Place onion, garlic, and jalapeno in a food processor. Pulse 6-7 times to give them a rough chop.
        • Add the cherry tomatoes and process for 10-15 seconds, depending on your preferred chunkiness.
        • Pour the mixture into a colander set over a bowl. Using the back of a spatula, remove as much liquid as you can.
        • Transfer to a medium bowl; add lime juice and seasoning. Stir to combine.

        Notes

        • Yield: This recipe yields around 2 cups of salsa that should be good for 4 servings as an appetizer. If you need to serve a crowd you can multiply it as many times as you need. The nutritional values below is per serving.
        • Storage of leftovers: To store your leftover salsa, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. When ready to serve, add freshness to the mixture by draining it and adding more tomatoes and extra seasoning.
        • Texture difference: We prefer the method made by hand, but if you are serving this salsa to a large crowd you can use the food processor method. However, please be aware that, while it tastes similar, the version made in the food processor has a more liquidy texture.
        • Roasted Cherry Tomato Salsa: If you prefer to make your salsa with roasted cherry tomatoes, place them on a baking sheet and drizzle them with a tablespoon of olive oil. Roast for 10-12 minutes in a 450-degree F. preheated oven, making sure to flip them halfway through. Let them drain in a colander and follow the rest of the recipe as written.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 36kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.03g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Sodium: 596mg | Potassium: 317mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 728IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 24mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/feed/ 2
        Virgin Pina Colada https://foolproofliving.com/virgin-gorda-style-pina-colada/ https://foolproofliving.com/virgin-gorda-style-pina-colada/#comments Mon, 24 Jul 2023 00:57:04 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6290 If you have ever wondered how to make a virgin pina colada or just need a non-alcoholic drink to sip…]]>

        If you have ever wondered how to make a virgin pina colada or just need a non-alcoholic drink to sip on to feel like you are on a tropical island, you have come to the right place. This alcohol-free pina colada recipe has the same creamy, beachy vibes as this Pina Colada Smoothie but with a mocktail twist.

        And if you are looking for more refreshing non-alcoholic drinks, make sure to check out our Strawberry Basil Limeade, Rosemary Mint Lemonade, Kale Pineapple Smoothie, and Ginger Iced Tea.

        Person holding a virgin pina colada in her hand with a cherry on top.

        Virgin Pina Colada Ingredients

        A frozen virgin pina colada recipe only requires a handful of key ingredients. It’s a short list of  tropical flavors, including the following ingredients:

        Ingredients for virgin colada from the top view.
        • Frozen Pineapple: Look for frozen pineapple chunks in the frozen fruit section of your local grocery store. If you cannot find frozen pineapple, flash freeze fresh pineapple. To do so, simply remove the outer skin and core, then cut the pineapple into bite-size pieces. Place on a parchment-lined baking sheet and freeze for 30 minutes – 1 hour. You can also add more ice if frozen pineapple is unavailable.
        • Coconut Milk: We used full-fat coconut milk to create a healthier (and mildly sweet) version. For a sweeter take, make a virgin pina colada with 3-ingredients by using 1 cup sweetened Coco Lopez Cream of Coconut (affiliate link) and omitting the coconut sugar – add more pineapple juice (or try coconut water) if you find the mixture to be a little too thick.
        • Pineapple Juice: We think that unsweetened pineapple juice, usually found in a can, gives this Piña Colada mocktail an even more tropical flavor. Add more juice after blending based on your desired consistency. Swap it out for mango juice or orange juice for a different flavor.
        • Ice Cubes: Ice adds a creamy, slushy, icy texture. You can also use about ½ cup crushed ice, which will blend more evenly.
        • Coconut Sugar: Coconut sugar keeps it naturally sweetened with no refined sugar. Add more after blending if you would like it on the sweeter side.
        • Garnish: Stick to the classic fresh pineapple wedge or pineapple slices and maraschino cherry. Or, give it a real warm beach vibe with fresh mint and a mini cocktail umbrella. Maple Whipped Cream or a dollop of Honey Ice Cream takes it that much more over the top.

        Optional Add Ins / Variations

        • Rum: Make a pina colada cocktail by adding a shot of rum per drink (about 4-6 ounces total for this recipe). This could be white rum, coconut, or dark rum.
        • Extracts: If you would still like to enjoy a pina colada mocktail, but with rum flavor, add 1 – 2 tsp rum extract for extra flavor. A dash of vanilla extract never hurts, either.
        • Lime Juice: Add a squeeze of fresh lime juice to balance the sweetness of the pineapple and coconut flavor.

        How to Make Pina Colada without Alcohol?

        Non-alcoholic pina coladas are ready in less than 5 minutes after a quick whiz in the blender. It is so refreshing and creamy, you will never miss the alcohol. Here’s how I like to do it:

        A collage of images showing how to make virgin pina colada.
        1. Add ingredients to blender: In this order, place the frozen pineapple chunks, unsweetened coconut milk, pineapple juice, coconut sugar, and ice into a blender.
        2. Blend: Start off on low power, then increase to high power and blend until smooth, about 30 seconds. Taste for sweetness and add more if desired.
        3. Serve: Pour into a chilled cocktail glass. Garnish with pineapple wedges and maraschino cherries.

        How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers

        While this homemade non-alcoholic pina colada is best served the moment it is made, there are a few steps you can take to get ahead. You can:

        • Make Ahead: Prep and measure out all the ingredients in advance. Keep stored in the freezer and fridge, respectively.
        • Storage: Leftover virgin pina colada mix can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for 1-2 days. The mixture will melt and split, so reblend with some ice before enjoying.
        • Popsicles: Give it a creative spin and pour any leftovers into popsicle molds. Freeze until set, and enjoy!

        Expert Tips

        • Coconut milk vs coconut cream: This recipe is best made with canned coconut milk rather than coconut cream (which has a higher fat content). To make sure the can of coconut milk is well blended, vigorously shake before opening or blend in a high-speed blender.
        • Use a hurricane glass: Stick to the curved hurricane glasses for classic pina coladas right at home.
        • Chill cocktail glasses: Chilled cocktail glasses keep the drink super cold without diluting it with extra ice. Place the glasses in the fridge or freezer for at least 1 hour, or until ready to serve.
        • Prep the garnishes: Make sure to have pineapple wedges and maraschino cherries at the ready so that your virgin colada cocktail doesn’t have time to melt. And don’t forget the paper umbrella for authentic Caribbean vibes.
        Two glasses of virgin colada garnished with pineapple wedges.

        FAQs

        What’s in a virgin pina colada?

        This healthy and mildly sweet pina colada without alcohol is made with frozen pineapple, coconut milk, pineapple juice, ice, and coconut sugar.

        Who invented the pina colada?

        Deemed the official drink of Puerto Rico, the first accounts of a pina colada came from bartender Ramon “Monchito” Marrero at the Caribe Hilton in 1954 in San Juan, Puerto Rico.

        Why is it called virgin pina colada?

        Pina Colada is Spanish for ‘strained pineapple’. Virgin pina colada denotes an alcohol-free version, which means the whole family can enjoy this fun drink on a hot summer’s day.

        Are virgin pina coladas healthy?

        This virgin colada is quite healthy as it contains no refined sugar, no alcohol, and clean, fresh ingredients you can feel good about. As a bonus, it is also vegan and dairy-free.

        Other Non-Alcoholic Recipes You Might Also Like:

        If you enjoyed this non-alcoholic pina colada recipe, I am pretty sure you will also like a few of our other mocktails. Below are our favorite summer sips that are worth checking out:

        If you try this Pina Colada recipe without alcohol, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Homemade virgin piña colada recipe in glasses.
        Print

        Virgin Pina Colada Recipe

        Here’s a simple Virgin Pina Colada recipe that’s made with healthier ingredients without any refined sugars. With only four simple ingredients, you can make this non- alcoholic and refreshing drink in minutes. It is surely the best mocktail to enjoy on a hot summer day.
        Course Non Alcoholic Drink
        Cuisine Caribbean
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 4 serving
        Calories 144kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 cups frozen pineapple chunks (8 ounces)
        • 1 can unsweetened coconut milk (13.5 ounces) – Shake well
        • ½ cup unsweetened pineapple juice
        • 1 cup ice
        • 2 tablespoons coconut sugar more if necessary

        Garnishes

        • 4 wedges pineapple
        • 4 Maraschino cherries Optional

        Instructions

        • Place the frozen pineapple chunks, unsweetened coconut milk, pineapple juice, coconut sugar, and ice into a blender.
        • Blend until smooth. Taste for sweetness and add more if necessary.
        • If preferred, pour into a glass and garnish with pineapple wedges and Maraschino cherries (if preferred.)

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe yields ~ 32 ounces of virgin colada. Each serving is about 8 ounces.
        • Chill your glasses: Place your glasses in the freezer at least 30 minutes before making this drink to ensure that they are super cold.
        • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for 1-2 days. The mixture will melt and split, so reblend with some ice before enjoying.
        • Popsicles: Give it a creative spin and pour any leftovers into popsicle molds. Freeze until set, and enjoy!
        • Rum: Turn this into a pina colada cocktail by adding a shot of rum per drink (about 4-6 ounces total for this recipe). This could be white rum, coconut, or dark rum.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 144kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 331mg | Potassium: 204mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 21IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 48mg | Iron: 2mg

        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/virgin-gorda-style-pina-colada/feed/ 6
        Mediterranean Seasoning https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/#respond Wed, 28 Jun 2023 15:00:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68504 There are countless reasons to prepare this Mediterranean spice blend. Not only are homemade spice mixes fast and flavorful, but…]]>

        There are countless reasons to prepare this Mediterranean spice blend. Not only are homemade spice mixes fast and flavorful, but they’re also an easy way to save money on your spice cabinet. With just a handful of fresh, natural ingredients, you can make dozens of spice combinations guaranteed to be free of fillers and preservatives. Plus, you can tailor your recipe perfectly to your preferences by adjusting the spice levels or modifying how much salt you include.

        So, go ahead and make a batch and bring the most-loved flavors of the Mediterranean region to your own kitchen with this unique combination of warming spices you probably already have in your spice cabinet.

        Mediterranean seasoning with a spoon from the top view.

        What is in Mediterranean seasoning?

        Also referred to as a Mediterranean herb blend, this seasoning is a classic mixture of common Mediterranean spices and herbs—basic, natural ingredients you likely already have in your spice cabinet!

        Mediterranean herbs and spices in small spoons with text on every ingredient.
        • Garlic powder: I use garlic powder here. However, you can use granulated garlic if you can’t get your hands on it. The granulated version is thicker compared to its powdered version. Therefore, if you prefer a finer Mediterranean spice mix, simply use a food processor or spice grinder to crush your granulated garlic into smaller fragments.
        • Onion powder
        • Dried basil
        • Dried oregano: I prefer Italian oregano in this spice blend recipe due to its minty, herbaceous undertones. Mexican oregano will add too much citrusy flavor, resulting in a different flavor profile. 
        • Dried dill weed
        • Dried parsley
        • Dried rosemary
        • Dried thyme
        • Ground black pepper
        • Dried Lemon peel: This is probably the only ingredient that may require a trip to the store, but it is worth it. Dried lemon peel (affiliate link) lends this simple spice mixture an irresistible hint of fresh, tart flavor—in addition to its signature bright color. However, you could also use orange peel. And if that doesn’t work, you can add fresh lemon zest right before you are ready to use this Mediterranean seasoning in your recipe.

        Optional Additions:

        • Kosher salt: Add ½ teaspoon salt to your mixing bowl for extra savory spice. Or, add it separately to your recipe while cooking to ensure it doesn’t come out too salty.
        • Ground cumin: Cumin is the key to giving Mediterranean cuisine its hearty, earthy taste—especially when making meat dishes and kabobs. Depending on your recipe, you can add ground cumin directly into your spice or separately. If you are a spice nerd like me, you can also purchase cumin seeds and grind them in your own spice grinder for an even fresh flavor.
        • Ground cinnamon: Want to add a little warmth to your Mediterranean spices? Just ¼ teaspoon of ground cinnamon will add a woody richness to your blend, making it the perfect addition to meat recipes.
        • Dried mint: Mint is a wonderful addition to this recipe, as it naturally sharpens the unique flavors of the other herbs. However, remember that dried mint is a potent herb, and a little bit can go a long way in this spice blend. 

        How to Make This Recipe?

        You can have a sumptuous flavoring for all your favorite dishes in just five minutes and one step.

        Person mixing Mediterranean spices in a jar from the top view.

        Simply add your ingredients to a small mixing bowl, adjusting the salt and seasoning levels to your taste. Mix until thoroughly blended. Use it in your recipe right away, or transfer the Mediterranean herb seasoning to an airtight jar for later use.

        Storage Instructions

        Whether you’re using this Mediterranean spice blend recipe for weeknight meals or a special occasion, use these storage tips to ensure that your mix stays fresh and flavorful for months.

        • Airtight container: It’s essential that you store your Mediterranean herb mix in an airtight container to ensure the ingredients don’t lose their flavor over time. A jar with a tight-fitting lid is ideal.
        • Check for dryness: Ensure your storage container is fully dry before adding your spice mixture. Also, if you dried your own fresh herbs, ensure all ingredients are completely dry before storing them. Any moisture will make your blend difficult to use, dull its flavors, and may result in unwanted bacteria or mold.
        • Store in a dark place: To keep your spices’ flavors as robust and fresh as possible, store your mixture in a cool, dark place, such as a pantry or cupboard. Exposure to heat and sunlight can strip your herbs of their flavors and limit how long you can use them. 
        • Date and label: I recommend dating and labeling your Mediterranean spices and herbs before storage to keep track of their freshness. This way, you won’t have to fret over your calendar every time you prepare a new dish.
        • Use within six months: To ensure maximum flavor, I suggest using it within six months of preparation. Though the seasoning won’t go bad, it will likely lose its potency the longer it sits.

        Uses of this Mediterranean Spice Mix

        There are endless ways to incorporate it into your cooking. In minutes, you can add fresh, sunny flavors to fan-favorite recipes, from hearty chicken to light seafood.

        • Rub for chicken and turkey: This Mediterranean rub does wonders to enhance the succulent, tender flavors of chicken and turkey recipes. Use it to season chicken thighs in my Mediterranean Chicken with Lemon to bring out their zesty profile. Or, sprinkle a bit over my Baked Split Chicken Breast for a savory, herby addition perfect for soups, salads, and everyday meal prep. For an elegant recipe made for presentation, you could use this spice in my Baked Turkey Tenderloin or add it to my Middle Eastern Chicken Kabob recipe for a summer-ready dish any party crowd will love.
        • Beef and steak seasoning: Using Mediterranean spices for beef is an easy way to balance the hearty flavor of steaks, burgers, meatballs (hello, Turkish Kofte!), and roasts with delicately fresh flavors. 
        • Lamb: If you’re a fan of its grassy, robust taste, I recommend using your Mediterranean spices for lamb. Take your recipe to the next level by adding this seasoning mix to lamb shanks, grilled chops, or lamb burgers with feta.
        • Baked or grilled seafood: It’s no secret that Mediterranean cuisine and fresh seafood go hand in hand. Rub fresh-caught fish with olive oil, lemon juice, sea salt, and Mediterranean seasoning for a delectable dish that comes together in minutes. My Mediterranean Baked Cod is a good example of this.
          Or, add a dash of this tasty rub on some of my favorite seafood recipes, like Grilled Mahi Mahi and Shrimp Kabobs
        • Marinades and sauces: You won’t be able to resist eating your favorite sauces by the spoonful when you include this simple recipe. Add a touch of authentic Mediterranean taste to flavorful kitchen staples, like Basil Tomato Sauce, Green Pasta Sauce, or Garlic Butter Sauce. Or, elevate your meat marinades using it in my basic Easy Shrimp Marinade or Greek Yogurt Chicken Marinade recipes.
        • Salad Dressings: Looking for an easy way to bring your weekday salads to life? Mix your Mediterranean seasoning with olive oil, minced garlic, and either lemon juice or vinegar, and you’ll have a light, healthy salad dressing you can use all week long. You can also embellish my tart Lemon Dressing or creamy Yogurt Dressing by adding a pinch of this easy mixture.
        • Soups and stews: There’s no reason why your favorite soups shouldn’t explode with flavor. Add this Mediterranean blend to my healthy Broccoli and Feta Soup, creamy Red Lentil Soup, or hearty beef stews (hello, Eggplant Beef Stew!) to enliven every spoonful with herby, savory flavors.   
        • Bread dipping oil: The only thing better than a piece of freshly baked bread is one that you serve alongside delicious dipping oil. This Olive Oil Bread Dip would be the perfect accompaniment to dozens of menu ideas—with the addition of this spice mix, of course!
        • Sautéed or roasted vegetables: While some may only think to use this Mediterranean rub for chicken, this fragrant spice mix is one of the easiest ways to add mouthwatering flavor to your favorite veggie dishes. I love including this simple spice in tasty sides, like Pan Roasted Eggplant, Roasted Whole Carrots, and Roasted Cauliflower
        Mediterranean herb blend in a wooden spoon from the top view.

        Expert Tips

        Making your own savory blend of herbs and spices is a great way to add bright, fresh flavor to your menu. With these tips for making Mediterranean spice, you’ll never eat bland food again.

        • Use new herbs and spices: The trick to getting your spice mixture as herbaceous and flavorful as possible is using fresh ingredients. You can make your own dried herbs for extra freshness, but ensure they dry thoroughly before adding them to your mixture.
        • Make it your own: My favorite part about making my own spice blends is how easy they are to customize. Feel free to adjust the spices in this recipe to match your taste. Or, if you don’t like any of the ingredients, you can omit them entirely or use a bit more of something else. For example, if you’re not a fan of dill, you can leave it out and add more thyme. For a spicier mix, you can add red pepper (aka chili pepper flakes), or you could include Spanish paprika for a slightly smokier taste.
        • Give it a good shake: Shake your spices’ storage container before incorporating the blend into your cooking. Because some ingredients tend to shift to the bottom during storage, shaking your mixture will ensure an even distribution of flavors.
        • Start with a small amount: When adding this seasoning to your cooking, I recommend beginning with a small amount and adding more after tasting. Remember, you can always add more spice, but you can’t take it out. 
        • Customize your salt levels: When you buy spice blends at the store, you never know how much salt is inside. That’s why I prefer to make my own seasoning mixtures. For this recipe, you can either add the salt directly into the blend or omit it and add salt to your recipe as needed.

        FAQs

        What is Mediterranean seasoning?

        Mediterranean spices generally include a signature blend of ingredients, such as basil, oregano, rosemary, garlic, and onion powder. However, other versions—often the result of regional differences in the Mediterranean area—include flavor-enhancing additions, such as parsley, thyme, and dill. These different combinations give this classic mixture such versatility in Mediterranean cooking.

        Is Greek seasoning the same as the Mediterranean?

        Because these two variations often include the same spices used in Mediterranean cooking, there is a significant flavor overlap between them. However, Greek seasonings tend to have earthier overtones due to the inclusion of marjoram. Still, because of their similar flavor profiles and regional variations, you can use this Mediterranean spice mix instead of Greek seasoning in your recipes.

        What can I use in place of Mediterranean seasoning?

        Several options exist if you need a replacement for these Mediterranean food spices. Herbs de Provence is a common seasoning blend from France with a slightly more fragrant, herbaceous flavor. You can also use Italian seasoning due to its earthy, somewhat sweet overtones. However, remember that these seasoning blends have slightly different flavor profiles and may affect the outcome of your recipe.

        Is Mediterranean food spicy?

        Generally speaking, Mediterranean dishes are not spicy. However, chefs may add spice to their recipes to increase heat levels and accommodate personal preference.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Other Homemade Seasonings You Might Also Like:

        If you try this Mediterranean Seasoning recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Mediterranean spices for beef, chicken and lamb in small spoons from the top view.
        Print

        Mediterranean Seasoning Recipe

        This Mediterranean spice mix is perfect for flavoring meats, vegetables, soups, stews, sauces, and more. Use this unique blend of spices and herbs in your recipes and bring the Mediterranean to your table.
        Course Seasoning
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 0 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 1 serving
        Calories 21kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 teaspoons onion powder
        • 1 tablespoon dried oregano
        • 1 tablespoon dried basil
        • ½ tablespoon dried dill weed
        • ½ tablespoon dried parsley
        • 1 tablespoon garlic powder
        • 1 teaspoon dried rosemary
        • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
        • 1 teaspoon lemon peel
        • 1/2 teaspoon Kosher salt
        • 1 teaspoon coarsely ground black pepper

        Optional

        • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
        • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon

        Instructions

        • In a small bowl, mix all the ingredients and transfer the mixture to an airtight jar.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe yields 1/3 cup of spice blend. However, it can be multiplied as many times as you need.
        • Storage: B sure to store your mixture in a cool, dark place, such as a pantry or cupboard. As long as it is kept in an airtight container, it should be fresh for up to 6 months. It would technically still be good after then, but we find that you get the freshest flavors if you use it within the first 6 months.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 21kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 296mg | Potassium: 110mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 72IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 69mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/feed/ 0
        Breakfast Fruit Salad https://foolproofliving.com/breakfast-fruit-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/breakfast-fruit-salad/#comments Wed, 21 Jun 2023 15:29:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68420 This recipe is one of the most versatile of all the breakfast fruit ideas. Serve it by itself for a…]]>

        This recipe is one of the most versatile of all the breakfast fruit ideas. Serve it by itself for a healthy, light breakfast, or serve it with my Fruit Yogurt Dip on the side for a tantalizingly creamy dish perfect for a beautiful brunch spread. You can even use your fruit mix to top off or incorporate it into your morning oatmeal (hello, Yogurt Overnight Oats)for a satisfying morning meal.

        Fruit in a large bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients You’ll Need for Fruit Breakfast Salad

        You only need two sets of simple ingredients for this breakfast fruit salad recipe: the fruits and the fruit salad dressing.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text written on each ingredient.

        Breakfast fruits: Wondering what ingredients to include when you make fruit for breakfast? This classic mix of colorful produce will brighten your table with nutritious, brilliant flavors.

        • Pineapple: Pick out a ripe pineapple that is juicy and sweet.
        • Grapes: You can use both red and yellow grapes in this recipe. However, I would recommend getting the seedless variety.
        • Berries: Nearly any berry will make this simple morning dish full of ripe, juicy flavors. My favorite fresh berries include strawberries, blackberries, and blueberries.
        • Oranges
        • Kiwis
        • Banana: I adore the creamy, sweet taste of fresh bananas. However, you can omit this ingredient if you’re not a fan of the fruit or preparing this recipe beforehand.

        Fruit salad dressing:

        • Orange juice and orange zest: Be sure to use fresh orange juice and orange zest when you make fruit dishes for breakfast. Fresh oranges will give your recipe a delectable balance of tartness and sweetness guaranteed to satisfy your cravings.
        • Lime juice and lime zest: Fresh lime juice is the secret ingredient to giving this dish its zesty, bright flavor—and keeping your fruit fresh for longer! If you don’t have any limes, you can substitute this ingredient for lemon juice and zest.
        • Vanilla extract
        • Ground cinnamon
        • Sweetener: Because this dish gets natural sweetness from fruits, adding an extra sweetener is optional. If you want to enhance the sweetness of your fresh fruit breakfast, add a bit of honey (or honey syrup), maple syrup, or agave. You could also use my Honey Lime Dressing as a citrus-sweet alternative to this classic fruit dressing.

        Optional Add-Ins

        • Fresh mint: Amongst all fresh herbs, I think mint is the most flavorful addition to a fruit salad. Adding a few fresh leaves will enliven every bite of your breakfast fruit recipes while adding a garden-green color.
        • Shredded coconut flakes: I love using unsweetened coconut flakes as a healthy, no added sugar topping for this sweet spread. Not only do their sweet, nutty flavors complement this simple mix, but they also add an irresistibly crunchy texture.
        • Spices: To add a warm, gourmet spice to your fruit bowl recipe, you can substitute a sprinkle of cardamom, nutmeg, or poppy seeds in place of cinnamon.

        Variations Based on Season and Dietary Restrictions

        The best fruits for a fruit salad match the time of year. If you want to transform this easy dish into a seasonal treat or satisfy a dietary need, you’ll love this collection of tasty fruits to use.

        • Summer: Looking to fill your morning fruit bowl with a mixture of sunny, summer-ready produce? I recommend making your summer salad with peaches, plums, raspberries, nectarines, cantaloupe, honeydew, papayas, and mango.
        • Fall: Fall produce makes some of my favorite fruit breakfasts. To make an autumn fruit salad, use apples, figs, pears, and pomegranate seeds for a dish perfect for the holiday season.
        • Winter: To make a winter fruit salad perfect for special occasions, I recommend adding tart, warm-colored fruits like Mandarin oranges, blood oranges, tangerines, grapefruit, and bananas.
        • Spring: When jumping into the garden-fresh spring season, you’ll want these fruits in your breakfast spread. Apricots and strawberries are some of the most spring-forward fruits in the produce aisle.
        • Low-sugar fruit salad: If you are in need of a healthy fruit salad recipe that has low quantities of sugar, I recommend using low-sugar fruits (as recommended by Healthline), like raspberries, strawberries, blackberries, kiwis, and grapefruit.
        • Low-calorie fruit salad: Want to cut down on your morning calorie intake? No problem! Some of the lowest-calorie fresh fruits for breakfast include apples, berries, grapefruit, passion fruit, and stone fruits (e.g., peaches, nectarines, and apricots).

        Hot to Make Fruit Salad for Breakfast?

        You don’t need a home garden to make a healthy breakfast. While it takes a bit of time to chop all the fruit, once you have them ready, you can prepare a breakfast or brunch fruit salad in just four simple steps:

        A collage of images showing how to make breakfast or brunch fruit salad recipe.
        1. Add the fruit: Take out a large bowl, and add the fresh strawberries, pineapple, grapes, blueberries, blackberries, cut oranges, and kiwis. Add the banana if you plan to serve this dish immediately. If you’re making this dish ahead, wait to add the banana just before serving.
        2. Make the dressing: In a small bowl or mason jar, mix the orange juice, orange zest, lime juice, lime zest, vanilla extract, and cinnamon. Either whisk or vigorously shake everything until combined thoroughly. If you are using honey, be sure also to whisk that into the dressing.
        3. Add the dressing: Drizzle the dressing over the fruit salad and gently toss to combine.
        4. Serve: If using, garnish the fruit salad with fresh mint leaves and serve.

        How To Make Ahead, Meal Prep, and Store?

        It doesn’t matter whether you want a make fruit salad ahead for a crowd or an easy recipe for everyday meal prep. This simple guide will show you how to keep your salad fresh for a few additional days.

        • Make ahead: This recipe is one of the greatest brunch fruit ideas because it’s so easy to make ahead of time. Simply cut up your fruits and place them in a large mixing bowl. Then, just before serving, add the banana and drizzle the fruit with your prepared dressing.
        • Meal prep: Looking for easy breakfast fruit cup ideas? Divide the prepared fruit mixture into individual airtight cups or mason jars (or Weck Jars (affiliate link) as I did in the photo below), and store them in the fridge until ready to eat. Then, add the bananas right before serving and keep the dressing on the side. As long as they are stored in airtight containers, they should be fresh for up to 3 days.
        • Storage: You can store this sugar-free fruit salad in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. Remember that the salad will get watery after the second day but still taste delicious.
        Breakfast fruit placed in glass jars from the top view.

        What to Serve with Fruit Salad for Breakfast?

        Want to serve fruit for a brunch buffet or make a delicious fruit bowl for breakfast? When you make this easy recipe, you’ll discover countless ways to transform seasonal produce into a filling meal. 

        Expert Tips

        It doesn’t matter whether you’re serving this fruit salad for lunch or want to make a kid-friendly fruit salad your children will love. The below tips will ensure your salad is as fresh and flavorful on your first try.

        • Choose fresh fruits: The key to any good fruit breakfast is selecting high-quality fruits. Ensure your produce isn’t bruised or moldy, and try to choose adequately ripe fruit. However, avoid overly ripe fruit, as these ingredients likely won’t hold their shape and become mushy in your salad mixture.
        • Visual interest: To make the best fruit salad for a special event, I recommend using fruits in a variety of colors—red, yellow, green, and beyond! This way, it will look appetizing and add a nice pop of color to your tablescape.
        • Proper cutting: I recommend cutting your fruit into equal bite-sized pieces to ensure your salad is easy to eat. If you’re serving this recipe as a breakfast fruit plate, you can slice your larger fruits, arrange them on a plate, fill the empty spaces with strawberries, and top the spread with blueberries. 
        • Wash and dry your fruit properly: It’s essential to ensure your fruit is clean and safe to eat before incorporating it into your homemade fruit salad. However, remember that some fruits bruise easily, and washing berries requires particular gentleness. Be sure to be equal parts thorough and light when washing your produce.
        • Do not skip on the lime juice or lime zest: Because of its preservational properties, a little lime or lemon juice is a great way to prevent your fruit from browning. Plus, this addition enhances the taste of the salad by balancing its sweet flavors with an irresistible tanginess.
        • Adding banana: Some people think banana has no place as seasonal fruit for summer. However, they add a creamy, mild taste to any fresh fruit salad, and they pack tons of Vitamin C and potassium to fuel you through your day. Still, you can easily omit it if you are not a fan.
        • Dress it right before serving: I recommend dressing the salad right before serving. If you drizzle on the dressing too far in advance, your salad may become overly juicy and soggy.
        • Make it kid-friendly: The below recipe as written, is a great fruit salad for kids due to its bright color, nutritious ingredients, and sweet taste. However, depending on your kids’ age, you may want to cut your fruit into smaller or bite-sized pieces.

        FAQs

        Is it okay to eat a fruit salad for breakfast?

        Yes! Fruit salad makes one of the healthiest options for a quick morning meal due to its high vitamin and mineral content. Plus, depending on which fruits you add, you can kick-start your day with other nutrients, such as potassium, that may help maintain healthy blood pressure, reduce your risk of diabetes, and promote immunity. With that being said, it is important to consume fruit in moderation.

        Is fruit salad a healthy snack?

        Definitely! Doctors recommend that people eat at least 400 grams of fruit per day (or five servings of 80 grams), so eating fruit salad as a snack will help you reach your dietary goals while reducing your risk of disease, aiding weight loss, and enhancing your body’s store of essential nutrients. However, it is always best to consult your doctor and get the best advice for your dietary requirements.

        Should I peel fruits when making fruit salads?

        Peeling your fruit is a personal choice for this breakfast fruit bowl recipe. However, I recommend peeling off any skins that are hard to digest, such as orange, kiwi, and banana peels.

        Can I use frozen fruit?

        Yes, but ensure your fruits are fully thawed (room temperature is best) before adding them to your mixture.

        Other Fruit Breakfast Recipes

        No one can resist a sweet bowl of fruit for breakfast. If you want other ingenious ways to incorporate nutritious fruit into your morning, you’ll love these simple dishes.

        • Yogurt Parfait: If you want a recipe incorporating healthy breakfast fruit with creamy, light Greek yogurt, this dish is precisely what you need.
        • Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal: Pack all the fresh, crisp flavors of the orchard into your morning bowl with this 15-minute recipe.
        • Instant Pot Quinoa Breakfast Bowl: This vegan, gluten-free breakfast recipe comes together in less than 20 minutes and is the perfect make-ahead dish.
        • Peach Galette: Search no more for a healthy dessert. This sophisticated recipe makes for the perfect brunch dessert—especially when served with my fan favorite Honey Vanilla Ice Cream.
        • Christmas Morning Fruit Salad: I switch things up a bit during the holidays and make a salad with the red and green fruit in season for a festive treat.
        • Can’t get enough? Check out all our fruity desserts.

        If you try this Breakfast Fruit Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Breakfast fruit salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        Breakfast Fruit Salad Recipe

        Here is a breakfast fruit salad that will help you start the day in a healthy way. Made without the use of any additional sugars, this easy fruit salad can be served by itself or as a side dish served with baked goods, eggs, or oatmeal.
        Course Breakfast, Brunch
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 15 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 131kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Fruit Salad

        • 2 cups pineapple peeled, cored, and cut into 1-inch pieces
        • 1 cup grapes rinsed and halved
        • 1 cup strawberries rinsed, hulled, and quartered
        • 1 cup blueberries rinsed
        • 1 cup blackberries rinsed
        • 1 orange peeled and cut into 1-inch pieces
        • 2 Kiwis peeled and cut into 1-inch pieces
        • 1 banana peeled and sliced – optional

        For The Salad Dressing

        • ¼ cup orange juice freshly squeezed
        • 1 teaspoon orange zest
        • 2 teaspoons lime zest
        • 4 tablespoons lime juice from approximately 2 limes
        • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
        • teaspoon ground cinnamon
        • Handful of fresh mint leaves chopped – Optional

        Instructions

        • Place the pineapple, grapes, strawberries, blueberries, blackberries, cut orange, and kiwi in a large bowl. If you are serving it right away, add the banana, but if you are making it ahead of time, we recommend adding the banana right before serving.
        • To make the fruit salad dressing, combine the orange juice, orange zest, lime juice, lime zest, vanilla extract, and cinnamon* in a small bowl or mason jar. Whisk or shake vigorously to incorporate.
        • Drizzle the fruit salad with the dressing and gently toss to combine.
        • If using, garnish with fresh mint leaves and serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe yields approximately 8-9 cups of breakfast fruit salad. The nutritional values below are for 1 serving.
        • Sweetener*: As we were working on this recipe, we wanted it to be a healthy no-sugar-added breakfast option. However, if preferred, you can add a tablespoon (or more) of honey (or honey simple syrup) to the dressing. Honey-sweetened fruit salad is slightly sweeter but has a subtle (but welcome) honey flavor.
        • Make ahead: If you want to make it ahead, simply cut up the fruit (except the banana) and prepare the dressing. Store them in separate airtight containers. Then, just before serving, add the banana and drizzle the fruit with the prepared dressing.
        • Meal prep: Divide the prepared fruit mixture into individual airtight cups, mason, or weck jars, and store them in the fridge until ready to eat. Then, add the bananas right before serving and keep the dressing on the side. As long as they are stored in airtight containers, they should be fresh for up to 3 days.
        • Storage: The leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. Remember that the salad will get watery after the second day but still taste delicious.
        • Making it for a crowd? Feel free to multiply the recipe as many times as you need.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 131kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 4mg | Potassium: 407mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 232IU | Vitamin C: 93mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/breakfast-fruit-salad/feed/ 4
        Homemade Blackening Seasoning https://foolproofliving.com/blackening-seasoning/ https://foolproofliving.com/blackening-seasoning/#respond Sat, 10 Jun 2023 17:52:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68051 Better than the cult favorite Zatarain’s blackened seasoning recipe, this five-minute rub builds upon cajun spice for an incredible flavor—something…]]>

        Better than the cult favorite Zatarain’s blackened seasoning recipe, this five-minute rub builds upon cajun spice for an incredible flavor—something I always keep handy in my spice cabinet. Not only does it add an irresistible kick to dozens of foods, but it’s also the key ingredient of my Blackened Cod and Blackened Mahi Mahi recipe. Use this savory blackening rub for all of your proteins, veggies, grains, and more, and you’ll never be at a loss for simple and flavorful weeknight meals again.

        Blackened seasoning on a plate with a spoon in the middle.

        What Does Blackening Mean, and How to Blacken Foods?

        “Blackening” is a process in which you pat dry your main ingredient (primarily meat and fish), brush it with melted butter or olive oil, then dredge it through a combination of spices—usually a traditional blackened seasoning blend. Then, cook the meat in a scorching cast-iron skillet until it forms a charred, spice-infused exterior.

        Popularized by Paul Prudhomme, this technique of cooking and the seasoning mix is usually used when cooking seafood and chicken dishes, but you can also use a blackening rub on other meats—such as steak and pork—veggies, soups, grains, and even pasta. 

        What is Blackened Seasoning?

        Blackened seasoning, also referred to as “Blackening Seasoning”, is a traditional Louisiana spice blend that creates a crisp, blackened exterior when added to meat, poultry, or seafood and cooked in a hot cast iron skillet. 

        Popular in Cajun cooking, this iconic spice mixture often includes paprika, onion powder, garlic powder, cayenne pepper, thyme, oregano, black pepper, and salt. 

        What is in Blackened Seasoning?

        You only need a handful of pantry-ready ingredients to make this iconic Louisianian spice mix:

        An image showing what spices are in blackened seasoning with text on each spice.
        • Paprika: Smoked paprika is ideal for giving this Cajun blackened seasoning its signature smoky flavor. However, regular paprika will also work.
        • Onion powder
        • Garlic powder
        • Dried oregano
        • Dried thyme
        • Ground black pepper
        • Kosher salt: Salt is the key ingredient to livening up the other spices’ unique flavors. However, if you’re watching your sodium intake or simply want to limit how much salt you use, you can easily make a salt-free blackened seasoning by omitting the salt. 
        • Cayenne pepper: Though cayenne pepper is optional, it’s a great addition if you want to give your rub a spicy kick. Feel free to heat level according to your taste buds.
        • Other optional additions: While these are the basic blackened spice mix ingredients, you can also add other spices for more complex flavor profiles. Some of my favorites include ground cumin, white pepper, and dried basil—though there are countless others to try.

        How to Make It?

        Making blackening seasoning is an easy way to infuse your kitchen with bold, aromatic flavors. With a total time of five minutes, making this recipe is as easy as it gets.

        1. Mix the spices: Place all the blackened seasoning ingredients in a small bowl. Stir them together until they blend evenly.
        2. Store: Transfer the mixture into an airtight container with a tight-fitting lid—such as a mason jar and store it in a cool, dry space. Your blackened seasoning will stay fresh for up to a year.

        How to Use Blackened Seasoning?

        You’ll add countless mouthwatering dishes to your recipe book when you make your own blackened seasoning. Prepare to cook like a master Lousianian chef with these tasty menu ideas.

        Fish coated with blackened spice mix on a plate from the top view.
        • Meat: The traditional way to enjoy this blackening spice blend is by using it to create a flavorful crust on meats. I love dredging my favorite meats (i.e., shrimp and salmon) through this homemade seasoning, making the perfect blackening recipe for fish, chicken, seafood, and steak. I even use this seasoning as the flavor base of my Blackened Mahi Mahi recipe
        • Vegetables: This blackening spice recipe is essential when adding a savory, piquant flavor to grilled or roasted vegetables. Sprinkle it on veggies like corn, zucchini, potatoes, and eggplant for a simple veggie dish.
        • Pasta, rice, and grains: One of the best ways to use this versatile seasoning is in your favorite grain recipes. Add this secret ingredient to creamy pasta sauces, or sprinkle it in a bowl of plain rice to give it a kick of New Orleans flavor.
        • Nuts and popcorn: Transform your everyday snacks into five-star fare by adding a dash of this robust seasoning. I love sprinkling this DIY blackened seasoning over a bowl of nuts or popcorn, giving each bite an out-of-this-world taste.
        • Soups and stews: Just like Italian seasoning, this easy blackened seasoning recipe is just what you need to take your soup-making to the next level. With just a few simple ingredients, every tablespoon will burst with delicious, bold flavors.

        Expert Tips

        There’s no guesswork when making this easy blackening seasoning recipe. These pro tips will make your kitchen smell like a gourmet market any day of the week.

        • Fresh spices: The best blackened seasoning begins with fresh spices. Not only do quality spices have a more potent flavor, but they’ll also keep your seasoning fresher for longer. Be sure to check the expiration date of all your ingredients before adding them to your mixture, and use new ingredients whenever possible. 
        • Sealed storage: Tightly seal your blackened seasoning in an airtight container to keep it fresh during storage. I also recommend placing your sealed seasoning in a cool, dark place to keep the flavors from drying out.
        • Mix well: To give every teaspoon of this blackening spice mix a well-balanced taste, evenly blend the spices. Each spoonful should have an equal amount of every ingredient.
        • Make it your own: The best part about the ingredients in blackened seasoning is how easy they are to adjust. Feel free to experiment with each spice’s proportions to satisfy your own preferences. For example, you could give your rub more heat by increasing the amount of cayenne pepper. Or, add more paprika for a smokier, deeper taste.
        • Adjust salt: If you’d prefer a low-sodium blackening seasoning, add less salt to your mixture or omit it altogether.
        • Safety: Proper air ventilation is a must when you cook with blackened seasoning. The high heat of the cooking process may cause your spices to smoke, resulting in coughing or irritation if inhaled directly. To avoid this from happening, I recommend turning on your kitchen’s overhead fan and, if possible, opening nearby windows.

        FAQs

        Still have questions about this homemade blackened seasoning? Don’t worry! This simple guide covers everything from cajun seasoning vs. blackened seasoning to how to adjust spice levels.

        Is blackening seasoning spicy?

        It can be! This spice rub’s heat comes primarily from its cayenne pepper, so you can adjust how much you use to reach your desired spice level.

        What does blackened seasoning taste like?

        Blackened rub tastes very similar to cajun and creole seasonings, with a spicy, smoky, and savory flavor.

        What’s the difference between blackening seasoning, cajun seasoning, and creole spice?

        Though similar, slight variations exist between blackened, cajun, and creole seasoning. Cajun seasoning tends to be spicier, with a higher proportion of cayenne pepper, and people often add it to traditional Cajun cuisine dishes, such as gumbo and jambalaya. Meanwhile, creole spice uses more herbs—like celery seed and dried basil—to make milder, more refined creole dishes.

        What is a good blackened seasoning substitute?

        If you need a substitute for blackened seasoning, don’t worry! There are dozens of similar recipes to try. Cajun and creole seasonings use a similar base, producing comparable flavor profiles. Old Bay seasoning also has a similar taste but tends to be saltier. If you don’t have any pre-made spice mixes, you could make a stripped-down version of this recipe with a chili, onion, and garlic powder blend. You could also use homemade taco seasoning—usually a chili powder and cumin mix—for an earthier, more citrusy version. If you don’t mind a sweeter, tangier alternative, you could also use a Canadian classic made with brown sugar and dry mustard: Traeger Blackened Saskatchewan Rub.

        If you try this Blackening Seasoning recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Blackened chicken seasoning recipe on a plate with a spoon.
        Print

        Blackened Seasoning Recipe

        Learn how to make your own blackened seasoning and use it to blacken fish, chicken, steak, and vegetables. This unique seasoning mix is an inexpensive and easy way to add spicy, smokey, and earthy flavors to all your favorite dishes.
        Course Condiment
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 0 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 13kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 teaspoons smoked paprika
        • 1 ½ teaspoon onion powder
        • 1 ½ teaspoon garlic powder
        • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
        • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
        • 1 teaspoon ground black pepper
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

        Optional:

        • ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper

        Instructions

        • Mix all the ingredients in a small bowl and stir to ensure that they are evenly blended.
        • Store in a jar with a tight-fitting lid (such as a mason or a small glass jar) for up to a year.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes ¼ cup of blackened seasoning. It can be multiplied as needed.
        • Make it your own: Feel free to adjust the amount used according to your taste buds. This also applies to the amount of salt used. If you prefer to salt your food separately, we recommend omitting salt.
        • Safety: Proper air ventilation is a must when you cook with blackened seasoning. The high heat of the cooking process may cause your seasoning mix to smoke, resulting in coughing or irritation if inhaled directly. To avoid discomfort, we recommend turning on your kitchen’s overhead fan and, if possible, opening nearby windows.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 13kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 64mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 617IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/blackening-seasoning/feed/ 0
        Mango Pineapple Salsa https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/#comments Sat, 10 Jun 2023 17:49:18 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68053 Preparing mango salsa with pineapple is one of my favorite ways to make a fruity, fresh, and zesty condiment that…]]>

        Preparing mango salsa with pineapple is one of my favorite ways to make a fruity, fresh, and zesty condiment that pairs with dozens of dishes. Like my Peach Salsa and Cherry Tomato Salsa, this recipe is delicious as an appetizer, a topping for fish-based mains, or even a side for hearty meats. This dish will be your new summer staple, no matter how you serve it.

        Mango pineapple salsa in a bowl with chips on the side from the top view.

        Ingredients

        This recipe for mango pineapple salsa uses a handful of fresh, healthy ingredients to get its signature fruity taste:

        Ingredients for the recipe on a white backdrop with text on each ingredient.
        • Pineapple: Pineapple is essential to give this recipe its sweet, tropical overtones. I recommend using fresh pineapple for the freshest, healthiest taste. You can even add grilled pineapple for extra smoky, caramelized flavors. Canned pineapple will work in a pinch if you don’t have fresh alternatives, but be aware of their added sugar.
        • Mango: Fresh, sweet mangos are the best pick for this fresh pineapple mango salsa. Frozen mango will also work, but thaw it completely before adding it to your recipe.
        • Red onion: Red onion gives this simple salsa a sharp, bold flavor kick. You can also use Mexican Pickled Onions for a tangier, zestier take.
        • Jalapeño pepper: A bit of pepper is the key to giving this mango pineapple jalapeno salsa its classic balance of sweet and spicy flavors. I recommend using seeded jalapeno peppers to give this recipe a little heat, but you can also remove the seeds if you like.
        • Fresh cilantro
        • Fresh Lime juice: I recommend using freshly squeezed lime juice for this easy salsa dish. However, you can also use lime juice from a bottle if you don’t have any fresh limes on hand.
        • Salt

        Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

        • Green onions: Want to make this tangy salsa a little milder? Use a bit of finely chopped green onions instead of red onions. This easy ingredient substitution is both delicious and colorful.
        • Mint: If you’re not a fan of cilantro, fresh mint makes an excellent substitution, giving this recipe a bright, herby flavor.
        • Avocado: Adding a few chunks of ripe avocado is the best way to add a mild, creamy taste to this fruit salsa.
        • Cherry tomatoes: Transform this simple recipe into pineapple mango pico de gallo by adding a cup of finely chopped cherry tomatoes. This addition will add sharp juiciness to each bite—perfect for tacos!
        • Habanero: To increase the heat level of this recipe, add a little bit of finely chopped habanero peppers. These tiny veggies will give your salsa a bold kick, perfect for spice lovers.

        How to Make Mango Pineapple Salsa

        Even beginner chefs can prepare pineapple mango jalapeno salsa in a snap! With just four steps and a handful of ingredients, your table will overflow with sweet, zesty, and salty flavors.

        A collage of images showing how to make mango salsa.
        1. Add the ingredients: Add the chopped pineapple, mango, red onion, jalapeno, cilantro, lime juice, and salt to a large mixing bowl.
        2. Mix: Stir until you thoroughly combine the ingredients.
        3. Let it rest: Cover the mixed salsa with plastic wrap and refrigerate for 30 minutes to two hours to combine the flavors.
        4. Serve: Serve the mango pineapple salsa as a condiment or with a bowl of tortilla chips.

        How to Make and Ahead and Store?

        This fresh fruit salsa is a great recipe for make-ahead meal plans during the summer months.

        • Make ahead: You can make this easy salsa recipe up to 24 hours in advance. Simply store it in an airtight container in the fridge until ready to serve.
        • Store: Transfer your leftover salsa to an airtight container and place it in the refrigerator for up to 2-3 days. When ready to serve, give it a good stir, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary, as fruit salsa tends to lose its saltiness during storage. This step will ensure your recipe’s flavors are still bold and evenly mixed.

        What to Serve with Mango Pineapple Salsa?

        It doesn’t matter whether you’re preparing a light Thai lunch or pork chops on the grill. With this delectable collection, you’ll never wonder what to serve with pineapple salsa again.

        Mango pineapple salsa for fish over blackened mahi mahi on a plate.
        • Appetizer with chips: One of the easiest, tastiest ways to serve this simple salsa recipe is as an appetizer or a snack with your favorite tortilla chips. Served alongside my Super Easy Guacamole and Corn Salsa, this crowd-pleaser will complete your menu of game-day recipes.
        • On grilled or roasted fish: This mango pineapple salsa for fish is a refreshing, bright combination that will make you feel like you’re at a seaside restaurant. Serve this luscious condiment on top of Cajun Mahi Mahi (as pictured above), Grilled Mahi Mahi or Breaded Fish, and it’ll disappear in minutes.
        • Over chicken: No one can resist the tender, sweet combination of grilled chicken with pineapple salsa. Serve your salsa with grilled or roasted chicken using my succulent recipe for Chicken Breast for an elegant pairing perfect for special occasions and weeknight dinners.
        • Tacos: Take your taco game to the next level by topping your spread with this fruity, Instagram-ready condiment. I recommend serving your salsa with fish tacos—especially shrimp tacos!—to bring out your meat’s fresh, tropical flavors.
        • Rice bowls: Adding a few spoonfuls of this pineapple and mango salsa to your favorite rice bowls is an easy way to add a pop of color and sweetness to them. This simple condiment adds a rich, refreshing taste to dishes like a salmon rice bowl and fish taco rice bowl.
        • Pork chops: Few combinations are as sumptuous, sophisticated, or tasty as serving mango pineapple salsa with sweet-and-savory pork. You can even add a touch of classic outdoor smokiness to your plate by preparing grilled pork chops for the table.
        • Thai recipes: Nothing balances Thai recipes’ savory, spicy, and sweet flavors better than a fruity salsa. Top your favorite dishes, like my Thai Steak Noodle Salad, with this 20-minute condiment, and prepare yourself for a host of compliments to the chef.

        Expert Tips

        If you want a fresh salsa with vibrant color and the best flavor, these pro tips are a great way to cook like a master chef. Follow this simple guide for the perfect balance of presentation and taste.

        • Ripe fruit is the best: The best mango pineapple salsa begins with sweet, ripe ingredients. If you have difficulty telling which fruits are ripe, purchase pre-cut fruit at the grocery store. Not only will this save time, but it’ll also guarantee that your ingredients are maximally fresh.
        • Finely chopped: When making this salsa, it’s essential that you chop your ingredients into small, bite-sized pieces. Use a sharp knife and cutting board to ensure easy slicing, and avoid using a food processor, as it will likely result in a watery, off-colored mixture.
        • Taste for seasoning and add more: No one wants their salsa to come out bland. I recommend tasting your mixture for seasoning before serving and adding more if necessary. 
        • Let it rest: Let your fruit salsa chill for at least 30 minutes before serving. This extra resting time allows the ingredients to mix flavors and absorb the added seasoning, giving each bite an exquisite balance of fruity, savory taste.

        FAQs

        What can I substitute mango for in mango salsa?

        If you don’t have ripe mangos, papaya or pineapple are easy substitutes that perfectly mimic mangos’ juicy, sweet taste. Plus, no one can say no to tropical salsa!

        Can you freeze pineapple mango salsa?

        I don’t recommend freezing this condiment, as the temperature change may result in a grainy, unpalatable texture.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Other Mango Recipes You Might Like

        This mango pineapple salsa recipe explodes with sweet, tangy flavors. These simple recipes are just what you need for more refreshing ways to incorporate mango into your weekday menu.

        Mango Pineapple Salsa placed in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        Pineapple Mango Salsa Recipe

        This pineapple mango salsa recipe is a delicious fruit salsa that is packed with fresh flavors. Serve it as an appetizer with tortilla chips or as a condiment over blackened or grilled chicken, fish, or pork.
        Course Condiment
        Cuisine Mexican
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Resting time (optional) 30 minutes
        Total Time 50 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 57kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 cup pineapple peeled, cored, and cut into ¼ inch pieces (5.3 ounces)
        • 1 cup mango peeled and cut into ¼-inch pieces (5.3 ounces)
        • ¼ cup red onion roughly chopped (1 ounce)
        • 1 jalapeno seeded and roughly chopped (1 ounce)
        • 3 tablespoons fresh cilantro roughly chopped
        • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed; approximately 2 limes
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

        Optional add ins:

        • ¼ cup red bell pepper roughly chopped

        Instructions

        • In a bowl, add pineapple, mango, red onion, jalapeño, cilantro, lime juice, and salt. If using, add in the red pepper too.
        • Stir to combine.
        • Cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate for 30 minutes* or up to 2 hours for the flavors to combine.
        • Serve as a condiment or with your favorite tortilla chips on the side.

        Notes

        • Storage: You can store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
        • Ripe and finely chopped: We recommend using fresh ripe fruit that is finely chopped for this fruit salsa.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 57kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.3g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 176mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 828IU | Vitamin C: 56mg | Calcium: 16mg | Iron: 0.3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/feed/ 2